The Joining

THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING by

CJ England

WHISKEY CREEK PRESS www.whiskeycreekpress.com

Published by WHISKEY CREEK PRESS Whiskey Creek Press PO Box 51052 Casper, WY 82605-1052 www.whiskeycreekpress.com

Copyright © 2007 by CJ England Warning: The unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this copyrighted work is illegal. Criminal copyright infringement, including infringement without monetary gain, is investigated by the FBI and is punishable by up to 5 (five) years in federal prison and a fine of $250,000.

Names, characters and incidents depicted in this book are products of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events, locales, organizations, or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental and beyond the intent of the author or the publisher. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher. ISBN 978-1-59374-940-8

Credits Editor: Louise Bohmer Printed in the United States of America

WHAT THEY ARE SAYING ABOUT THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING “Nobody tells a story quite like CJ England! She always manages to focus in on the emotional heart of a story and wring a wide range of emotions from the reader. THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING is no exception and may be Ms. England’s best yet in a career already peppered with exceptionally good books. Her flawless prose makes this seemingly complex story come vividly alive. The aura of mystery surrounding Kira and the Power only adds to the intrigue as this is one superbly written tale! THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING is a sensuous fantasy novel that leaves the reader yearning for the next installment. CJ England weaves her magical storytelling wand and crafts a fantasy novel that is an instant hit.” Recommended Read and 5 Klovers CK2S Kwips and Kritiques Reviewed by Anne

“What an amazing joyride of love, passion, adventure and above all hope for the future. THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING has everything a reader could ever hope for. Each character maintains his or her own storyline while at the same time, combining for an engaging roller coaster ride that will keep you on the edge of your seat from the beginning to the unbelievable end. I was heartbroken; I didn’t want the story to end. CJ England is an outstanding storyteller who always manages to give her

readers everything they want in her male characters; sexy, suave, sweet and strong. I cannot wait to read the next installment from Ms. England very soon.” Recommended Read and 5 Angels Fallen Angels Reviews Reviewed by Amanda “CJ England has written a fascinating book with a story line that will keep the reader driven to finish this exciting story. The characters have a life that leaps off the pages and seems to be able to talk to the reader and keep this story going at a fast pace. This will have the reader unable to put this adventure down, and even when the book is done, the reader will be begging for more. CJ England has written a very well rounded book that will be one for the keeper shelf and make you a fan for life.” Awesome Read and 5 Devils Let’s Talk About Books Reviews Reviewed by Alma “What a phenomenal assemblage of heroes in one book! When this grouping of six impressive men is combined with one spirited heroine, then the resulting story by the talented CJ England is memorable in every aspect. THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING is a romantic adventure filled with believable magical moments and heartfelt emotions between every compelling character. “When I see the name CJ England on a book, I know the story will be packed with original situations and unforgettable characters. Ms. England always fuels my own imagination with the innovative storylines of her characters, where each of their scenes is realistically depicted with convincing thoughts and actions. In THE PEACEKEEPER

JOURNALS: THE JOINING there was not one moment which I did not feel could be factual, as each new circumstance faced by the Peacekeeper and The Chosen was conceivable in the magical world created by this imaginative writer. The escalating danger surrounding this group was effectively portrayed, where powerfully intense emotions were expressed by every member during the story’s finale. With the abundance of heroes featured in this story, I felt like I was experiencing a fantasy come true as each sexy man joined the group. The abundance of love between Kira and the chosen men was palpable and beautifully conveyed, and I found myself completely riveted to each page of this outstanding story. I am so looking forward to the next book in this noteworthy series. THE PEACEKEEPER JOURNALS: THE JOINING is an epic journey of enduring love, self-discovery and inspiring wonder, which will long be remembered.” Ecataromance Rating: 5 Stars Reviewed by Amelia

Dedication To Uncle Bob… whose stories and songs around the campfire will always be one of my best memories of childhood. Thank you. …Day is done, gone the sun, from the lake, from the hills, from the sky. All is well, safely rest, God is nigh... (Taps)

Prologue The night was cool and fragrant with the smells only a big city can have. The scent of Italian food wrestled with the sour odor of a drunk who had passed out in an alley nearby. Salt air and chocolate warred with exhaust fumes. In the distance one could hear the sound of a cat fight and the scream of a junkie as he fought a friend for his next fix. This is San Francisco, the city by the bay. Elegant and charming, a city created by hard work and sweat. Now, it is a mecca of western civilization, known for its art and culture, hosting over sixteen million visitors a year. San Francisco, for all its charm and beauty has a dark side. The Lower City is a place for those who are different. Here live not only the freaks and the crazies, but a different sort all together. Each town has its racial neighborhoods…it’s just a fact of life. But the Lower City isn’t a place for different races, but for those mentioned only in fairie tales or in stories around a campfire. The shops and stores, bars and restaurants don’t advertise who or what they are about, but for those who have an open mind, for those who are curious…the answers are easily found. This is a side of San Francisco tourists don’t pay to see and most of the locals don’t even know about. Safe and secure, tucked away uptown in their cute gingerbread houses and ivory towers, people see just what they want to see. But that is all about to change. 1

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

2

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 1 No one noticed when the cab pulled up. It stopped out on the street, not even bothering to come into the parking lot. A small figure slipped from the cab, then bent back inside to pay the fare. “Are you sure this is where you want to go?” the cabby asked. He looked doubtfully at the strange marquee that topped the building. A neon crown of thorns flashed on and off garishly in the darkness. The thorns were tipped in bright red neon blood. Every time it came on one could see a drop of blood ooze off a thorn and fall into the darkness below. “If this is A Crown of Thorns, then I believe I am in the right place.” The voice was low-pitched and smooth. “All right,” the cabby muttered. “But I can’t wait for you. Not down here in the Lower City.” “It will not be necessary. I will be all right.” “Okee-dokee!” The cabby wasted no more time, but hurriedly pulled away from the building and back to a safer part of town. The figure turned and walked toward the building. A small backpack rested on its shoulders. A soft black leather hat sat low on its head. The long matching leather coat covered the figure from head to toe. The walk was smooth…almost catlike in its grace. The figure crossed the parking lot and stepped right up to the restaurant door where two men were controlling the crowd in lines. 3

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining One stood about five foot eight inches and was stocky. Built like a boxer with a massive chest and powerful forearms, he had the face of a fighter. His nose had been broken several times and his ears were cauliflowered, easily seen since his head was shaved. His cool blue eyes swept the crowd for problems. The other man was his exact opposite. Tall…almost six foot four inches, he was flat-out gorgeous. Beautiful, dark brown eyes and long blond hair showcased a face a model would die for. He too spent time in a gym, but wasn’t as huge as the boxer. He was laughing and flirting with the two women who stood at the front of the line. The figure stood before them quietly until the boxer noticed. “Back of the line,” he growled, staring menacingly down at the figure. When no movement came from the figure dressed in black, the other man tried. “You’ll get in; it’s a slow night. But everybody’s got to wait their turn…ya know.” He smiled winningly, before turning his attention back to the crowd. He was the handler, not the muscle. He knew his job. “Yeah!” snapped one of the girls in line. “Wait your turn like everyone else!” The figure slowly swiveled toward the girl. The head lifted and the girl found herself pinned by a pair of glowing golden eyes. “Shee-it!” The girl stumbled back into her friend, shuddering. She turned away hastily, her lipstick bright against her now pale face. The two guards stiffened and came together in a solid wall blocking the door. “I wish to see your master.” The voice was still low and soft. “Who the hell are you?” The model’s eyes narrowed, as he tried to see under the leather hat. 4

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I have business with your master. Please take me to him.” The boxer scowled and folded his arms across his chest…not an easy task for such a wide man. “You ain’t getting in here without a name and you tellin’ us what you want.” “My business is with your master…not with you. I know what you are and I know what your master is. Please take me to him.” The voice held a trace of impatience now. The two bouncers frowned, showing their first sign of alarm. “You don’t want to go there,” the model warned abruptly. The crowd, always curious, stilled and waited for the show. “I ask you one last time.” The figure in black’s voice held warning as well. “I wish to see your master. Take me to him.” “That’s it!” the boxer grunted. Moving quickly, he grabbed the figure by the shoulders. The model stepped close to the pair and spoke quietly. “If you know what we are, then you know how this is going to end. Leave or you are going to get hurt.” The figure surprisingly didn’t struggle, even though the two men were twice as big. Instead, the men heard a deep sigh. Two small hands came up and touched each man’s chest. The head slowly raised and golden eyes trapped them. The men’s eyes widened and they hissed in fear, showing sets of fangs for the first time, white against the red of their lips. “I know the Words of Death.” The figure spoke softly, yet the words pounded against the men standing on the steps. “I do not wish to use them. Take me to the master.” The eyes freed them and the model backed quickly away. “You will take me to him?” The eyes speared into the boxer’s, but the stocky man shook his head stubbornly. “You ain’t getting through! You’re just a kid. You don’t know any words.” 5

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “May…be I should go get someone.” The model opened the door as he spoke and quickly disappeared inside. “We don’t need anyone!” the boxer flung after him, angrily. He lifted the figure off the ground. “I can take care of you just fine.” “I do not want to hurt you!” The figure stared at the boxer and those golden eyes began to glow. “Release me and show me the way. I do not want to kill you.” The boxer laughed. “There is no way a little bit like you can hurt me. But I am going to hurt you!” With a snarl, he turned his back, shielding himself from the crowd. He grabbed the figure’s head, exposing its neck. His fangs bared, he moved in to bite. “Emshaw dre kadeck Morelaw non vobesce.” The voice sounded strong and firm and it stopped the vampire in mid-lunge. The hand on his chest began to heat until it burned like a fire. “Emshaw dre kadeck Morelaw non vobesce.” The boxer’s skin burned and he shrieked in pain. His eyes met the figure’s, whose eyes now glowed like twin suns. “If I say the words a third time, you will die. Release me now!” the voice commanded. The vampire boxer shook his head to clear it, but all he felt was the burning in his chest as it began to work its way through his body. His hands clenched tighter in pain and the figure spoke again. “Emshaw dre kadeck Morelaw…” “Stop!” sobbed the boxer, as he dropped the figure to the pavement. He pulled away and leaned back against the restaurant door. His body was on fire and he slumped to the ground 6

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining panting in pain. The figure leaned over and a soft hand caressed his cheek. “Be at peace.” The voice sounded cool and gentle now, and with the words, the burning disappeared as if it had never been. “You have done your job, but I must see your master.” The boxer looked up into flowing golden eyes. “What are you?” he whispered. There was a pause, as if the question was a surprise. “I do not know,” came the hushed response. Then the figure moved away from him and slipped inside the door. **** He felt the power the moment it was released. Before Noah came slipping through the crowd to tell him of the stranger at his door. He listened to the rushed explanation then waved him away. He waited…wondering. He’d learned patience after existing for over six hundred years. What did it mean? His jaw tightened as he thought again of Noah’s stuttered narration. The Words of Death. Most vampires thought them a fable used to keep them in line, but Gallegar, King of the Vampires in San Francisco, knew they were no fable…but truth. A truth passed down to all the vampires rulers. The Words of Death could kill. He gazed out over his restaurant. He was seated with several others at a long table on a dais above the rest of the restaurant floor. It gave him privacy, as well as a way to watch all that went on below. This was his place. He had designed and paid for every brick and stone used to build it. He’d had materials sent from overseas to give the place the rich look he desired. Decorated in dark wood and emerald green velvet, the club was as elegant and comfortable as any on the upper city’s boardwalk itself. It was patterned after a turn-of-the-century saloon, where the only thing missing was the huge mirror usually placed behind the bar. 7

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He found customers were uneasy when they couldn’t see the bartender’s reflection in the mirror. Every night he sat, watching the byplay between vampires and humans. As long as he had lived in San Francisco, he made his home in the Lower City. When he became king five years ago, he immediately put his money to use by building this club. It was just one of several properties he owned, but now the club paid for itself and put plenty of money into his flock’s coffers besides. It seemed both human and supernaturals alike enjoyed a good time. Of course the humans who frequented A Crown of Thorns were not your average Joes. These were a mixture of the curious and the faithful. Those who heard the rumors and those who traded their blood. And those few, the vampire wannabes, who wished desperately to join the ranks of the undead. Below the club was Sanctuary—the place where he and his people could rest during the daylight hours in safety. Only those of his flock knew how to get past the magick locks that protected the place. As vampire king, he had his own specialized room safe from all others, vampire and mortal alike. His attention was caught when he saw the door open and a figure walk in. It wasn’t Bruce, the other door bouncer, so it must be the stranger. Gallegar carefully sent his power out to meet the dark-clothed figure. It touched, curled around the figure and met power such as he had never felt before. His muscles tensed with anticipation. Here was a power that could challenge him. After six hundred years, he had seen much, so anything new to him was interesting. He could not sense who it was, but he saw the figure sensed him. It turned and made its way through the crowded dance floor straight toward him. 8

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining At the foot of the dais, the figure stopped, prevented from coming any closer by two more vampires guarding the steps that rose up to him. There was a moment of silence and then the figure spoke. The voice was husky and soft and it tickled along Gallegar’s neck. “You are Gallegar, Vampire King of San Francisco.” It was a statement, not a question. Gallegar inclined his head. “I am he.” The figure relaxed and took a deep breath. Curious. Knowing my name has given you relief. Out loud, he asked, “Who are you?” In answer, the figure shrugged off the backpack and long leather coat. They dropped to the ground. The hat was removed next. Gallegar drew in a deep breath, as hair the color of a silver moon fell down around a pair of shapely hips. Long legs clad in faded jeans led up to a small waist. Her frame was topped by a pair of pert breasts in a black tank top. Her body was healthy, tanned, and strong, but not tall. She stood only about five feet four inches in height. He saw the pulse beating in her neck. His gaze swept over her and his body hardened. Gallegar frowned. He had not felt that for a human in centuries. Then he looked at her face and his mouth went dry. Golden eyes lifted and met his with no fear, but with expectation. Her face was delicate, almost fey, with arched eyebrows and high cheekbones. Her lips were full and red, as were her soft cheeks and she had a dimple in her chin. Her golden eyes were tilted slightly, giving her an exotic look. She smiled at him and he realized she was beautiful…and somehow familiar. “Who are you?” he repeated hoarsely. “I am Kira. I am the Peacekeeper. I have come for you.” 9

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining At that, the two vampires who stood guard at the steps came toward her, taking her words as a threat. Kira frowned at them, but they kept coming. “I mean him no harm. I am Peacekeeper. He is for me.” Her eyes glowed with power. The guards stopped abruptly, startled by her warning flash, but they didn’t back away. The other vampires at the table who had been watching began to stir in agitation. The woman vampire sitting next to Gallegar was a pretty, well-endowed redhead. She hissed and bared her fangs at Kira. “He is not for you, human,” she spat. “He is mine.” She leaned against Gallegar, stroking his arm with fingers tipped in scarlet. Her eyes glowed red with anger. Kira didn’t spare the women a glance. She kept her stare fastened on Gallegar. “I am Peacekeeper,” she repeated to him. “I am for you.” “Enough of this!” Gallegar commanded. The guards backed away toward their stations and most of the vampires settled back down at the table, watching Kira curiously. The redhead squeezed Gallegar’s arm possessively and glaring at Kira, sent a spiral of power stabbing toward her. “No, Charlotte.” The words were spoken softly, yet with absolute command in them. Charlotte hissed angrily and hesitated for a moment, as if debating whether to obey. “Charlotte.” His voice was irritated now and Charlotte’s face went very pale. She withdrew the power immediately. Gallegar turned and looked at her, his eyes hard and angry. Charlotte let go of his arm and moved away from him. There was silence at the table before Gallegar rose to his feet. He stood there, studying Kira. Kira looked up at him. She had thought him attractive in her visions, but in person he was devastating. Six feet tall with 10

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining curling black hair that fell to his shoulders, he looked as Black Irish as his voice sounded. His face was darker than most vampires and strong, with deep green eyes and firm sensuous lips. His nose was straight; his jaw powerful. He was dressed in a pair of black slacks that hugged his body, showing his muscled thighs and rear. His shirt was also black, tight fitting and unbuttoned so his well-built chest showed through. Wow, Kira thought as she moistened suddenly dry lips. Her heart beat a little faster. She wondered if being captivated by Gallegar was part of the deal. Her attention was dragged back to his words when he spoke. His power rolled out to her. “Come to me,” Gallegar intoned. His voice flowed smoothly over her and wrapped itself around her body. “Come to me, Peacekeeper.” He is trying to hypnotize me. Kira felt the effect of his power on her. She smiled and walked toward him, but gently used her own power to push his away as she climbed the stairs. Her eyes glowed as she made her way around the table and stood before him. She saw in his eyes he knew what she had done and her gaze flicked to the other vampires at the table. They all were watching intently, wondering. “I come before you on my own. You need no power to summon me.” She put her hand on his chest. “I am Peacekeeper. You are for me. I am for you.” His body felt warm and she was surprised. Somewhere in her mind, she thought he would be cool to the touch. After all, wasn’t he dead? She wondered at the need she felt to run her hand over his chest. Gallegar stared down at her. She wasn’t affected by his voice and she wasn’t afraid of him. He glanced down the table and found the other lesser vampires watching closely. If they 11

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining thought he couldn’t handle this woman, there could be problems down the line. A king remained a king only by showing his strength. This Kira knew the Words of Death. That alone made her a threat. The fact he couldn’t control her made her much more dangerous. Knowing he was attracted to her was another problem. He would deal with this in another way. “Peacekeeper…” Gallegar bowed and smiled at Kira. “You come to me with great understanding of our ways. Obviously you have something of importance to tell me. Let us retire to a more private place so we may speak of this more freely.” So he could remove her as a danger to his people. “As you wish, King Gallegar.” Kira trustingly removed her hand from his chest and he tucked it into the crook of his arm. “My office is just over here,” Gallegar gestured. He led her down the steps and through the tables. He telepathically told the vampires to continue without him; he would take care of the woman himself. He threw Charlotte a warning glance, but she wasn’t looking at him. Her red lips were thrust out in a pout. He grimaced to himself. She was getting too possessive for his liking. **** The office was not what Kira expected. It was a comfortable room, done in wood with green accents. A large antique wooden desk sat almost dead center with a comfortable green cushioned chair behind it. The desk was covered in neat piles of papers and a glass of red wine sat forgotten on the blotter. There were paintings on the walls, all landscapes, and Kira had the feeling she was seeing bits of Ireland in the art. A comfortable couch and chairs were placed to the left of the desk. Gallegar led Kira to the couch, seated her, and then moved to the opposite wall where a bar stood. 12

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Do you wish a drink?” Gallegar inquired, his brow arching in question. “My hospitality has not been at its best for you.” Kira shook her head. It was hard to think now that they were alone. She hadn’t expected him to be such a distraction or so handsome. He was a vampire. Could she be attracted to a vampire? She hadn’t been warned of this feeling. She wasn’t sure exactly what she needed to do next. She hoped it would come to her as the rest had. Kira watched as Gallegar poured clear amber liquid into a crystal glass and then moved toward her. He glided rather than walked and she wondered if this was an otherworldly, vampire thing. He was so virile her palms began to sweat as she watched him. She tore her gaze away and looked appreciatively around the room. Gallegar saw the barely perceptible frown on her smooth forehead. “Looking for my coffin?” He quirked his lips with amusement as Kira blushed. “My resting place is kept in darkness. It wouldn’t do well for me to have it opened accidentally in the daytime light.” “Vampires cannot go outside in the daytime.” She saw his nod of agreement. “Do you have to go into a coffin?” “All feel safer there. Lesser vampires must rest during the daytime hours to regain their strength. Vampires like myself who have more power do not have to sleep away the day unless we choose to. I, myself, find coffins…confining.” “So what do you use?” Gallegar leaned toward Kira and smiled at her seductively. Her head started to swim. “I use what every red-blooded American male uses. A kingsize bed.” He ran a long finger down her cheek, making her shiver. “Why all the questions, Peacekeeper?” Kira frowned again, not sure she was comfortable with him so close to her. His touch made her forget what she wanted to say. She blinked a few times, before capturing the thought. 13

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Ummm…I am curious about you. Your kind is the first I have spoken to. I wish to learn more about them. And I must learn what I can about you.” “Why me?” “You are their leader, their king. If I am to join with you, I must understand you.” “So you can destroy us?” Gallegar’s eyes narrowed and his voice grew harsh. “No!” Kira answered sharply. “I am here to help your people. To protect them. I am Peacekeeper.” Gallegar rushed to his feet in a smooth motion that brought a gasp to Kira’s lips. “What is this Peacekeeper you keep speaking of? What do you want with us?” “I am Peacekeeper.” Kira stated, her heart in her mouth. He towered over her. He was angry and she could feel his power stirring under his skin. She wanted him to understand, but since she did not have all the facts herself, she didn’t quite know how. “How can you protect my people? You, who know the Words of Death to kill them.” Gallegar’s emerald eyes glowed angrily at her. Kira gazed up at him. Her visions brought her to him. She knew exactly where to find him and how to introduce herself to him, but now that it was time for full explanations, she was at a loss as to how to start. If only his eyes weren’t so green. If only just looking at him didn’t make her tremble. She closed her eyes a moment to regroup. “I could have killed the vampire outside if I had wanted to, but I did not.” Kira looked up at him. “I am not here to hurt your people. I am here for you.” Gallegar stared down at the small woman before him. Her scent was doing strange things to his brain. All he could think of was wrapping her in his arms and… He shook his head to clear 14

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining it. She still looked at him, her brow furrowed. He cleared his throat. “You wish to kill me?” She shook her head. “I come from a past I do not remember. Sent on a mission I do not yet fully understand. All I know is that I was sent to you. You are for me. I am for you. I do not know what more to say to you!” Angry now at herself and tired of having to stare up at him, she reached up and took Gallegar’s wrist in both hands to tug him back down on the couch beside her. Off balance he dropped his glass and fell half on top of her. Kira released his wrist and put her hands on his chest to push him off, but froze as she felt his body against hers. The long sleek lines of him rested heavily on her, forcing her to lie back on the couch. His scent was all male and Kira’s body softened and trembled in response. Gulping, she wriggled, trying to get out from under him but stopped instantly when he groaned softly. Peering up at him, she saw his eyes were closed and his lips had tightened. His arms had come down on each side of her, trapping her beneath him, and she could see the muscles had corded in them in an effort not to move. Then she noticed something else. Where his hips lay half on her, she could feel his male arousal pressing hard against her soft thigh. Gallegar couldn’t move, couldn’t breathe. He felt her softness beneath him. He sensed the very life that flowed through her veins. He wanted to press himself fully against her. Move his hips between the junction of her thighs and find his release. He wanted to sink his teeth into the pulsing vein at her neck and drink the freshness of her life. He had never wanted so fast…so ferociously. 15

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Peacekeeper,” he growled, moving his lips so they rested on her throat. It was all he could do to control the emotions sweeping over him. Passion, need, and something more. It felt so familiar, her lying here with him. Who was this woman? He kissed her neck. “If you have come for me…give yourself to me.” He ground his hips intimately, softly against hers. “Give all of yourself to me.” Kira gasped at the feeling of their bodies moving together. Her femininity instinctively took command over her. Her bones became languid and the trembling grew stronger. Desire flooded her newly awakened body. The tenseness slipped away. She felt his knee slipping gently between her legs, but she wasn’t afraid of him. She wanted the closeness. She wanted…something. Something more than what he spoke of. Her brain shut down, but Kira didn’t care. It felt so right laying there in his arms. This was what she had come here for. His lips at her throat…kissing her…nibbling. A vampire nibbling at her throat. Kira’s head cleared and she tensed. A vampire at her throat! What was she doing? Had she allowed him this close because he had enthralled her? Was it the feelings of familiarity and need that had caused this? She struggled. “No! King Gallegar, stop! I…I do not want this!” “It is too late to stop.” Gallegar rasped. “You are here with me. I will have you, and my people will be safe.” He ignored the wonderful way she felt pressed against him. His first duty was to his flock. “Please!” Kira struggled harder. “I do not want to hurt you. You must let me go! This is not what was meant.” Gallegar fisted his hand into Kira’s hair and raised her head so she could look at him. His eyes glowed greenly in his face. “It 16

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining is too late,” he whispered. Jerking her head to the right, he sank his teeth into the vein in her throat that beat with life. Kira stiffened and screamed in pain. “No! No! No!” she screamed. “Stop! Please…” Her words grew disjointed and breathy as she continued to struggle. Gallegar tasted her blood as it flowed into his mouth. Fresh, innocent, with a spice that told of enormous power. He felt the strength of that power moving from her to him. He had never had anything like it. It energized him. He wanted more. He wanted all. God…how he wanted her. Wanted to be in her. He didn’t hear her screaming. He was concentrating on her taste and the feel of her beneath him. He didn’t hear her began to speak the words of power until they shot into him with the pain of a burning stake. “Emshaw dre kadeck Morelaw non vobesce.” Gallegar gasped and took his teeth from Kira’s throat. The burning was horrible. It captured his entire body and licked it with flame. He heard Kira crying, telling him to let her go, but the taste of her blood magick was so strong he couldn’t make himself release her. Instead, he buried his teeth back into her neck and sucked down the power-giving blood. “Emshaw dre kadeck Morelaw non vobesce.” The pain of the burning stabbed through his body a second time, leaving him writhing in its wake. His blood lust was hard to tame. Though he stopped drinking, he would not, could not remove his fangs from her throat. He was being consumed from the inside out with fire, but even that wasn’t enough to make him pull away. Kira knew she was moving toward unconsciousness. She was failing. Failing whoever had sent her here, failing herself, and failing Gallegar. If she died, then her cause was lost. If he 17

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining died, her cause was lost as well. He was the one she had been sent to. He was the one she needed. Something about him drew her heart. With her last gleam of consciousness, she made her decision. “I cannot kill you,” she whispered in his ear. “I am for you. You are for me. Please, Gallegar, be at peace.” She sent a soothing beam of power into Gallegar’s body and then slumped against him, unconscious. Gallegar groaned as the burning disappeared. His body felt strong and able again. Even more so, because he was drunk with the blood of great power. He heard her words and somehow he knew the truth in them. He wanted desperately to believe her, but what of his people? Could he take that chance? When Kira fluttered back to consciousness, she knew Gallegar had stopped feeding, but his fangs were still pressed against her neck. She felt exhausted and weepy. What would he do? What more could she do to prove herself to him? Kira sighed. She was already so tired. Suddenly, a soft breeze flowed over the room and with it came a Power both strong and gentle at the same time. Gallegar raised his head from Kira’s throat. He tested the Power as it moved toward them. It had the same flavor as Kira’s, yet it was somewhat different. Somewhat like the taste of the blood of a mother and a child. “Oh, thank you.” Kira’s voice was broken. “I am so glad you are here. I do not know what to do. I have failed you.” She suddenly began weeping. Gallegar wanted to put his arms around her protectively. The Power moved into his head. “Good, good,” he heard it croon softly to him. “You are to protect her. That is why she was sent to you. Let go of your fear. She is not here to harm you.” 18

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Who are you?” Gallegar spoke as softly as the voice. He didn’t move yet. Didn’t touch Kira any differently. “Who is she?” The Power chuckled. “So cautious, so careful. Do you not remember this woman? Do you not yet remember where you have seen her?” Gallegar shook his head and, as soon as he did so, his mind filled with a vision. It was familiar to him. The night sky filled his mind. Stars twinkled and the smell of a stream came from nearby. He looked around and saw a huge oak tree standing before him, its branches spread out over his head. Beneath it stretched a carpet of moon flowers, sacred to the vampire since the beginning of time, for they are one of the few flowers that bloom by the light of the moon. “I have been here before,” Gallegar stated quietly. “I have been here in my dreams.”

19

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 2 “I have sent this dream to you for over a century, trying to prepare you. Let the dream flow. Remember what you have forgotten.” Gallegar focused on the flowers under the tree. He smelled their sweet fragrance as he walked toward the base of the tree. He heard the soft call of an owl and the answering trill of the night birds. When he reached his goal, he saw, caught in the shadows, a figure leaning against the tree. “Come out from there,” Gallegar called. “Who are you?” He paused, waiting tensely in the center of the moon flowers as the person came into the light. He caught his breath as he recognized Kira emerging from the shadows. She wore a long, flowing, white dress. Her hair was down and fell gently against her swaying hips. A crown of moon flowers topped her head. Her eyes glowed gold. A smile curved her lips as she looked at him. “I am for you…Gallegar, King of the Vampires. You are for me.” She moved toward him and he was caught, frozen in the moment. As she neared, he held out his arms and sighed with pleasure as she walked into them. He held her tightly. “I am for you, A Ghra… You are for me.” With a rush, Gallegar pulled back into himself, and he found he was still lying on the couch, but now he held Kira 20

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining gently in his arms. How many times had he seen her there in the moonlight? It was a dream he’d had over and over again. He sighed and hugged Kira to him. “I remember now.” “The rest will come to you as you need it. Be strong for her, Gallegar, Vampire King. She has a long, hard duty that lies ahead of her.” The Power moved over Gallegar like a cool cloth, soothing him. “You can either make it more difficult, or give her ease.” “Kira, my daughter. Be strong and listen to counsel. All will be well. Listen for my voice when you are confused. I will always be with you.” Kira felt a kiss press to her brow. The Power spoke with command in its voice. “Now it is time for you to join with each other. Nothing more can be done without joining.” Kira opened her mouth to ask how to join, but was interrupted by the Power’s soft laugh. “You will know how when the time comes. Learn to listen to your heart, for it is there I will speak to you.” “Wait,” Gallegar said, his eyes moving around the room as if trying to find the essence of the Power. “Tell us who you are.” “I am one who has always been. I have many names. But who I am is not important. Why I have sent Kira to you…is. Her mission will help save your world. Treat her well, Vampire King, and you will have all of forever together. Remember this…her strength will come out of your love for each other. Farewell…” The room was silent as they felt the Power leave as gently as it had come. Kira and Gallegar turned and looked at each other. He shook his head. It was strange. Even though the dream had reminded him of who she was, they were still strangers in so many ways. But at the same time, it was as if they had known 21

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining each other always. It explained the feeling of familiarity he had felt when he saw her for the first time. It also accounted for the deep desire and need he felt for her. “A Ghra… Forgive me for not remembering you. For hurting you.” Gallegar pressed a kiss against her forehead. “I am sorry.” Kira smiled at him once he’d raised his head. “We understand each other now. I too had the dream, but in vision form. But it did not help me make you understand.” She caressed his jaw with a soft hand. “I am sorry I hurt you.” Gallegar snorted. “It was barely enough to pull me back. I would rather have ceased to exist than to stop tasting you.” His eyes glowed for a moment. “You were too good to let go. It was not just your blood, but your power that drew me.” Kira nodded. “It is the power that draws us together. I knew I needed to come to you since I awoke.” “Awoke?” “Yes.” Kira looked away from him and her thoughts showed plainly in those expressive eyes. He noticed her neck was still bleeding and, with a curse, he raised himself up and took a handkerchief from his pocket. “Here,” he muttered as he pressed it down on her ravaged neck. “This will stop the bleeding.” He rearranged them on the couch more comfortably, pulling Kira gently into his lap. “Tell me about this awakening. How did you come to be here?” Kira stared at him thoughtfully. “It is hard to explain. I remember waking up in this room lit with a blue light. I lay naked on a table, but I was not cold. I was alone in the room and was frightened. I did not know who I was or where I had come from. My past was lost to me. While I had knowledge of how to live, and the experience to know many things, much was kept from me. I sat up on the table and looked around for something 22

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining to help explain where I was, but the room was empty. Just the table, me and the blue light that came from nowhere, yet filled the room.” She shivered and Gallegar tightened his arms around her. “I felt her presence come into the room.” “Her?” Gallegar questioned intently. Kira shrugged. “I think of the Power as female. Something about the way she speaks to me and how she moves.” She shrugged again. “It is hard to explain.” “Not so hard. Now that you say it, the Power did have a feminine feel to it. Almost a mothering sense to her.” “Yes!” Kira nodded in agreement. “That is exactly what I thought.” “What happened next?” Gallegar couldn’t help but brush his lips over her hair as Kira settled closer to him. “Clothes appeared and she told me to get dressed. She gave me the coat and hat and my backpack filled with supplies and extra clothing. She made me eat something. Once I was done, she led me outside and gave me the vision that told me my name, where I was to go and who I was to find.” “Me,” Gallegar said huskily. Kira nodded. “You. She gave me the words to say and told me not to worry, that she would help me when needed.” He gently removed the bloodstained cloth from her neck and checked the wound he had made. “She almost left it too late. Vampires have an anticoagulant in their saliva. It takes a while for a wound to stop bleeding, but yours seems to be stopping quickly.” “My power?” “Perhaps.” He smoothed her hair away from the torn skin, wishing he could remove the wound all together.

23

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Anyway,” Kira went on. “I walked to the outskirts of town and found a cab. He brought me here, even though I had to argue with him to do so.” She frowned at the memory. Gallegar chuckled. “You are not the type to come play at my club. You look human. We are not.” “I may have been human once, but I am not anymore,” she stated and there was conviction in her voice. “I do not know what I am.” He pressed a kiss to the top of her head and then put a finger under her chin to bring her face up to his. “Whatever you are, why ever you have come, we will find out together.” She smiled tremulously. “For the first time since I woke up on that table, I feel safe.” She laughed. “Fancy feeling safe with a vampire.” She smiled wider. “I know the stories. You were very scary. But now you are not so bad.” Gallegar grinned at her and then, not being able to help himself, brought his lips gently to hers. Kira’s laughter shut off immediately as his lips moved over hers. Her breath stopped in her throat as a wave of feeling went through her. He groaned against her mouth and she couldn’t help a shiver of emotion that made her tremble. His arms tightened around her, but he moved his mouth so it caressed her cheek. He slowly kissed his way up her jaw line to her ear and his hands began to move possessively over her. “Closer, A Ghra… I need to be closer to you. The Power spoke to us of joining. What must we do to join? Show me what I must do.” She took a deep breath and went still…waiting. Gallegar stroked her hair and relaxed, remembering the Power’s promise the knowledge would be there when it was needed.

24

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining After several long minutes, she stirred in his lap. Sitting upright, she met his green eyes with hers. Her fingers trembled as she began to unbutton the close fitting shirt he wore. “I must be able to touch your skin.” “What do I do?” “Joining is not only a physical act, but a psychic one. Our souls will unite and it will leave a mark on our bodies for all to see.” “What kind of mark?” he asked. “My people heal and do not scar.” “This one will. It will be a brand that shows our joining.” “What do I do?” he repeated himself. She hesitated. “Kira?” She sighed and looked at him. “You must reopen the wound on my neck.” “Bite you there again? Are you sure?” He was surprised the Power would want him to do that a second time. “You need blood to live. It must be a part of the joining.” “Am I to feed?” She didn’t answer for a moment. When she raised her face to him he could see the confusion. “I am not sure. I think we will know as we join.” “And what is your part in this?” Gallegar asked, searching her eyes. She bit her lip. No answer. “Kira?” A sigh. “I will brand you with fire.” He started to laugh. He kissed her again when Kira looked at him like he had lost his mind. “If we hadn’t been so hasty before, we could have joined the first time I fed on you.” She snorted. “I do not think joining was on our mind at that time. Both of us were too busy fighting with each other!” 25

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Too true!” Gallegar agreed. He caught her hand where it rested against his bare chest and raised it to his lips. “But there will be no more fighting between us.” She smiled, her eyes caressing him and he felt something move in him he thought was long dead. “No more fighting,” she agreed. He arranged her on his lap so he would have easier access to her neck. “I am ready. Can you get to where you need to?” “Yes.” Kira’s voice was soft and when he looked at her, he saw her eyes had started to glow. His eyes answered hers with their own hot glowing green. “A Ghra…” “Now! Do it now!” At her words, Gallegar sank his fangs into her neck, precisely in the same wounds he had made before. He was more careful with her this time. Gentler. As the blood began to flow, he somehow knew he was to feed, but lightly. It was the transference of the blood that made the difference, not the quantity. She stiffened and moaned as the pain took her and without thinking, he used his power to gentle her, to stop her from hurting. Kira felt the pain lessen and as she lay in his arms, the knowledge of what she needed to do filled her mind. She spoke… “ Gallegar, King of the Vampires. I am yours and you are mine. We share one heart, one soul, one mind. My heart is yours, my blood is thine. Together, peace we both will find. My heart to yours, to bring you life. Your life to keep me from all strife. Together we will always be. One soul throughout eternity.” 26

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining As she spoke, Gallegar felt the power flow from her and into him. It was hot and wild, filled with strength and emotion. He felt her move her hand beneath his shirt and press firmly over his heart. A moment later a sharp burning bit into his flesh. He groaned into her neck, uncomfortable, yet at the same time feeling the need for something more. As if in response to his unasked for plea, the power moved from her hand and ripped into his heart. Gallegar’s body arched in reaction as his heart, six hundred years inert, came apart within him. He lifted his mouth from Kira’s throat and screamed in agony. Her power soothed him as it caressed his heart with unseen hands. Thump…Thump…Thump… He could feel the power squeezing his heart in rhythmic beats. Once…twice…a third time. Then the power slipped away from him, yet his heart continued it’s pumping. His heart was beating again! Gallegar wept into Kira’s neck, mixing his tears with her blood. She had made a miracle happen. He was alive. The words for their joining were placed in his mind. “Kira…A Ghra… You have shared with me your heart, You have shared with me your blood. Forever I will stand by your side. Taking care of you…protecting you…loving you. I am for you, you are for me. One soul throughout eternity.” At his words, the pain in Kira’s neck lessened. A sensation of coolness moved over the wound as his tears washed over her. Kira took his face between her hands and looked at him, emotion sparkling in her eyes. 27

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I give you my heart. You give me your life. Together in eternity…forever.” She kissed away the tears on his face. His hand was once again in her hair as he moved her lips to join with his. “A Ghra… You give me your heart. I give you my life. Together in eternity…forever.” He spoke the words just before his mouth came down on hers. This time there was heat mixed with the gentleness. Kira tasted both her blood and his tears. As his lips parted hers in an intimate kiss, the taste became stronger. His tongue moved against hers in a fiery dance that matched her heartbeat to his. She could feel his newly beating heart pounding against her breasts. His hands caught both sides of her face as he deepened the kiss. She tasted like he’d always known she would. In the dreams, he had awoken before he could kiss her. Here, the dream was real and he was kissing his lovely moon flower deeply, with a depth of passion he was just beginning to remember. He pressed her against the back of the couch enjoying the feeling of her softness against him…of their hearts beating in tandem. His hands left her face and ran down her sides. He grasped her soft hips and pulled them against his, pressing his throbbing erection into the junction of her legs. He was so strong, so hard. Just as he should be. Kira felt him press into her body, felt his throbbing presence against her thigh, and she melted against him. The new emotions she was feeling swam through her. She put her arms around him and met his kiss with one of her own. Long, deep…hard. She heard him groan into her mouth and suddenly they were lying flat on the couch, him above her, his arousal pressed into her softness. “A Ghra…” he murmured as his hands ran over her body. He cupped her breasts in his hands and massaged them gently. 28

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He yearned to feel her naked skin against his palms, as he moved his hands across erect nipples. “Gallegar!” Kira gasped, her body writhing under his knowing hands. She was drowning in his taste, his smell, the feel of him. Her hands traced the muscles in his chest, and she felt a female triumph as he shuddered under them. Their lips met once more, tasting each other. Her tongue hit one of his fangs and was nicked. His inhalation of breath as he tasted the fresh blood made her tremble, but he flicked the drop of blood away and used his mouth to gentle her once again. He felt her trembling grow stronger. Groaning, he removed his mouth from hers. He found he was shaking as well. “Are you all right?” Kira opened her eyes, her brain fuzzy from his nearness. He leaned over her, his eyes intent. “I do not know what I am feeling.” She traced her finger across his lips and reaching up, ran her fingers through his long hair. “I am hot all over, and I want to be even closer to you than I already am. How can that be possible?” Gallegar shivered as her fingers moved, massaging his scalp. He sensed her inexperience, but that innocence was part of what attracted him. He would be the first to try the passion that shimmered underneath her surface. That thought made him go rock-hard with need. He drew away and lifted himself up on his elbows above Kira. He gazed down at the glowing eyes and kissswollen mouth. “You are so beautiful,” he said hoarsely. “I have been waiting for you all these years.” He brushed a kiss down her nose and pressed one more on her lips. “We are just beginning…you…and me. My heart and my body want so badly to continue this, but I believe a more private place is needed. Will you go with me? Will you allow me to love you the way I have dreamed of doing for a century?” 29

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira lay quietly staring at him. Her body was warm and willing for him. He was still hard and she could feel him throbbing against her, yet he was allowing her to decide what happened next. Then she remembered something. “What about that woman…Charlotte?” Gallegar stiffened. He opened his mouth to tell her it wasn’t her concern, but shut it abruptly when he realized if she were to be his mate, as he was hoping, then it was. He met her gaze squarely, wanting to be honest with her. “Charlotte was…a distraction. Nothing more. There was nothing remotely serious between us, no matter what she would have liked you to believe. The moment you walked through the door, she ceased to exist for me. I never understood until now, but I have always been waiting for you.” Kira put her arms around his neck and pulled him down for a kiss. As his tongue slipped into her mouth to begin its erotic dance, she surrendered to him. She believed him. The past didn’t matter. More importantly, she was astonished to discover she had feelings of love for him. So fast. Was it normal to feel so strongly, so quickly? Or have I been created loving him? She sensed the Power moving in her mind and as she understood the meaning, she tore her mouth away from his. Tears filled her eyes. “A Ghra…” Gallegar exclaimed, pulling her tighter against him. “What is it?” He kissed a tear as it ran down her soft cheek. “Tell me.” “I cannot…not yet,” she stammered. At his puzzled look, she sighed. It was so hard to tell him. For a moment, she rebelled against the need to do so. All she wanted to do was have him hold her…to love her. The Power moved again, insistently and she crumbled, leaning her forehead against his. “We now have the ability to share thoughts. It is easier to share this than to speak it.” She met 30

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining his eyes and he relaxed, understanding this form of communication. But as what the Power had told Kira filled his mind, Gallegar’s entire body tightened. He tensed his jaw and swallowed the knot that formed in his throat. Her eyes overflowed again, and he lifted off of her and sat up so he could pull her into his lap and waiting arms. “Shhh…shhh. It will be all right,” he comforted her. He moved back so he could look at her. With his thumbs, he gently wiped the tears from her face. “But we…we cannot. I must be…” Her voice trailed off into a sob. “You must be pure. Chaste.” Gallegar smiled grimly at her. “I understand. But the Power did not say this was forever. Only now. At this time.” “But I…” “Being with you is a great gift.” He caught her face between his hands again and kissed her firmly. “As is my newly beating heart. As is your life. We have been blessed. But you have a mission and I am to help you. Perhaps if we…loved each other physically, it would distract you from your purpose.” Kira looked at him. She blinked the tears away. “But will it not…” She blushed. “Will it not hurt you?” Her cheeks filled with color. Gallegar grinned. He couldn’t help it. His body was still so hard he did ache, but seeing her blush made it almost bearable. “I want you. I want to join our bodies as we have joined our hearts.” He forced her to look him in the eye. To see his desire for her. Fiery green to glowing gold. “But we can’t. Perhaps you could come to harm. I will not put you at risk. We don’t know what else is to happen in the future. I can wait.” “You have been waiting a long time.” 31

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I am an immortal. Time has very little meaning to me.” He didn’t want her feeling guilty about not being able to mate with him. “I do not know what I am,” Kira whispered. “You are mine,” Gallegar growled possessively. He clasped her against him. “Whatever happens we know we belong to each other. Your purity may be a strength you can use to protect yourself. To make your power stronger. No matter how much I want you, I will not take that strength away from you.” Kira thought that over, chewing her lip as she stared at him. Gallegar smiled at her and tapped his finger against her mouth. “This lip is mine to chew on.” He bent and nipped her full lower lip, then kissed her once more. When he was finished, he tucked her against his chest with a sigh and willed his body to believe what he had said. A thought crossed his mind. “Does it bother you I am a vampire? That she sent you to one such as me?” He tensed as he waited for her answer. Without hesitation, she shook her head. “No,” she said, and her voice left no room for doubt. “You are who you are. Vampire or human, it matters not to me.” Gallegar gave her a squeeze, his emotions overflowing. They sat in silence, each with their own thoughts. He felt the steady beating of his heart. It was still a remarkable feeling. Kira just rested. In his arms, she felt safe and content. Shifting closer to him, she brushed her hair off her shoulders, grimacing as she felt the hair catch in the dried blood on her shoulder. He noticed her movement and turning her slightly, examined the wound he had left. It was healing already, almost as fast as a vampire’s would. “I will clean that for you.” Effortlessly, he lifted her from his lap and set her on the couch. He rose and walked over to the bar 32

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining and wet a soft clean cloth. Returning, he knelt down before her and gently wiped the blood traces from Kira’s shoulder. “It looks to me you will be left with a scar that shows my fang marks. The flesh I tore during the first bite is already healed.” “This is the brand that shows we are joined.” “And where is mine?” Kira bent down and pulled his shirt open. On his chest was a charred brand in the shape of a small letter “K.” Gallegar looked down at it for a moment before tracing it with his finger. He flinched as he touched it. “I thought the pain was a leftover from the joining. But it is the brand itself.” “I am sorry. I did not know it would continue to hurt.” “How about yours. Does it hurt?” Kira nodded. “During the joining I could feel you deaden the pain, but when it was over I felt it throbbing.” Gallegar smiled slowly, wickedly, and Kira felt it all the way down to her toes. “That’s not all that was throbbing.” Kira blushed and Gallegar gave a shout of laughter, as he pulled her into his arms and hugged her. He felt such a sense of completeness as he held her. “You are truly a part of me. I wish never to let you go. You make me feel...” He kissed her lips, struggling to keep himself under control. Moving her slightly so she rested in one arm, he tugged off the ring he wore on his right pinky. “A Ghra… Take this as a symbol of our joining. It was given to me centuries ago by my father, before I was transformed.” As he spoke, he placed the ring on her right hand. Kira lifted her hand and examined the handsome ring that fitted snugly on her ring finger. It was a band of silver with intricate scrolling and designs tracing the circle. Tucked into the 33

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining patterns was a form of writing she didn’t recognize. She could sense the age and importance of the gift to Gallegar. Her eyes filled again with tears. “It is most beautiful. Are you sure you wish to give it away?” “The ring belongs to you. You now belong to me. I give you the ring…it still belongs to me…in a way.” He grinned in male satisfaction. “I don’t see myself losing out on this one.” “What does the writing mean?” “It is Gaelic. Roughly translated, it says… ‘Live to see the future. Love like there is no tomorrow’.” He lifted her chin for another soft kiss. “I had not thought to make my family pledge become truth…but meeting you...” He looked deeply into her eyes, as if searching for something. “Tell me what you feel.” It was a demand, but it carried a wisp of anxiety. Kira’s heart melted. She didn’t know how to explain the new emotions that ran through her, but she knew one thing. She cupped his face in her hands. “You are my heart,” she said simply. Tenderly, Gallegar put his mouth to hers. He kissed her with all the pent-up feeling and longing he had felt for her from the first time he had the dream. Her response filled him with warmth. They were both shaking when he finally pulled away and Kira looked for something to distract them both. “How did you become a vampire? I am sorry,” she said quickly, when he stiffened. “It is none of my concern.” Gallegar shut his eyes with a sigh and made himself relax. “As you are a part of my soul, it is your concern, A Ghra… But it is a long story and an uncomfortable one. We have just found each other and I don’t want to tarnish that with unpleasant memories. I would like to wait for another time.”

34

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Of course.” Kira put her arms back around him. “I will hear the story whenever you wish to share it.” Suddenly she gasped and stiffened. He pulled away. “What is it? Did I injure you?’ “No!” She shook her head. “It just came to me. What I am. What a Peacekeeper does.” “You were given the knowledge?” “Yes. I was sent to you to help you make peace among the people. I know the Words of Death. You cannot use them, but I can. I have been sent to you to help you keep peace, and to punish those who do not follow your laws.” Gallegar sat back and looked at Kira in amazement. “You are an enforcer?” “You are a strong and able leader, but something is drawing near that will try the strength of all leaders. If your flock is not bonded together and strong, you may not be able to fight what is coming.” “Do you know what is coming?” He tensed, knowing through their joining, she was speaking the truth. She had been sent to help him. She stilled, her head tilted like she was listening to a voice that was just beyond her hearing. Then her eyes met his and he could read the disappointment in hers. “I do not know yet what is coming. I am sorry.” “You will,” he said, encouragingly. “The Power will give you the knowledge when it is needed. She has shown us that so far.” “I am come to help you, my Heart. It is a part of my mission.” “Just a part?” “There is more, but I am not yet sure what it is.” Kira had just barely finished speaking when Gallegar felt another roll of Power surge through her. Her eyes closed and 35

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining she cocked her head, as she listened to the unseen speaker. She rose abruptly from the couch, taking him with her. Her movements were stiff and she staggered against him. He held her until she was strong enough to move away. “What is it?” he asked quietly. Kira turned to him with eyes already beginning to glow. “I have to go.” she said, and there was fear in her eyes. “I am not yet done this night.” Turning, she walked to the office door and opened it. The beat of the music in the club was a rude awakening after the peace and silence of their time of joining. At the door she stopped and looked back at him. “Go where?” She shrugged. “I do not know.” Her face was tight with worry. “I do not wish to leave you.” “What can I do?” he asked, as he came to stand beside her. His hands moved to her waist and she felt better immediately. “Feeling your touch helps,” Kira said with a sigh. She leaned in, rubbing her cheek back and forth against his chest, as he held her tightly. After a moment she forced herself to walk out into the crowd toward the raised dais. He followed close behind her. She stopped at the bottom of the steps and bent to pick up her things. One of the vampires that stood at the bottom reached down to stop her. “It is all right, Gabriel.” Gallegar motioned him away with the wave of his hand. In a loud voice that reached up to the vampires at the upper table, he said, “She is my Lady now. She bears my mark. No one is to touch her but me.” The vampires at the table all stood and moved to the edge of the dais to better see what their master had done. The marks on Kira’s neck glowed in the dimly lit club. Gallegar saw Charlotte’s face fill with rage. He would definitely have to deal with her later. 36

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “A Ghra… Can I keep your backpack for you? Or will you need it this night?” Gallegar’s hand was there before hers and he held her backpack, coat and hat. “I will need my coat, for the night is cold. The rest I can leave here.” He handed the backpack and hat to Gabriel with the soundless order to take them to his office. He then helped Kira on with her coat. With his hand at the base of her spine, he walked with her to the front door of his club. Everything in him wanted to go with her, but he didn’t know how to ask. It was all so new to them both. “I don’t want to let you go. I should be doing something…anything.” He raked his hand through his hair in frustration. “I do not know what to do either. I just know I have to go.” Turning she put her arms around him for a quick hug. Her breath whooshed from her lungs as he held her tightly. He kissed her hard and long, before releasing her, wondering if the torment he felt showed on his face. “I am here if you need me, A Ghra…” Kira smiled at him and moved to where a taxi waited. Suddenly, she stopped and turned back to him. He heard her speak softly in his mind. “What does A Ghra… mean?” Gallegar smiled. He answered her out loud so all could hear. “It means my love…”

37

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 3 “I did not expect to see you back here,” Kira said to the cabby. It was the same one who had dropped her off at A Crown of Thorns. “Well, I didn’t exactly mean to come back.” The cabby scratched his head in confusion. “I was all the way into the city when I got the strong feeling I was supposed to come back and get you. I tried to ignore it, but it just kept getting stronger and stronger. Finally all I could do was come and then…there you were.” “My thanks.” “Where to now?” Kira heard the answer in her mind a split second before the cabby was finished asking. “Take me to the club called The Howling. The cabby looked at her in his review mirror. “You know that’s a gaming parlor? Another place you shouldn’t be at.” Kira smiled. “I go where I must. I thank you for the warning, but I will be safe.” “Are you meeting someone there?’ Kira thought of Gallegar, and how he had touched her with such feeling. She wished he was with her. “I am meeting someone there…yes.” She sighed to herself. She just didn’t know who it was. “All-righty then. Hold on. We’ll be there in about ten.” 38

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira held on and wondered again what she would do when she arrived. **** Back at A Crown of Thorns, Gallegar stood staring after Kira and the cab as he slowly buttoned up the shirt Kira had undone earlier. Noah came up beside him from his place at the door. “She is your Lady, now?” Noah asked, somewhat fearfully. Gallegar smiled. “She is mine.” “You control The Words of Death. Do you not, my Master?” Gallegar turned and looked at Noah. He could smell Noah’s fear, coupled with a goodly amount of awe. This is what Kira had meant…he realized, when she said she would make him stronger than he was. “Yes. The Lady belongs to me. I ask it of her and she will give it to me.” “Our flock will be powerful.” Noah’s voice was smug. Gallegar hid a grin. He held his breath as a heartbeat later, the Power moved in his head. He now knew where to go. He heard Kira wishing he was with her. The Power urged him to follow. He turned to Noah. “Go get the car. We go after my Lady.” He watched as Noah glided away. He called Gabriel to join them and left the club in charge of his second-in-command. A moment later, they were pulling out of the parking lot. **** Kira arrived at The Howling. It was even seedier looking than A Crown of Thorns. A long, low building, it was covered in ivy and surrounded by tall trees. It gave the impression of a cabin in the woods, yet it stood in the middle of a huge city. “Thanks again.” She paid the cabby, adding a large tip. “I am heading home this time,” the cabby stated firmly. “Take care of yourself.” 39

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira didn’t watch as the cab pulled away. She was looking at the building before her. There was no line waiting at The Howling. No one standing guard at the door. She walked to the heavy double doors and pushed her way in. **** Lucas Kane stood alongside the bar nursing his drink. As manager of The Howling, his job was to make sure everything was running smoothly. His silver gray eyes swept over the crowd, checking for any problems. Everything seemed in order. People were gambling and if the house’s luck held, they were losing. Drinks flowed and the customers, no matter what species they were, seemed to be having a good time. The boss would be happy with tonight’s receipts. There had been a fight earlier, but with his size and skill, it hadn’t taken much for Lucas to convince the two men to take their differences outside. There had been very little damage to the black and white tables and silver trimmings the boss insisted upon. Surrounded by silver. It gave some of his people the willies, but Lucas was too tough and stubborn to worry about it. He figured if his number was up, so be it. No amount of worrying about it would help. He took another sip of his drink, and watched with amusement as a nearby dealer raked in a load of chips from a winning hand. The customer didn’t even flinch, but anteed up again. As he looked around the room again, Lucas’ gaze stopped on a figure that had just entered through the front door. He watched as it removed a long coat, and then stand completely motionless in the shadows. Something about the utter stillness of the figure set alarms off in Lucas. Trouble. He pushed off of the bar and made his way through the crowd. Kira became aware of him as he moved…no…stalked toward her. Here was a man with an animal type of grace. His 40

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining was not the smooth sensual gliding walk that Gallegar had, but the rough gait or tireless lope of a predator stalking its prey. She saw his body was tall and thick, with rippling muscles in his arms and legs. His face was strong and hard. He had short blond wavy hair, and eyes that gleamed silver in the overhead lights. As he drew nearer, Kira saw they were an icy gray—so pale they looked silver. Her power moved within her. She smiled and moved to intercept him. He was the one. He was the one whom she’d been sent to meet. The Power told her she would be joining with this man. Lucas saw that smile as she moved from the shadows toward him. She was a remarkably beautiful woman, but that sense of trouble still bothered him. It wasn’t until she was standing directly before him that he felt the power surrounding her. Lucas’ eyes narrowed as he felt it curl around him and call to the animal he carried within his soul. The urge to change came over him so swiftly he gasped and backed away from her. “Don’t,” he growled urgently. He put his hand up as if to push her away. “What are you doing?” Kira frowned as she came toward him. He felt her pull back her power as she placed a small hand on his broad chest. “I am sorry. I did not know that would happen.” Lucas shook himself, quickly gaining control again. He wanted to back away from her hand as it rested on his chest, but he couldn’t. He felt his own power reaching out, mingling cautiously with hers. It felt comfortable…it felt right. “Do I know you?” he asked. Kira shook her head. “I am Kira. I am the Peacekeeper. I am for you, Lucas Kane, Master Shapeshifter. You are for me.” Lucas stared down at her. She was so tiny. At least a foot shorter than his six foot four inch height. But the power he felt in her was enormous. “I am no Master. What do you mean…I am for you?” 41

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I am here to help you protect your people. To do that, I must join with you.” “Me?” Lucas felt his pulse beginning to pound in his head. What is she talking about? This lovely creature wanted him to join with her? Did that mean what he hoped it did? Lust surged up in him. He wanted to pull her to the floor and explore the power that shimmered around her. “You are the leader of your …” Kira stopped in midsentences Her eyes unfocused for a moment and she cocked her head. As her silver hair flowed off her shoulder, Lucas saw the fresh bite of a vampire on her neck. He frowned. If she was feeling spacey due to blood loss, that would explain the oddity of her words. But it wouldn’t explain the power he felt growing steadily in her. Her gaze refocused and snapped to his. “You are not the leader of your people.” “No, I am the second.” Kira looked up at the handsome man before her. She had thought he was the Leader of the Wolf Shapeshifter Clan. His power was very strong and he was the one she was to join with. Why would the Power want the second and not the clan leader? She knew she must convince him of her mission. She hoped she could do a better job than she had done with Gallegar. Thinking of Gallegar made her miss him. Her heart pinched in her chest as Kira recognized some of what she was feeling for this Lucas was the same as what she felt for Gallegar. Does that mean Gallegar isn’t special to me? Her stomach clenched at the thought. Lucas’ face came back into view and she took a deep breath. “My name is Kira. I am Peacekeeper, sent to you, so you may help your people. I have been sent to join with you, not 42

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining your clan leader. I do not know why this is so, but I do know it is the way it must be. I am for you, Lucas Kane. You are for me. “I know the Words of Death for your people. I can use them to help you, to protect you and strengthen your people. Something is coming that will harm all of us.” Lucas listened to her incredulously. She was telling the truth, he could smell it. The Words of Death? He had thought them lost. A thrill raced through him. If what she was saying was true, this was one very dangerous lady. And if it were true, she had just offered to give him a power stronger than any shapeshifter had ever known. Who is she? He eyed her narrowly. What is her agenda? What will she get out of all this? Against all reasoning, he found himself believing her. Maybe it was the innocence in her eyes, or the fact her emotions sat right on her sleeve. Lucas found himself tempted by the offer. He could control the Words of Death? He hesitated. He was loyal to his people. To his clan leader. As much as he wished it differently, Elijah should have the first chance at this power. “I am not the leader of my people. This decision belongs to my clan leader.” The woman nodded, as if she had been expecting it. “You are a good man, Lucas Kane. Honest and loyal. It may be why you have been chosen over your clan leader. Take me to him, please.” Lucas nodded and turned toward the glassed-in room at the far end of the large hall. While the glass couldn’t be seen through from the floor, it was transparent on the inside, giving Elijah a clear view of what was happening in his club. Inside were private tables for the elite gamers, as well as Elijah’s private office. Partway across the room, Lucas felt Kira’s hand on his arm. He turned to see her worried face gazing up at him. 43

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “What’s the matter?” he asked, taking her by the arms. She was shaking. He was shocked it bothered him. He didn’t even know her. Unconsciously, he stroked her arms soothingly. “You must not tell your clan leader what I have said to you. You need to be as surprised as he is when I offer for you.” “Why?” Kira swallowed heavily and Lucas could tell she was frightened. “You will be in danger otherwise. What I have offered to you, a lesser man might take to overthrow his leader. I do not know your future in the clan. But you are the one I must join with. If he fears you, he may kill you.” Lucas stood there, holding her arms in his large hands, thinking through what she had said. She was right. Elijah might kill him if he knew what Kira had offered him. That much power would rightly belong to the clan leader alone, and he wasn’t it. But one thing he did know. He was curious about this joining with her and he wanted to know more about it. What he didn’t get was why his feelings for this slip of a woman kept getting stronger. It was one thing to want to get in her pants, but what he was feeling hinted at emotions beyond that. And he wasn’t sure he liked that one bit. Bemused, he looked down at her, seeing she was truly afraid for him. “All right. I won’t say anything. I’ll just bring you to Elijah. You can do all the talking.” Kira smiled at him again and her golden eyes glowed. Lucas held his breath at her beauty. His body tightened as she stood on her tiptoes and pressed a chaste kiss to his cheek. “Thank you. I cannot bear to see you hurt.” Lucas swung around sharply and strode toward Elijah’s office, not bothering to see if she followed. If he was to pretend she didn’t mean anything to him, he had better keep his distance from her. Already his body was tensed up like a stallion wanting to protect a mare. He had lifted his big hand and was about to 44

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining knock at the inner sanctum door, when he felt a sweep of new power enter the hall. He turned swiftly and saw three tall men striding across the room toward him. The power and heat rolled through the room. Lucas growled low in his throat and moved into a fighting stance. All the shapeshifters in the club came to instant attention. Lucas could tell almost immediately they were vampires and the one in front held tremendous power. Instinctively, he took Kira by the arm to move her behind him. Instead of obeying him, she gently shook herself free. “It is all right, Lucas. Earlier tonight I joined with this vampire.” She walked toward the men, joy wreathing her face, and the dark-haired vampire opened his arms to her. Kira went straight into them as if that was where she belonged. Lucas growled again deep in his throat. A pang of something dark raced through him as he watched. Gallegar lifted Kira’s chin and kissed her deeply. “I felt your need for me, A Ghra… I came.” Kira held him. “I am so glad you are here. I missed you.” She buried her head in his chest for a few moments, breathing in his unique scent. After a long moment, she took Gallegar by the hand and brought him forward to where Lucas was standing stiffly by the door. They both waited, as he finished calming the other shifters who had gone into readiness mode when Gallegar had entered the room. “This is Lucas Kane. He is for me. I am for him, but he is not leader of his people.” Kira’s anxious eyes moved between the two men. Lucas’ eyes narrowed in recognition. “King Gallegar, welcome to our domain.” Gallegar’s stomach clenched. Kira was to join with this man too? How was that possible? Didn’t the Power say they were to be together? His questioning eyes turned to Kira, but he could sense 45

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining she was as confused and scared as he was. It made him feel a bit better. He saw the shapeshifter was waiting politely for him to respond. “I come as Kira’s joined. I come in peace to your lands.” Lucas raised an eyebrow. “The power you sent out before spoke of challenge, not of peace.” Gallegar looked amused. “I apologize, Shapeshifter. My concern for my Lady overrode my normal good manners.” Kira broke in before the men could continue. “I am to meet the clan leader, Elijah.” Gallegar nodded. “Use your words carefully, A Ghra… This Lucas’ clan leader is a wily and clever man. He will think long before granting your request.” His eyes met Lucas’ over her head. “He will think only of what is best for him.” “I will heed your counsel, my Heart.” She reached up and cupped his cheek in her hand. Gallegar caught it swiftly and placed a kiss in the palm of it before releasing her. Turning, she met Lucas’ gaze and placed her hand again on his chest. “I am ready, Lucas. Remember…I am for you.” Her golden eyes glowed gently at him. A knot formed in Lucas’ throat. He spared a quick glance for Gallegar. That one’s gaze was imperturbable. Lucas realized he felt a trickle of jealousy over their easy affinity with one another. Swallowing, he turned and knocked once on the door, before pushing it open. Elijah, Clan Leader of the Wolves, sat behind a massive chrome and smoke-glass desk. He was surrounded by several other shapeshifters. At a nearby table, a tall brunette dealt out cards to several men playing blackjack. Lucas left Kira and the others at the door and moved behind the desk to whisper in Elijah’s ear. His attention turned to them and he rose from where he was seated. 46

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Welcome Gallegar, Vampire King. You are gladly received in my establishment. May luck find you tonight.” The traditional greeting was accompanied by a low bow. Elijah was short and stocky, but powerfully built. Older, his temples were graying, and the lines on his face were deep, but the intelligence in his dark eyes bore witness he was no feeble old man. Gallegar returned the bow. “My night has already proven lucky, Lord Elijah.” He put his hand on the base of Kira’s back and gave her a slight push forward. “This is why.” Kira walked forward and met Elijah’s sharp gaze. “Lord Elijah, Leader of the Wolf Clan. I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I have been sent to join with one of your clan. I am here to help you and to protect your people.” Elijah stared at Kira. His lips quirked and he gave a bark of laughter. “How can you do anything for me, girl? You’re no shapeshifter. I would have smelled it on you.” Offhandedly, he sent a burst of power at Kira. It made the hair on her head move slightly, but her own power met it easily and deflected it. In answer, Kira sent her power rolling over Elijah. Her eyes glowed, and everyone in the room felt the hairs on their body lift in response. Lucas stiffened in his position at Elijah’s side. He had the mad compulsion to jump in front of Kira and protect her. Elijah’s eyes narrowed as he felt the strength of her power. “Well, girl, there is more to you than meets the eye. Who sent you, and what is it exactly you want?” Kira chose her words carefully. “A great Power sent me. I am told it goes by many names. I am here to join with one of your people. By doing so, I will be able to use my abilities to protect your kind. The person chosen will be a conduit through which you may direct my powers to help your clan.” She looked at him, willing him to understand. “There is something coming 47

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining that can do great harm to all of our people. The joining will help prevent that.” Elijah looked Kira up and down almost insultingly. A murmur of power slipped away from Gallegar, angry at the offense. “Careful…Wolf Leader. She is my Lady.” Elijah looked at Gallegar. “She is neither shapeshifter nor vampire. She doesn’t even smell human. You have freely joined with this creature?” “With great joy. She has given me life through her power.” “You serve her then?” Gallegar snorted in amusement. “The Vampire King serves no one, Beast Lord.” Gallegar’s power continued to move over the room. “We have joined our powers.” Elijah turned back to Kira. “Why does he need you? His power is very strong.” Kira smiled. It made the hairs on the back of all the shapeshifter’s necks standing on end. “I know the Words of Death over the vampires.” Her soft statement sent murmurs of shock through the crowd. Gallegar’s gaze met Lucas’ over his Clan leaders head. Lucas’ was impassive. So, she had already told him. Elijah frowned. “That is all fine and good for the Master Vampire here, but what good will they do for us?” There was a short silence then Kira spoke quietly. “I know the Words of Death over Shapeshifters as well.” Elijah actually took a step back from her before he collected himself. “Those words have been lost for centuries. No one knows the Words of Death over my kind! No one!” Kira looked at him and her eyes shone even more golden. “I do.”

48

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Elijah snarled and clenched his fist as if he wanted to strike her. Beside him, Lucas moved suddenly, and it wasn’t clear whether he was trying to stand with Elijah or Kira. In response, Gallegar moved up beside her protectively. Gabriel and Noah flanked their backs. Kira put a hand on Gallegar’s arm and he relaxed slightly, but he kept one eye on the Clan Leader. Shapeshifters and vampires were both very quick when they needed to be. “My Lord Elijah, if I had wanted to use the Words against you or your people, I could already have done so. I wish to join with one of you so the Words of Death may be used for your people’s sake.” Elijah turned and paced back to the edge of his chrome table. You could almost hear the wheels turning as he fought to turn the situation to his advantage. He turned back to Kira with a crafty expression on his face. “You wish to join with one of my people.” “Yes.” “Do you know who?” Kira hesitated, not wanting to lie directly to him. She thought frantically, trying to figure the best way to tell Elijah about Lucas. Lucas stood like a pillar of stone next to his leader. “I will choose who you are to join with.” The demand startled Kira out of her thoughts. She blinked at him in confusion. “I am sorry, Lord Elijah. The Power must choose.” “Who is this Power? Is that who sent you to me?” “Yes,” Kira answered him. “I am sent to help you, but the Power decides who I will join with. With your permission, I will test those in this room. When I find him, we both will know.” She dared not look at Lucas. “Accepted…if I must.” Elijah sat on the edge of his desk. “Start with me.” 49

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira took a deep breath. “You, my Lord?” “I am the Leader of the Clan. Does it not make sense I should be tested?” “Of course.” Kira walked toward Elijah. Spreading her hands in front of her she sent her power out over him. Since she knew it would not accept him, she waited an extra long minute before shaking her head. “I am sorry, Clan Leader. I am not to join with you.” Without waiting for his response, Kira moved around the room touching her power gently to all the shapeshifters. As she had known, none were acceptable. When at last she came before Lucas, she moved her power over and through him. Lucas gasped and his eyes lit up with a silvery glow. Kira’s eyes lit with answering golden fire. “Lucas Kane, I am to join with you. I am for you. You are for me.” Kira’s voice was strong and sure as she spoke to him. Lucas staggered against the desk as Kira’s power flowed through him. All he had felt for her since she walked in came to a head at the feeling of that power. Everything in him wanted to go to her, to press himself against her, to join with her. He actually began moving toward her like a sleepwalker, but Elijah slapped an arm against his chest breaking the thrall. “This is who you choose?” “The Power chooses, Lord Elijah, not I.” Kira reminded him. “This Lucas is the shapeshifter I am to join with.” Kira tried to keep her choice of Lucas sounding impersonal. They could not allow him to know how important this was. She could feel a touch of fear now he was exposed, and she didn’t like how it made her feel. “I fear for him, My Heart,” Kira mind-spoke worridly. “If he is the one, A Ghra… all will be well.” Kira stood still as Elijah paced around the room. To say he was angry about her choice was an understatement. He was 50

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining furious. To protect Lucas, she must continue to play the game. At least that was the counsel Gallegar kept repeating in her mind. Quietly she put out her hands in a placating movement. “What must I do to convince you, Clan Leader? Your Lucas is the one the Power has chosen. He is to be the conduit you use to help your people.” Elijah moved in front of her. As short as he was he was still taller than Kira. He stood close to her, trying to intimidate her. “And what if I don’t believe you about the Words of Death? I have only your word they exist.” He glared at Gallegar as he stood poised and ready at Kira’s side. “Did you take her on faith alone? Or did you see the Words in use?” Gallegar snapped his fingers and Noah came forward. “Yes, Master.” “Did you see our Lady use the Words of Death?” Noah nodded and a look of fear came over his handsome face. “We would not allow her in to see the Master. She used them on the door guard at the club. He said it felt like his skin was burning off.” Elijah stared at the vampire. “This vampire still lives?” “Yes, he gave up before she finished the death chant. He allowed her in, so she healed him.” At that Elijah looked over at Kira. “You know healing words as well?” Kira shook her head. “I know the words to end and ease the pain, if the Words of Death are not completed.” “But you did not kill anyone.” “No, I do not kill unnecessarily.” Gallegar cleared his throat. Even though everything had turned out well, it was hard for him to think of those moments where he had taken Kira and bloodied her neck. “When I would not listen to my Lady’s request, she used the words on me.” 51

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Elijah pounced on his statement. “What happened?” Gallegar shrugged. “I did not believe she was there to help my people. I feared for them. I…attacked her.” He looked at Kira, smiled, and his eyes shone a hot green. “She used the words on me.” His gaze went back to Elijah. “They would have killed me.” Elijah was still for a moment. Deep in thought. Kira felt uneasy. She sensed something would go wrong, but she did not have the knowledge to prevent it from happening. “I wish to see the words in action.” Elijah looked at Kira as if he expected her to turn tail and run. “Show me these words.” Kira stared at him, aghast. “You wish me to kill one of your clan just to prove to you they work?” “Afraid you can’t do it?” he sneered. Kira’s temper flared and she came toward him with her hand outstretched. He backed away quickly. “Come Clan Lord…let me show you real fear. I started with you once before. Let me do so this time as well!” She backed him up against the desk, her eyes burning hot in her head. “Get away from me!” Elijah shouted. His guards moved swiftly between Kira and their leader, Lucas included. Seeing him standing there so bravely, made Kira swallow her temper and bring the power back into her body. Gallegar moved up behind her and put his hands soothingly on her shoulders. “Come away, A Ghra… You can do nothing to him.” “He is a coward!” The words were spoken softly in Gallegar’s ear, but a shapeshifter’s hearing is acute and the insult was heard by all of them. A resonating growl filled the room. Kira and the vampires moved closer together.

52

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “You abuse our hospitality, Vampire!” Elijah’s voice dropped roughly. “Do you think you can safely get away from here with your Lady in tow?” Gallegar’s jaw tensed in anger. He was sure between Kira and himself, they could wipe up the floor with these shapeshifters, but he was afraid she might get hurt in the crossfire. So when he spoke, his words were mollifying. “Clan Leader…my apologies. Too much emotion does not allow us to see clearly.” He kept Kira standing firmly before him. He could sense her regret and anger. He thought for a moment, his handsome face tight in concentration. “An idea, if you were to permit me.” Elijah moved from behind his bodyguards. His face was still flushed with anger but he was listening. “Tell me your idea.” “My Lady does not like the idea of killing unnecessarily. You know as well as I, a leader’s safety is of prime importance to our people. Not wanting to risk yourself makes sense and carries no shame. My thought is…perhaps if you were to ask for a volunteer to have the Words of Death spoken over them. Someone who would put his life before the clan’s…” Gallegar let his voice trail off. “A volunteer.” Elijah mulled that over. He stared at Gallegar and tapped his forefinger against his lower lip. “I think that would be acceptable.” He looked around at the shapeshifters gathered in the room. “I volunteer.” Kira’s gasp almost covered Lucas’ quiet words. “For the sake of the Clan and my Clan Leader, I will do it.” Kira started forward to object, but Gallegar pulled her back against his chest. “If you prevent him from doing this, it will go badly for him.”

53

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Elijah just wants me to kill Lucas and remove the competition. I will not do it!” Kira’s voice was a shout in Gallegar’s head. He gave his head a bemused shake. “Gently, A Ghra… My head may not survive your anger.” Kira whirled and stared angrily at him. “Do you wish me to use the words on all those I join with? You want me to do to them what I had to do to you!” Tears welled up in her eyes. Cursing, Gallegar pulled her gently into his arms. “I think we must allow this…to keep him safe. His stature will go up in the clan by agreeing to do this. Mayhap, Elijah will find him worthy to join with you.” “I hate this!” Kira sniffled into his shoulder. Gallegar pulled away from her and looked into her eyes. “What must be done, will be done. You have the control. You do not have to kill him.” “And if Elijah requires it?” Gallegar laughed softly. “Since when have you listened to one such as him?” Kira smiled and wiped her tears. Lucas watched as Kira and the Vampire King carried on their silent conversation. He wondered if the telepathy was a result of their joining, or if it was a vampire thing. He knew Kira didn’t want to use the Words of Death on him. He wondered if she realized Gallegar had set it up to make it possible for him to prove himself this way. It could be why she was so angry with him. He watched as Gallegar grimaced and shook his head. Lucas grinned to himself. He guessed you could shout telepathically. He watched as Gallegar brought Kira back under control. She was a fiery one all right. It bothered him she was afraid for him. He didn’t like the fact he was the cause of her pain. But he knew this needed to be done. If he could pull this off, Elijah just might 54

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining allow their joining. He found everything inside him wanted to join with Kira, whatever that meant. Kira turned and stared at the shapeshifters. Her hard golden eyes rested on Elijah. “You force me to do this?” “He volunteered.” Elijah’s voice was smug. He held the cards and he knew it. “Do not push me too hard, Master Shapeshifter.” Kira’s voice was a low purr, and it carried over to Elijah and went through him with a shiver. “Remember who I am and the words I control.” “Then get on with it!” Elijah muttered, trying not to show how her words had affected him. He motioned for Lucas to stand before her. Lucas did so, standing tall and strong in front of her. Kira looked up at him and after a moment, silver gray eyes met gold. Lucas watched her eyes slowly fill with tears. “I am sorry,” she whispered. “This…I never meant to happen.” Lucas felt her pain like a punch in his gut. “Do what needs to be done, honey.” He lifted his hand and brushed away the tear that trailed down her cheek. “I’m ready for you.”

55

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 4 Kira sighed and placed her hand on his thickly muscled chest. Her eyes began to glow with the fire of her power. Everyone in the room felt it when Kira spoke the first words. “Ohbed ockt no veil Shabot ner to cavx.” Lucas staggered with the force of the pain that shot through him. It felt like a thousand knives driving themselves underneath his skin. One by one, they slipped agonizingly between muscle and skin, slowly tearing away his flesh. His head clouded and he shook it as if to clear it. Gritting his teeth, he blew out his breath in a loud blast but continued standing. Kira looked at Elijah. He watched his wolf with a look of horror on his face. Kira wondered if he thought it would be an easy death. If nothing else, this would show the Clan Leader her power. Biting her lip, hating the pain she was causing him, she spoke the words again. “Ohbed ockt no veil Shabot ner to cavx.” With the second set of words, Lucas felt as if his body exploded. The knives were gone, but now great, greedy claws scraped his skin from his body. The pain was indescribable. With a harsh growl, Lucas fell to his knees before Kira, panting out his agony. It was only his incredible strength that allowed him to stay conscious. 56

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked again at Elijah. His face was sickly white as he watched Lucas struggle with the pain. “If I say the words a third time, Lucas will die.” She waited but Elijah was silent. Furious with him and herself for having to do this, Kira put forth her hand and called all the shapeshifter power in the room to her. All felt the vacuum as she used their own power against their clan mate. “Ohbed ockt no veil Shabot...” Kira paused and her eyes overflowed with tears. Lucas sagged against her, wrapping his arms around her slim waist. His howl of pain sent all his clan family scrambling against the wall to get away from him. Writhing from the pain of his skin being shredded inch by inch, Lucas lost full control of his shapeshifting form. The tips of his finger split open to send six inch lethal claws sprouting from his hands. Gallegar hissed in alarm. He knew if Kira was scratched by those claws she might be poisoned and become a shifter herself. A warning jumped from his mind to hers. “He can not hurt me, my Heart. I am immune to such things.” Are you immune to being ripped apart?” Gallegar’s concern grew as Lucas fought harder against the excruciating pain, his arms tightening, bringing the terrible claws close to Kira’s body. “I will be all right. He will not hurt me. He is Chosen.” Gallegar sensed the truth in her words, but still found it difficult to see her standing there, almost enveloped by Lucas’ changing form. Kira met Elijah’s eyes and waited, her eyes shooting golden fire at him. Elijah knew if he did not release Lucas, his own life could very well be forfeit. He’d seen her power now, and he couldn’t count on Gallegar controlling her anger if the man died. It was 57

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining time to back off. He cleared his throat and shouted over Lucas’ dying cries. “Enough, Peacekeeper! Let him go!” Immediately, Kira took Lucas’ face in her hands. “Lucas…hear me,” she whispered, her voice thick with her tears. “It is over. Be at peace.” Lucas gave a gasp, as all the pain left him. It was like diving into an ice-cold pond. The relief so great, it too was painful. His limbs spasmed as his claws slowly withdrew into his fingers. He collapsed into Kira’s arms, and Gallegar and Noah were there to help ease him to the floor. His heart was pounding so hard he thought it could be heard across the room. Buckets of sweat poured from his body, as he trembled in reaction. His blurry eyes met Kira’s as she watched him closely, tears running down her face. Her hands stroked his hair. He heard her whispering over and over again. “I am sorry. I am sorry. I am sorry.” Gallegar watched Lucas as he laying panting, waiting to recover. His own bout with the Words of Death hadn’t affected him so hard. He wondered if it was the power-filled blood he had consumed that made the difference. It was several minutes before Lucas was strong enough to get to his feet, and that was only with Gallegar’s help. He stood still, trying to get himself under control. Slowly he moved away from where he was leaning on Gallegar’s shoulder and staggered over to his Clan Leader. Elijah’s face was still white as he watched Lucas drop slowly to one knee before him. “Clan Leader.” Lucas paused and took a cleansing breath. He was relieved to feel some of the strength returning to his body. “I believe this female does know The Words of Death for our people. I was but a breath away, before you saved me.” 58

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “And knowing that…you would still join with this creature?” Lucas knew how to properly answer that. “If My Lord deems it is the right thing for our clan, I will join.” Elijah’s color had returned to his face. He stared down at the man before him. He realized he’d made a great mistake by allowing Lucas to receive the Words of Death. Living through them had given him greater power in the clan. He could not see allowing him to join with a creature who held the power of life or death. Even though Lucas was loyal, some day he may fight for right to be Clan Leader. It would not do to give him more of an advantage. But how to prevent it without seeming afraid? Suddenly, an idea sprang to his mind. Delightful. He chuckled inwardly. Either way, he would win. “I will give you permission to join with my wolf.” Thank you, Clan Leader.” Kira could taste the relief. She turned and smiled back at Gallegar. “Under one condition…” Kira met his stare with her own. She saw the gloating triumph in his and was suddenly afraid. She felt Gallegar soothing her in her mind, but she waited tensely for Elijah to drop the other shoe. “I have no Alpha in my clan. Become my Alpha and I will allow you to join with Lucas.” The room went completely still. Then Kira felt Gallegar’s anger power over the room. The shapeshifters tensed in readiness and none looked happy. “I do not understand.” Kira looked toward Lucas who was holding himself very still, as if he too wanted to spring at his Clan Leader. She went to him, laying a hand on his arm. “What does he mean?” 59

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas levered himself to his feet and turned to her. His eyes were icy in his taut face. “He is saying if you become his mate, we can join together.” Kira’s jaw dropped. She turned to Gallegar for affirmation. At the look on his face, she knew Lucas was telling the truth. Gallegar, Noah and Gabriel were standing at the ready. She could tell Gallegar was furious at the thought of her mating with Elijah. She mind-spoke Gallegar. “That disgusting man wants me to have sex with him?” The loathing in her voice was apparent and Gallegar couldn’t help but relax and give a mental laugh. Kira narrowed her eyes at him and marched over to him, standing so close her chin was to his chest as she stared up at him. He felt the strength of her anger as she mind-spoke him a second time, her words slamming into him. “You think I would even consider…” “Shhh, A Ghra... I am sorry. My anger was great as well. I was afraid of what the Power might ask of you.” “Even if I wanted to do such a horrible thing…which I do not! I could not. You know that. And, if I cannot love with you, I would not even consider doing anything with him!” Gallegar smiled and pulled her into his arms. “Thank you for that. I feel the same way too.” He considered a moment. “Do not tell him you must stay pure, A Ghra… It could be used against you. We will keep that to ourselves for now.” Kira nodded. From the safety of his arms, she looked at Elijah. “I will not be your Alpha.” The shapeshifters began to mutter amongst themselves. Apparently it was not good form to turn down such an offer. Lucas stood watching her, his face showing nothing of his true feelings. 60

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Elijah waved his hand to where Lucas was standing. “Then you may not join with him.” Kira trembled in anger. Gallegar held her loosely, one hand running up and down her arm soothingly. ”You would deny your clan my protection because of this ridiculous condition?” Elijah’s eyes glinted with anger. “Most females would be flattered by such an offer.” “I…am…not!” Kira’s words were short and rang with sincerity. Elijah sprang to his feet. “I think you have overstayed your welcome, Peacekeeper. You will not join with my wolf. My clan will have to make due without your help.” “You put your people in danger! Please…reconsider!” “Leave us alone. We want nothing to do with you.” Kira just stared at him. She had failed. She looked at Lucas who looked back at her, longing clearly written in his beautiful eyes. He was the one, but she had no way of making it happen. She turned to Gallegar. “What do we do?” She searched his eyes, as she waited for his counsel. Gallegar sighed, knowing his answer would disappoint her. “There is nothing we can do, A Ghra… We can’t force him to allow the joining.” “But what about Lucas?” Her voice was a soft wail. “He should not have had to go through that for nothing.” Gallegar shrugged. “Perhaps it wasn’t for nothing. It is not over yet, A Ghra…” Gallegar motioned to Gabriel and Noah, who stepped out of the glass room. A thought came to him and he turned back to Lucas. “If you have your Clan Lord’s permission, I would speak to you about coming back from the Words of Death. There is a mind trick you can use to help with the healing.” 61

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Generous of you, King Gallegar.” Elijah smiled chillingly at Kira, who stood, still shaking with anger. “Go with them, Lucas. Learn your mind trick and see them to the door. Let me know when they are gone.” Lucas inclined his head in agreement. It was all he could do, not to leap at his Clan Leader and rip his throat out. His body ached with the knowledge he could not join with Kira. But he somehow sensed it was very important to hide his emotions now. He followed Gallegar and a now silent Kira from the room. Gabriel and Noah made a path through the crowded room toward the front door. At the entry, Kira whirled back to Lucas and pressed her face into his chest, flinging her arms around him. Automatically his own arms came up and wrapped around her. “We will find a way,” she said, her voice muffled by his jacket. “We will join.” She looked up at him, and he realized this was even harder for her than it was for him. Her heart stood in her eyes, as she gave him a quick hug. She grabbed her coat off its hook, and then slipped from the club. “Will she be all right?” Lucas asked hoarsely. His throat was tight and he was consumed with jealousy this vampire had what he could not. Gallegar gave one of his Gaelic shrugs. “She needs you. The sooner the better.” Lucas laughed bitterly. “That is impossible now. You heard Elijah.” “I heard him say you didn’t have his permission to join. But perhaps there are other ways, for your clan and the Peacekeeper’s sake.” “What are you suggesting?”

62

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar looked at Lucas through slightly narrowed eyes. He really didn’t want this guy anywhere near Kira, but…she did need him. “What I am thinking, is it might be good for a clan member to keep his eye on what is happening with The Peacekeeper. That clan member could make himself one of her entourage and find out information valuable to his Clan Lord.” Lucas stiffened. “You want me to spy on Kira for Elijah?” Gallegar smiled and it wasn’t a nice one. “No, my friend. I want you to make him think you are. Maybe then we can find a way to make your joining a reality. I would start with convincing him you are glad to be spared the horror of joining with such a horrible female, and then work on his fear of how dangerous she is.” Lucas smiled back at Gallegar. “I like the way you think, Vampire King. I’ll do my best.” Gallegar sketched a short bow, and then turned to the door. “Gallegar…” He turned back, his eyebrow raised inquiringly. “When she spoke the Words over you, what did it feel like?” Gallegar met the silver eyes with steady green ones. “It felt as if the flesh was burning from my bones. I have never felt such pain.” Lucas looked away, his voice dropping. “I felt as if I were being skinned alive.” He shuddered, and looked at Gallegar again. “Aren’t you…afraid of her?” This time Gallegar smiled. “Once you are joined, you will understand why there needs to be no fear between you. Joining cleaves your souls together. There is no room for fear, only joy.” The vampire gave a little move of his hands, as he spoke his feelings aloud for the first time. 63

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Besides that, I am in love with her. I have waited for her for more than a century. Any fear I may have had left the moment I knew she was the one.” Lucas nodded thoughtfully and raised his hand in farewell as Gallegar left the building. He stood for a moment thinking over what Gallegar had said. He did want to join with Kira. But the pain had been so huge, so uncontrollable, the thought of her touching him again scared him. Then Lucas thought of how Kira had gently comforted him and the look in her beautiful eyes as she’d wept over him. She hadn’t wanted to hurt him. If Gallegar was right and the fear disappeared, it would be worth whatever it took him to get to that point. He stopped as he remembered what Gallegar had said. He was in love with her? Lucas frowned. Did that mean she was in love with him? So where would Lucas fit into this mix? He sure as hell felt something for Kira too. He made his way back to Elijah’s office already planning what he would say. When he entered the room, everyone stopped what they were doing and watched him. “They are gone, Clan Leader.” “Good, they had no place here.” Elijah watched Lucas closely, but Lucas pretended not to notice. Lucas hitched a hip up on the side of Elijah’s desk. “I am thankful you found a way to prevent the joining.” Lucas didn’t have to fake the shudder. He just remembered how it felt when the first Word of Power drifted over him. Elijah went still. “You mean you didn’t want to join with the female?” Lucas shook his head. “After feeling the pain she can give, I wouldn’t want her to ever touch me again. She is dangerous!” “Agreed,” stated Elijah, looking more cheerful at the news his second was pleased with his handling of the situation. 64

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It’s just…” Lucas shook his head, and began to toy with a letter opener that had an ebony wolf carved on the end. “It’s just …what?” Elijah asked, his eyes narrowing on Lucas’ thoughtful face. “It’s just that she is dangerous. She said something was coming after us. And now she is angry. I have felt what happens when she shows her anger. We don’t know what her plans are. I don’t like not knowing what she is thinking.” Elijah considered this. “It would be easier to defend ourselves if we knew her thoughts. Do you have a suggestion?” “Put someone on the inside.” Lucas tried one of Gallegar’s shrugs. “Even someone who isn’t joined with her can tell what she is planning. Then he can come back and inform us.” Lucas was careful not to put himself forward. Elijah eyed him closely. “It would have to be someone they trusted.” “They don’t trust any of us now.” Lucas grimaced. “I wasn’t very polite to them as I showed them the door. I came close to throwing them out.” Elijah grinned. “Good. I didn’t like the way that bitch talked to me. She obviously didn’t understand the honor I was showing her.” He barked out another short laugh. “The look on her face when she realized I wanted to fuck her.” Lucas put a brake on the strong emotions that flowed through him. Elijah talking that way about Kira made him want to rip into his Clan Leader with claws and teeth. He held his face impassive with a will. “Still,” Elijah continued, after controlling himself. “We should put a man on the inside as you suggested. And unfortunately for you, buddy, you’re the best man for the job.” Lucas beat down the thrill of victory that arose in him, and turned to Elijah with a credulous look of dismay on his lean face. 65

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Me? I just told you I kicked them out of the club. They won’t want me anywhere near her.” “But she chose you.” Elijah said it mockingly. “If you go crawling to them with your tail between your legs, they will take you back. They’re not clever enough to see we are using them.” Elijah rubbed his hands together in glee. “Did they go back to A Crown of Thorns?” “I don’t know. I guess I could find them if I had to.” He made his voice sound supremely unexcited about the whole thing. “Buck up, boy! You have shown your mettle once today for your clan’s sake. Prove it to me again.” Lucas kept his face stony, as he inclined his head in agreement. “As you wish, Clan Leader.” “Have Joseph take over your duties here. Then off you get. Report back to me tomorrow with any information. We will keep you on this for a while and see where it goes. Then we can decide if it is to be permanent or not.” Lucas knew he needed to put up a token fight for his job as manager. “I don’t want to be reassigned. I am good at my job here.” Elijah glared at him. “If I think you would be of better use elsewhere, that is my prerogative. Now go!” Stiffly, Lucas bowed to his Clan Lord, and made his way from the room. Finding Joseph, he told him of the temporary change in his status. Sourly, he explained what the boss wanted and what would be expected. Not fifteen minutes later, he stepped through the front door and made his way to his car. He jumped, as a figure in black came flowing out of the shadows. Lucas recognized him as the vampire who had helped him when he had collapsed onto the floor. “I am Noah. My Master bid me wait here, so you would know where they have gone.” 66

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas opened the doors and started the car, as the tall vampire folded his length into the seat beside him. “Where to?” he asked. “Our Lady has gone to The Magick Box.” **** The Magick Box was a tall stone edifice that bordered the Lower City’s edges. Humans and nonhumans alike came to visit and watch the magick shows that went on every night. It also boasted a small café, and an herb shop that catered to witches and witch pretenders. Of all those who had supernatural abilities, witches were the only ones who could freely live in either world, as long as they didn’t call too much attention to themselves. Kira gazed up at the building. It was in the shape of a stone castle complete with drawbridge. It looked absolutely authentic. The only thing out of place was the brightly lit sign that showed the name The Magick Box in neon letters. A picture of a magician pulling a rabbit out of a hat flashed off and on. Gallegar took her by the hand and led her across the lowered drawbridge. “This place is run by the city’s Society of Witches. They do a good business for themselves.” He looked around with a businessman’s careful eye. “Yes, this would appeal to a human. Just the right amount of trickery and flash.” Kira only had eyes for the figure that stood just inside the opened doorway. It was a young man, dressed in a long, blue, flowing robe covered in stars and moons. He carried a long black wand and was waving it in the air as he motioned them inside the door. “Come in…come in,” he intoned, his words cheerful and bright. “You still have time to catch the last part of the show. Let me show you to a table.”

67

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira shook her head. “That will not be necessary.” She heard the proper words unfurl in her head. “I seek an audience with your high priest.” The young man’s face went from welcoming to suspicious in the blink of an eye. The long black wand disappeared, and in its place was a shorter, weathered piece of wood. “The high priest only sees those who have made an appointment.” The tone was final. Gallegar shrugged with apparent unconcern. “Then make one for us.” He allowed his power to roll over the robed figure. “Immediately!” The young man gasped as he realized he was dealing with a vampire and not a human. His gaze shifted from Gallegar to Kira, and then to Gabriel, who stood silent and menacingly behind them. He moved his wand slightly and Gallegar allowed his fangs to show in a tight smile as he blocked the spell the young witch tried to throw. A Vampire King’s power was much greater than this fledgling witch’s. Kira stepped in and put a hand on the witch’s arm. “I wish your High Priest no harm, but an audience is what I seek, and an audience I will have. Now please…go fetch him for me.” For a moment the witch was torn. He was charged with his Master’s safety, but he knew he was no match for two vampires, and he didn’t know what the woman was. She made the air tingle with magick, but he knew not what form it took. He made a decision and lowered his wand. “I will ask if the High Priest will see you. Please, come, sit and enjoy the show while I inquire.” He led the way inside and through a velvet curtain. On the other side was a roomy theater set with many tables, most filled to capacity. At the far end of the room was a raised stage hung in black and lit with spotlights. A magician was 68

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining exhorting the audience to watch as he magically levitated his buxom female assistant. The young witch led Gallegar, Kira and Gabriel to a quiet table in the back of the room. “Please wait here. I will check with the High Priest.” He turned and disappeared back through the velvet curtain. Gallegar pulled a chair out for Kira, and then took the seat next to her. Gabriel stood watchfully behind them. The magician on stage had finished his levitation trick and was now working on turning the woman into a tiger. Gallegar watched for a few moments, but his vampiric abilities could see through any trick, so the show held no enjoyment for him. Kira however, had never seen anything like it, and she watched with wonder as the woman turned into a large Bengal tiger. Her eyes were round with amazement when she turned to Gallegar, who was waving a waitress away. “How did he do that? Does he use magick? Can he get her back?” Gallegar chuckled, and lifted her hand to his lips for a soft kiss. “It is an illusion, A Ghra… There is very little true magick used in one of these shows.” Kira looked disappointed. “None at all?” Gallegar smiled. “Some. But the witches are careful to save true magick for more important things. Using magick is like any other supernatural ability. It is a gift that comes at some cost to the user.” “It weakens them?” “Not exactly.” Gallegar frowned, watching the magician return the woman to the cage that had seconds before held the big cat. “Their power is not infinite. Like mine, it must renew itself. Any witch that uses power indiscriminately, does so at risk to themselves.” They watched the show, but Gallegar saw Kira growing restless as time went on. Even though she hadn’t said anything 69

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining yet, he knew she was here to join with another, and that made his stomach roll. When they had left The Howling, he had started to drive back to his club, but Kira had asked him to come here instead. The Power had given her yet another command. Kira was so delicate and gentle it bothered Gallegar she was being used this way. When she gazed at him with eyes filled with worry, it took everything he had inside himself not to pull over and hold her until the fear was gone. Now, he felt helpless as they waited for the High Priest to make his appearance. He was just about to go find the witch who had left them there, when he saw Kira’s head whip around as someone came through the heavy curtains. He was a tall man. Lean and graceful, his sapphire blue eyes gleamed with intelligence as he strode toward them. His waistlength white blond hair was held by two small braids that stretched back from his forehead, until it mixed with the rest of his hair behind his ears. He had a strikingly beautiful face saved from being feminine by a strong jaw and firm lips. He wore a flowing white robe of silk and he carried in his right hand a long staff, where on the end, a blue stone shone with otherworldly light. As Kira watched him, she saw his face was lit not by trepidation as with all the others she had approached that night, but with a fierce gladness, as if he had been waiting for her. Her power told her immediately this was the High Priest and he was the one she sought. As he neared her, he stretched out his hand, his joy at her presence radiating from his features. Without a second thought, Kira slipped from the chair and put her hand in his. She opened her mouth to speak the words the Power had given her, but the High Priest swept her into his arms, and without a single word, his mouth came down on hers in a passionate kiss. 70

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar leapt from his chair in amazement and anger. He felt Kira’s shock in his head. She didn’t struggle against the embrace, but neither did she respond to it. Gallegar could feel his control begin to slip as the kiss went on. His power reached out and wrapped itself around the couple. He snarled out loud, as he felt the witch’s power deflect his own. They were too evenly matched. Danolas, High Priest of the San Francisco Society of Witches, felt the vampire’s fury, but didn’t understand the reason for it. At long last he held in his arms the answer to the dreams he had been having for almost a year. He recognized her power in the city long before his acolyte had come to him to inform him of her presence. He had been working out a spell to help him find her, when young Jorad had appeared in a panic before him. That she was a witch with powers equaling his own, he had no doubt. He whispered a spell into her mouth, welcoming her to his castle. Kira felt bemused. She was caught in the High Priest’s powerful arms, and she sensed him weaving a spell around her. The fact she had no fear of him prevented her from using her own power against him. The knowledge he was happy to see her was a powerful balm against the failure she had been feeling over losing Lucas. Here was someone who wanted her! Here was someone she didn’t have to convince. He knew her already. But, as she stood passively against him, Kira became aware of Gallegar’s growing anger. His power pulled at her, and gradually, she was able to take control and gently push the High Priest away. Danolas felt her withdrawal and lifted his lips from hers. He gazed down at her beautiful face and smiled. She smiled back. He wanted to pull her back into his arms again, but the anger snapping around him stopped him. She had been sitting with two 71

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining vampires. Perhaps they felt protective of her. He felt the one vampire’s rage, and reluctantly tucked the woman under his arm and turned to face her companion. Immediately, he became more cautious, as he recognized the Vampire King standing before him. He was in a towering fury. Gallegar’s green eyes glowed with power. Danolas frowned. He had overstepped somehow. Not understanding, he backed them both away slowly, gripping his staff. “Release her!” Gallegar ordered with a growl. Danolas slowly and carefully lifted his arm from Kira’s shoulder. Gallegar held his hand out to her. “Come to me, A Ghra…” Danolas felt the woman leave his side and go to the Vampire King. The vampire took her by the hand and folded her against his chest in a practiced and protective move. Obviously, she had been in that position before. Danolas watched in surprise as the Vampire King bent down and pressed a kiss against her soft forehead. Kira leaned against Gallegar, still a little befuddled by the High Priest’s kiss and softly spoken spell. Even though she had enjoyed the feeling of acceptance in his arms, she knew without a doubt she belonged in Gallegar’s. The moment he had pulled her back to him, she had felt the rightness of it. Kira looked across at the High Priest who stood there looking as confused as she felt. She mind-spoke Gallegar. “I still need to speak to him.” Her words seemed slow and thick to her. “I will not allow him to touch you!” Gallegar’s inner voice was harsh. Kira shook her head and looked up into Gallegar’s eyes. “He does not understand yet. I must give him the words. Then he will know who and what I am.” Danolas watched as the couple shared silent communication. He felt like he had dropped in at the end of a 72

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining play he had never seen before. He was confused as he watched the intimacy between the woman and the Vampire King. A spark of anger grew in him. She should be in his arms. He had foreseen it. What the hell is going on here? He saw the mental conversation end. Gallegar turned to him, his eyes still angry, yet his voice was calm. “I am Gallegar, King of the Vampires. This is my Lady Kira. She wishes an audience with you, Danolas, High Priest of the Witch’s Society.” Gallegar’s words were formal. “Do you have a place we can speak with more privacy?” Danolas stared at him…considering the words. Gallegar was acting for the woman Kira’s sake. That much was obvious. Curiosity overcame his anger. “I grant you an audience, King Gallegar…Lady Kira. I wish to understand what is happening here.” He met Kira’s golden eyes. He saw the blush rise on her cheeks. “I had thought…” He broke off, shaking his head. “Follow me. We will go to my office.” Danolas led the way back through the curtain and into the lobby. Jorad was waiting there, his wand almost twitching with nervousness. “All is well, my friend. Join us…please.” After making sure Jorad followed, Danolas stepped through another arched doorway that led into a darkened room. He waved his staff, and the room flooded with light. He motioned proudly around the room. “My little magick shop.” He led them through a large, yet homey store. The air was perfumed with herbs and spices. Crystals glowed from baskets and shone like stars, as they glittered in windows against the night sky. Books filled an entire wall. In front of the bookcase sat a pair of soft chairs and a small table. The tingle of true magick filled the air. 73

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas stepped behind the counter and showed them through another arched doorway. Kira, Gallegar and Jorad preceded him in, but Gabriel, with a glance at his Master, turned and went back the way they had come. Gallegar offered no explanation. Kira found herself in a beautifully ornate room. Swaths of sapphire fabric spilled from the ceiling and hung to the white carpet in each of the four corners. In the center of the room a desk made out of solid crystal stood backed by tall elegant weeping willows. Flowering plants rested along the walls and topped side tables and file cabinets. A fireplace burned merrily on the back wall with several inviting oversized chairs before it. Danolas led the way over to them. “My Lady?” Danolas offered her the chair nearest to the fireplace. Instead, she walked over to him and laid her hand on his chest. Danolas felt the immediate connection between them. “I don’t understand…” he began. Kira silenced him with a look. She took a deep breath and Danolas saw her eyes glow. A rush of power surrounded him, lifting his hair, caressing his face. He looked at her in surprised wonder. This was no witch. Her magick was totally different than his. “Danolas, High Priest of the Witch’s Society. I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I am for you. You are for me.”

74

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 5 Danolas felt his own magick stir in response. All the visions he’d had came together as one in his mind. Her words spoke truth to him. They did belong together. He used his own magick to sift through the impressions his visions had given him over the past year. “I have foretold your coming. The coming of a great power that would help me rule my society. I didn’t understand how the power would arrive. I just knew the minute I saw you that you were meant for me.” “Lord Danolas,” Kira spoke softly. “I am for you. You are for me. We are to be joined. Our minds must unite together.” She paused a moment before going on. “I know the Words of Death for your people.” Danolas stiffened in shock, but said nothing. Kira could feel his magick touch her power and receive the affirmation her words were truth. She knew he could see the deadly words in her mind. “Paralot moreth togathra Verlo tinda summar.” She felt his shiver, as the Words were made known to him. She hoped she would never have to say them aloud to him. “Something is coming that can bring great harm to all our people.” Kira’s eyes narrowed, showing by the small cocking of her head she was learning more about why she had come to them. 75

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “What is it?” Danolas questioned. Kira waited for a moment, but with a shake of her head said, “I do not know everything yet. I am given pieces. Like a puzzle, I must put together. But this I do know. All of our peoples must bond together to prevent this thing from happening.” As Gallegar opened his mouth to question her, they heard a knock at the door. Danolas’ eyebrows came together in a scowl and he motioned for Jorad, who was standing by the door to open it. Gabriel came in, followed closely by Noah and Lucas. Shapeshifter power flowed into the room and Kira gasped, rushing toward them. Lucas stretched out his arms and she fell into them. She clung to him, until he lifted her into his arms and carried her toward Gallegar and Danolas. Danolas looked between Gallegar and Lucas, and he could feel himself becoming angry again. His magick swirled around the shapeshifter’s and vampire’s power. “You allow this, yet you send your power against me. Why? Who is this shapeshifter?” Gallegar’s lips thinned, but his voice was neutral when he answered. “Danolas, High Priest. This is Lucas Kane of the Wolf Clan. He has also been chosen to join with Kira.” He removed a clean cloth from his pants pocket and moving to Kira and Lucas, gently dried the copious tears that slid down her cheeks. He glanced at Danolas with a touch of steel in his eyes. “He did not kiss her!” Kira made a snuffling noise that made her sound more like a little girl and not a woman with infinite power. She wiggled in Lucas’ arms and regretfully he let her slide to the floor. She looked up at him. “Are you all right? I was so frightened for you. Why are you here? Has Elijah changed his mind?” Her nose wrinkled in disgust as she said the leader’s name, but he saw hope in her eyes. 76

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas shook his head. “No, honey. My clan leader is still being stubborn.” He looked over at Gallegar. “But your plan worked like a charm.” He grinned down at Kira. “I’m here to spy on you.” Kira looked up at him, confusion written all over her face. Gallegar smiled as well. “A Ghra…” Quickly, he told them all about what he had encouraged Lucas to do. Danolas’ lips quirked in amusement and he shook his head. “And he went for it?” Lucas just grinned again. “Well thought, Vampire King. This brings Lucas to her, but what of the joining?” Lucas lost his smile. “I am still forbidden to join with her.” His silver eyes met Kira’s and there was regret and fear in them. “But I’m here. Maybe I can find something that will change Elijah’s mind.” He looked at Danolas as if seeing him for the first time. He switched his gaze to Kira, and there was a touch of jealousy in his voice as he spoke. “This witch. He’s your Chosen too?” Kira smiled and looked at Danolas. Walking over to him, she slipped her hand into his. “I am to join with him as I have joined with Gallegar. He is to become a part of the whole. We must bring our peoples together.” Danolas looked down at her small hand in his. With his magick, it was easy to sense the anguish in the men who stood next to him. They were all to share Kira and a part of each of them hated it. It wasn’t an easy thing to swallow. They would do it because it was necessary. But since no one had all the answers as to why, it didn’t make it easy. It was all so sudden and confusing. Kira, not here yesterday, but here today, and in their lives. If they felt for her what Danolas did… 77

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He looked into Lucas’ face. There was a longing there as the wolfman looked at the small woman, a thirst that might never be quenched. He wasn’t master of his fate. He was bound to another. One who didn’t want the joining to happen. Lucas’ frustration was palpable and understandable. Then there was Gallegar. His feelings for Kira were more complex. Together, he and Kira shared something Danolas’ magick told him was stronger and more intimate than a simple allying of power. There were emotions involved that bound the two of them together more securely than any magick could. As for himself, he knew he had been waiting for her. Whatever this joining was, he would experience it with her. It was preordained. For his society and for himself. “I will join with you,” he said simply, meeting her golden eyes with his own. “We must have privacy.” Kira’s bald statement brought Gallegar’s head around sharply. His eyes narrowed forbiddingly, as he looked at Kira. “Why? What must you do, that I, who have already joined with you, can’t know?” His voice was sharp. Kira looked anxiously at him, then letting go of Danolas’ hand, walked to Gallegar and wrapped her arms around him. His arms came around her, almost crushing her with his strength. She spoke into Gallegar’s powerful chest. “It is necessary, my Heart. It is a special thing, a private thing, between Danolas and me.” She switched to mind-speech. “It does not make what we feel for each other less important. You have my heart. We share each other’s soul. No matter whom I join with, it will not be the same as what you and I shared. You must allow me to do this without fear. You will not lose me.” Gallegar closed his eyes tight as the truth of Kira’s words speared through him. He was afraid of losing her. It was hard to believe they had met only hours ago. The need to claim her was 78

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining as old as the hills where he had been born. He had hated the light that came in her eyes when she had met Lucas, and then later…Danolas. He wanted the light in her eyes to be for him only. He didn’t want Lucas or Danolas to experience anything like what Kira and he had shared together. There was a part of him, he now realized, that was worried the Power didn’t intend for them to be together. One that was afraid of the future. But what if my jealousy limits her power? What if what I am feeling right now weakened her? He sighed. He had given up the hope of mating with her, of feeling her body beneath his, for whatever reason the Power demanded. If he now needed to conquer his jealousy, so be it. She was the most important thing in his life. Now more important than his flock and his own life, he would give it to protect hers. Gallegar looked over Kira’s head and met Danolas’ troubled gaze. With clenched jaw, he gently pulled Kira from his arms and stood her before the high priest. Kira watched him the whole time, her own eyes filled with tears. “A Ghra…” He took her hand and placed it in Danolas’ waiting one. “Take care of her,” was all he could manage to say. **** Danolas led Kira through another arched doorway to the left of the fireplace. The lights came on as they entered and she found they were in a large bedroom. A king-size bed made of the same crystal as Danolas’ desk stood in the corner. A couch and set of chairs bumped up against the foot of the bed. Through a door to the right of the bed, she could see a well-equipped bathroom, shimmering with more of the beautiful crystal. He watched her take in the room. He smiled as she ran her hand over the crystal headboard. “This crystal is my stone of 79

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining power,” he shared with her. “It magnifies the magick talent I have.” “Is that what you carry in the head of your staff? He smiled at her. “Yes. I store extra power in there. Even though I am stronger than any witch in the city, there are times it is nice to have a little extra energy.” He pulled her gently to the couch at the foot of the bed. “I do not understand this power you have. When I first met you, I thought you too were a witch. I know now that isn’t true. But your power…my magick can make no sense of it. Will it become clearer once we are joined?” Kira bit her lip. She looked down at her hands, folded neatly together. She could feel such strength in him. And such a thirst for knowledge. “I do not know,” she said hesitantly. “I understand very little about what I am doing. If you are looking for an all-knowing Power, you will not find it in me.” She looked up at him. Sadness showed in her expressive eyes. “I know very little about myself at all.” Quietly, she told him the story of how she had came to be. From her first memory in the blue lit room to her adventures in meeting Gallegar and Lucas. She left out the private memory of her joining with Gallegar. “You see…every time I do something, I am haunted by the fact my knowledge is imperfect. Even if I am given a vision, there are times I cannot interpret it. I play it out moment by moment, and if I make a mistake, someone gets hurt.” By the look in her eye, Danolas could tell she was thinking of when she had spoken the Words of Death over Lucas. Her guilt at giving him pain showed in her face. He followed his instincts and put his arm around Kira. “You speak as if you are in this alone. You have Gallegar to lean on and soon you will have me. As these things happen, there will be the 80

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining three of us to work them out. You are not alone and naked in a bare room. You have us now.” She stared at him and she felt tears well up in her eyes. She was afraid of being alone. Gallegar and Danolas’ understanding would be a warm shield against the storm of fear and insecurity she felt. She still wasn’t used to leaning on anybody. She had known them for such a short time, and she wasn’t yet used to talking things over with them. It was almost impossible for her to believe she had just met them. There was a sense they had always been a part of her. She knew a part of her also feared the dynamics of one woman in a relationship with two men...three counting Lucas. Her biggest fear was hurting one of them. “How can you know so clearly what I am thinking?” she asked in amazement. “It is as if you can read my very mind. Like you have always known me.” “I have known you in dreams for almost a year now. It does not matter that we just met. We have been together for a long time.” “I want to feel I am not alone,” she whispered. She laid her head on his shoulder. “Help me understand. Join with me.” Kira loosed her power and it slowly moved over them both. Danolas felt her power glide over him. He opened his magick to it. Her power slid inside him as softly and as gently as an intimate kiss. He heard himself groaning in delight. It was a closeness he had never felt before in any type of magick, with any person. In response, his own magick merged with hers and swirled up out of him and into the room. It circled above them madly, wildly, before bursting in a fireball of sensation that came showering down in a shimmering, color-filled rain. She gasped and spread her arms out to her sides to receive the full weight of its glory. 81

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He found himself matching her motions, breathing in the mingling forms of their magick. Kira swayed with the emotions that rocketed through her. Danolas’ magick had opened up a part of her inner spirit she didn’t know even existed. The colors of his magick poured through her, a glittering rainbow of power. She stretched her arms out wide to embrace the feelings that danced in her body. She sensed, rather than saw him, do the same thing. Their powers met and blended into a new power—one that encompassed both of them. She strained toward Danolas as the newly formed magick pulled their bodies together. He felt her breasts press against his chest. They both slid off the couch, kneeling together on the floor. Their bodies came together, her softness against his male hardness. Their arms outstretched, their hands together, their fingers intertwined. The new magick poured into and through them both. The feeling was so intense it was painful. Danolas felt his body arch as the powers became almost too strong to hold. The colors became clearer, more vivid. He heard Kira sobbing his name as the magick filled their bodies to bursting. Her psyche was swamped with color and feeling. The magick was almost too great to be borne. She heard herself cry out, then sob his name. She heard him answer, but his voice was carried away in the sweeping stream of magick. Her knees gave out, and Danolas caught her as she fell. He pulled her into his lap, and she buried her head in his chest, waiting for the tumult to pass over her. Slowly, gradually, the magick calmed. It went from a raging waterfall of colors, to a lightly skipping stream. After a while, Kira lifted her head and her gaze met Danolas’ eyes. His eyes swirled with the rainbow of power they 82

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining had just experienced, and she knew by how he looked at her, that hers were showing the same thing. They stared at each other for a long moment before Kira spoke. “The power now in us is a new one, created to dream clearer dreams and understand visions. Through joining, we have become a part of each other. We have shared a psychic bonding, now we must share the physical.” Kira reached up and placed her right hand near the hairline of Danolas’ left temple, and waited patiently. Danolas frowned, but then his eyes widened as he felt an outside Power drop a suggestion in his mind. At Kira’s encouraging smile he reached over, and picked up his staff from where it had dropped. He gently rested it against the soft skin high on her cheekbone, near the outside of her left eye. By unspoken agreement, he sent his magick though his staff and into her. At the same time, he felt her power blast sharply into his temple. His shout mingled with Kira’s scream in the magick-filled air. The pain was terrible and sweat broke out all over his body. The sickly sweet smell of burning flesh filled his nostrils. Kira lay panting against Danolas. Her hand was still burning against his temple. Slowly, she removed it and it fell limply into her lap. She felt the staff slip from her cheek, and fall to the rug beside them. Weakly, she said the power words, finishing the joining. “I give you sight. You give me understanding. Together we will see the future.” Danolas widened his eyes, as the words whispered in his head. Kira had mind-spoke him, just as she did with Gallegar. “You give me sight. I give you understanding. Together we will see the future.” 83

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He repeated them back to her in the proper sequence and was rewarded by a shaky smile. Her heavy eyelids lifted, and for the first time, he could see the love in her eyes. “I am for you, Danolas. You are for me.” Her eyes closed again, then opened a moment later. Her eyes cleared and focused intently on his. The colors faded and the golden glow returned to them. “I see a vision for you, Danolas. I know you are confused about the emotions that swirl around us, but know this. I was never intended to belong to you. One is being sent who was created just for you. Look for someone with eyes as purple as violets, and hair as red as a flame. She is your true mate. Our joining can not compare with the pleasure you will find in each other’s arms.” He went still as he listened to her words. The new power within him showed him she spoke the truth. It was a true vision. He stared down at her, able to see her on both planes of existence. Her beauty was an inner one as well as an outer physical one. He felt a pang of sweet regret she wasn’t to be his mate. But the love he felt for her was no different. He would guide her and help her interpret the circumstances around her. She was his to protect. He let his magick flow over her and sensed he could now hear her thoughts and read her emotions. For the first time, he felt the pain from the brands he and Gallegar had made. It was stronger than the pain at his temple. He smiled. These he could heal with a simple spell. He placed his hand directly over the wound on her cheek. He whispered a short spell, then kissed his fingers and gently pressed them to the wound. Kira sat up with a gasp. “What did you do?” She reached up and felt the brand. “It doesn’t hurt any more.” 84

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Just a simple healing spell. It is one you can learn as well. Since our magicks have intertwined, I sense you may be able to do many things I can.” “Show me again!” Danolas moved his fingers back over her face. “I can’t see what you are doing,” she complained, as he repeated the spell over the brand on her cheek. He gave an amused chuckle and with a twist of his wrist, he made a mirror appear in her hand. She smiled, dimples showing briefly. She raised it to where she could watch him. Kira listened carefully as he spoke the magick words, then kissed his fingers and touched her cheek. She looked closely. The brand was in the shape of a crystal prism. Reaching down, Danolas broke a small piece of crystal off of the glowing head of his staff. “I would give you something to celebrate this joining.” Wrapping it in his hands, he closed his eyes and massaged it gently. He blew on his hands and when he opened them a necklace lay cradled in his palm. The crystal itself swirled with the same colored power created between them. “Oh, thank you.” Kira lifted her hair as Danolas fastened the jewel around her neck. It lay perfectly in the hollow at her throat. Kira’s eyes glowed. “You have given me this gift…now allow me to heal you.” She bit her lip in concentration. Placing her hand over his temple she followed his directions. After a quick kiss of her fingers, his pain was gone as well. Kira handed Danolas the mirror. His brand was a small “K” just below the hairline. “I must call Gallegar in here.” Kira yawned. “His brand hurts him terribly. Vampires do not react well to burns.” Danolas nodded, watching Kira with some concern. Now the joining was over, he could sense a great tiredness stealing over her. She lay almost limp in his lap. He used his magick to 85

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining check Kira’s aura on the psychic plain. What he saw was frightening. Her aura—he sensed it should be a bright golden color—was muddy and weak. He checked her shields next and what he saw staggered him. His voice was grim as he answered her. “Call him in, my Lady. It is time we talked. It is time we all talked.” **** Lucas sat brooding on the couch before the fire, and watched as Gallegar paced in great sweeping motions in front of him. Danolas had taken Kira through the doorway only minutes before, and already Lucas himself could feel the strong need to go after them. Not that he would try. Jorad stood at the bedroom door protecting his master’s privacy. A token thought, but Lucas would allow it. Lucas could sense the other two vampires waiting with utter stillness at the office door, as Gallegar had bade them. Only Gallegar stayed in motion, as if by pacing he could outrun whatever demons chased him. “How soon until dawn?” he asked the vampire. Gallegar stopped and scented the air with the same practiced ease a human man might check his wrist watch. “Two hours, maybe a bit more. We still have plenty of time.” He resumed his pacing, glancing distractedly at the door. Lucas saw the pain in his eyes. He couldn’t sense anything from Gallegar, but thought the vampire was probably shielding himself tightly, so his emotions wouldn’t affect Kira and what was happening inside the room. If his eyes were any indication, the Vampire King was hurting badly. God, I’m as jealous as hell and I’m not even joined with her. What he must be going through right now. For the first time, Lucas was thankful he hadn’t joined with Kira. He wasn’t sure he could 86

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining handle what he was sure was a mind-numbing pain. He spoke before he thought. “Is it worth it?” Gallegar jerked his head toward Lucas and actually took a step, his eyes glowing green in anger, before pivoting away to lean on the crystal mantel above the fireplace. He took a deep breath, fighting for control. “If you were joined with her, you wouldn’t ask me that.” “Then how can you stand it?” Lucas asked. “You were the one she came to first. How can you take her searching the rest of us out?” Lucas was the one who stood up now and began to pace. Gallegar turned and looked intently at the younger man. “I take it because I have no choice. To love Kira is to accept who and what she is. To accept why she has come. I can do nothing else. It doesn’t mean I like it. It just means I must live with it.” Lucas shook his head. “I don’t know. I don’t know if I can do it. Our lives are changing so fast.” He walked over to the window across from the desk. It was shaped like a turret, and was spelled to give the impression the person who looked outside was five stories up and looking over a moat into a summer meadow. “Have you thought of joining with her anyway? Without your leader’s permission?” Gallegar’s question came out of the blue, and he saw Lucas’ back stiffen in response. “I have thought about it.” The words were nonchalant, but Gallegar could sense Lucas had thought about it a great deal. Lucas leaned his head against the cool glass of the window as he spoke his thoughts aloud. “I’m afraid of her. But I am even more afraid of living my life without her. Hours ago I didn’t even know she existed. How could she become so important to me so fast?” His voice was bewildered. 87

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I have tasted death at her hands. I am questioning my Leader’s right to tell me how to live, something I have never done before.” Lucas laughed harshly. “I am standing here having a conversation with a Master Vampire, while a witch does God knows what with her! With the same woman who drives the beast in me to explode.” Lucas felt the roll of Gallegar’s anger at his statement. He turned and put his hands up in apology. “Do I want to join with her? You’re dammed right I do! Whether it makes sense or not. Should I?” He turned back to the window. “I just don’t know.” Gallegar watched the shapeshifter as he stared out the window. He could see the indecision on his face. “Remember…” he said quietly. “Kira’s power chose each of us for a purpose.” He walked over and stood behind him. Lucas turned slowly to meet him. Long habit had taught him never to keep his back to any vampire. Gallegar didn’t take offense, but just continued. “I was chosen to give her life. She was empty when she came to me. I will spend my eternity filling her. And the gift she has given to me…” He paused and his voice thickened. Lucas was shocked by the naked emotion he saw on his face. “What…what did she give to you?” Gallegar stared at him for a long moment, then reaching down, grasped Lucas’ hand and placed it over his chest. Lucas’ eyes widened as he felt the vampire’s heart beating strongly against his palm. “That’s impossible…it can’t be.” He stared at Gallegar in amazement. “Vampires have no heartbeat.” Gallegar chuckled. “Yet here it is. Beating against your hand.” His eyes softened. “That was her gift to me. She gave me her heart.” Lucas’ hand dropped away as the other man turned and walked toward the fire, perhaps embarrassed at his show of emotion. 88

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “But what does she need me for?” he asked. Gallegar shrugged. “You will know that at your joining. I can’t tell you any more. It is still all so new, there are no preset rules or beliefs. Kira struggles every moment, knowing she doesn’t know everything. But I do know she needs you.” The vampire turned away with a sigh. “She will not be complete until you join.” Lucas was quiet for several moments. “If I join with her, Elijah will kill me. Disobeying a Clan leader is an offense punishable by death.” Gallegar nodded. “As a king, I know what you are contemplating is treason. If you were my subject, I would have to punish you. But as a man bound to my Lady, and knowing you are necessary for her well-being, I can only wish you success.” He was quiet for a moment before continuing. “Think on this, Lucas. If you do choose to go against your leader’s edict and join with my Lady, you will not only join with her, but you will gain two powerful allies. The powers of a Master Vampire and a High Priest Witch are considerable. And whether you know it or not, your own powers are of a Master’s ranking. Between the three of us, we should be able to prevent any…incident from occurring.” Lucas stared at him, shocked at the considerable offer and at the fact Gallegar felt his shapeshifting powers were so strong. He walked over to the vampire as he stood by the fire. “I’ll consider what you have said, Gallegar. It is a big decision, but your willingness to talk about it with me has helped.” Gallegar snorted. “Don’t let it get around I helped you. Wouldn’t want to ruin my reputation of evil.” The two men shared a grin of understanding. They both stared into the flames in companionable silence. The crackling of the fire was all that was heard for a long time. 89

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Finally, Lucas broke the silence. “Do you know why she has come?” Gallegar gave one of his Gaelic shrugs. “I know she has been sent to help our people come together in some way, against something, that is coming…sometime. She is given pieces of the vision, a bit at a time. She didn’t even know we were coming to this club until we were in my car and on the road. I had to tell Noah telepathically, so you would know where to go.” “Well that’s damn cryptic! How can we help her with that kind of information?” “We handle each bit of knowledge as it comes. Sometimes she gets a large dose of it, others just a single word or sentence. Believe me…she is more frustrated than you are. She feels failure deeply. It almost killed her to walk out of The Howling without you. I could feel her grief.” Lucas didn’t know what to say to that so he stayed silent. Gallegar went on a moment later. “When I joined with her, I was given access to the same force that gives Kira her power. Not in the same measure, but enough to feel like I can help her when the visions come. Our powers combined in such a way so I can use my years of experience to guide her. I can give her counsel she might not otherwise…” Gallegar’s voice trailed off, and a look of pure relief played over his face. “The joining is over. She needs us inside.” He strode to the door where Jorad stood guard. “You do not have the High Priest’s permission to enter,” Jorad said, with a squeak of fear in his voice. He knew he didn’t have the power to stop them. “Do not try my patience, fledgling,” Gallegar growled, and he showed his fangs in a brief cold smile. Lucas intervened. “The Lady is calling him. Step aside. Now.” 90

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Jorad moved aside with ill grace, and Gallegar pushed into the room. Kira and Danolas sat on the floor in front of a couch by a massive bed. Kira’s eyes were closed and her face was very pale. Danolas didn’t look much stronger, but he cradled Kira in his lap with shaking arms. With a curse, Gallegar rushed over and swept Kira from him and seated her in his own lap on the couch. Lucas followed and gave his hand to Danolas, helping him up also. Danolas collapsed in a nearby chair, where Lucas joined him in its twin. “What the hell happened to her?” Gallegar demanded. His hand caressed Kira’s face and smoothed back her tangled hair. “Joining is intense,” Danolas stated, with a secret smile. “Wasn’t it that way for you as well?” Gallegar thought back to earlier in the evening. Their joining had been profound and Kira had seemed shaken afterwards. “Yes, but she was not as drained as this.” Kira opened her eyes and peered up into Gallegar’s worried face. “I am all right.” She struggled to an upright position in his lap, but didn’t leave it. “We are not yet done here.” “What more needs to be done?” Danolas inquired. In answer, Kira began to undo the buttons on Gallegar’s shirt. “Uh, Kira…” Gallegar began, shifting in embarrassment. “Hush, and listen closely to me. The joining between Danolas and I is complete, just as is the joining between you and I.” For a moment, Kira’s sad gaze rested on Lucas, and he felt the spearing pain of regret. “But we are not yet one. You must link with each other.” Gallegar and Danolas looked uncomfortably at each other. “Excuse me?” Gallegar asked.

91

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Your linking will give you the ability to become brothers in the psychic realm. You will share abilities and thoughts. Our circle will be whole.” Danolas leaned over and took Kira by the hand. “What must we do?” Kira smiled, and her dull eyes lit with a remnant of a golden glow. “Place your hand on each others’ brand. Share the words of power.” Lucas watched as the two men contemplated Kira’s words. He saw the moment understanding hit them. Gallegar pulled his shirt out of his pants and let it fall open. Branded on his chest above his heart was a charred “K.” Kneeling before him, Danolas placed his hand on it, then took Gallegar’s and raised it to his temple where his own brand had already healed. At Gallegar’s puzzled look, Danolas said, “A healing spell. Kira will show you when we are done.” “Now,” whispered Kira. “Share the words.” Gallegar closed his eyes and thought back to his own joining. The words, and the knowledge how to say them, were placed into his mind. He looked the witch in the eyes. “She has given me her heart. I have given her my life. Together in eternity forever.” Gallegar could feel the flare of his power rise between them. “She has given me sight. I have given her my understanding. Together we will see the future.” Danolas spoke the words firmly, and then felt his own magick spring forth to meet with Gallegar’s. A third power joined them, hot and golden. Kira’s…binding them all together into one. The shared power shot though the three of them and they arched in shock.

92

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 6 Lucas watched carefully as all three heads fell forward tiredly. Gallegar was the first to recover. He shook his hair back out of his face, meeting Danolas’ gaze as he did the same. Both men smiled. “My brother!” Gallegar said, grasping Danolas by the right forearm in greeting. Danolas grinned. “Brother.” He returned the arm grasp. Lucas looked from one to the other. “You’re okay then?” Gallegar looked at him, and relief eased his expression. “Better than okay, my friend. This linking makes everything a little clearer.” He looked at Danolas, and his eyes narrowed. “But I now can feel you are holding something back from us.” Danolas nodded. “We must speak of it immediately.” He looked at Lucas who looked back at him unflinchingly. “This involves him too.” Gallegar looked down at Kira who lay quiet in his arms. She was so pale and still. “She must rest. Then we can talk.” Danolas shook his head. “There might not be time. Lay her down on the bed. We can watch over her and still speak.” Gallegar frowned. He just wanted to take Kira back to Sanctuary where he knew she would be safe, but he could sense in Danolas’ words not only truth, but urgency. Rising, he carried her over and laid her back against the soft white covers. Her eyes flew open. 93

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Shhh…A Ghra…” He pressed a kiss to her pale lips. “Rest now.” “Not yet,” she murmured, slowly struggling to a sitting position. “I must heal you.” “Later…” he soothed. “No!” Kira pouted. “I do not want you to hurt any more, and you can learn the spell and heal your bite brand. Then I will rest.” Gallegar looked at her with exasperation. He caught Danolas’ amused gaze. That one shook his head at him. “Might as well let her do it. She probably wouldn’t sleep until it was done anyway.” Beaten, Gallegar turned back to her. He listened closely as Kira spoke the spell over him. When the burning in his chest ceased, he sighed in relief. He hadn’t been fully aware of how much it hurt. Carefully, he repeated the spell over the bite on Kira’s throat, sensing the throbbing pain ease. “Better,” she yawned, and slid down against the pillows. “I think I will take a quick nap…” Her voice trailed off. Gallegar pulled a cashmere throw over her then walked back to the other men. “Speak,” he told the witch as his fingers brushed over his healed brand. It had scarred, just as Kira had said it would. He buttoned up his shirt as he settled back on the couch. Danolas didn’t hesitate. “When we finished our joining…” Danolas smiled in memory. “I saw Kira’s weakness. It worried me, so I used my magick to study her aura on the psychic plain.” “What the hell is that?” Lucas asked, scowling. “The psychic plain is the pathway where energy is stored and released. If you know how, magick can be used to evaluate a person’s health.” “Tell us what you saw.” Gallegar’s voice was quiet. 94

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas frowned in concentration. “Her aura was weak. Her energy uncharged, like a battery used overmuch. I could sense great fatigue and also hunger. Strong hunger.” The men looked at each other. “What does that mean?” Lucas looked over to where Kira laid, her nose peeping over the top of the blanket. “It is not clear. Hunger that magnified can mean many things. It could be simple hunger or something else entirely.” Gallegar could sense his new brother’s unease. “There is more. Tell us.” “Kira is in danger.” Danolas stopped as the other two men came to their feet. “Let me finish. It isn’t something we have done, but something that has not been done.” He turned and looked at Lucas. “My joining,” Lucas said harshly, falling back into the chair. “Yes. To explain, I must paint a picture for you.” He motioned Gallegar to sit, and a quick grin lit his face. “Think of our Lady as the hub in a cosmic wagon wheel. Gallegar and I are spokes that shoot out from her center. Our arms…Gallegar’s power, my magick are the rims stretched out around her, protecting her. “When Lucas was chosen, he too became a spoke in the wheel. The difference is, because the joining was incomplete, there is no power protecting that part of the wheel. The spoke stands alone. The rim is unfinished.” “Our powers are not enough?” Gallegar’s tone held a touch of arrogance. Danolas smiled grimly. “The strength of our powers doesn’t matter. We were chosen for a particular reason. Our part of the rim reflects that. We hold strong because of that. To keep Lucas’ part of the wheel safe we would have to know: one; why he was chosen and two; we must have access to the exact power needed 95

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining to protect his part of the rim. Neither of us has that ability, so Kira is vulnerable.” “What could happen?” Lucas’ voice was hoarse. Danolas shifted in his seat. He was sore from the magick that had raced through him during the joining. “Kira shared with me, as part of our joining, how she was created. In a nutshell, she awoke to a new life. When that new life was felt on the psychic plain, all powers, both benevolent and malevolent, became aware of her. So far they have left her alone, but if an evil power wanted to, it could easily attack her since her shielding is weak in places.” He turned to Lucas. “I don’t know how much you have thought of this, but you must consider joining with our Lady, no matter what your leader may say. I know there are risks, but together we should have the power to negate them. If you won’t, I don’t think Gallegar and I have the power to keep her safe.” Lucas surged to his feet and walked over to stare down at Kira. The witch sighed. “I am sorry to place the burden on you. I wouldn’t do it if I truly believed there was another way.” Lucas bent down and smoothed a strand of hair off of Kira’s cheek. He ran his finger lightly over the scar Danolas had left at their joining. He wondered idly where his would be when they joined. He turned and looked at the two men. “I don’t see I have any choice…do you?” Gallegar got to his feet and came to stand beside him. He put a comforting hand on Lucas’ shoulder. “You always have a choice, my friend. It is just not an easy one.” Lucas laughed, a little bitterly. “You’re asking me to choose between my life and hers. It actually makes it easy. No choice…or should I say, no excuse.” He looked back down at Kira. 96

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “My life for hers. To save it, I will flout my Clan Leader’s directive. But for all our sakes, we should try to keep it quiet. If we can keep my joining under wraps, we can keep us all safer. Who knows what might happen if Elijah finds out?” “A good point, Lucas,” Gallegar agreed. “I am sure our own High Priest should have some type of spell to hide the effects of the joining. And your brand must be made in a place not readily seen.” “Is she up to another joining?” Lucas questioned Danolas. Danolas frowned, and rising, came and sat on the bed opposite where Gallegar and Lucas stood. “She becomes energized at the moment of joining, but I think she will be pretty wiped out when you are done. She should rest. And I am still uncomfortable about this hunger I saw in her. Do you know when she last ate?” Gallegar looked blank. “She did not eat at my place, nor did she do so at The Howling.” “And she ate nothing here either.” Danolas looked thoughtful. I think we need to ask her. As much as I hate to wake her up…” He jumped back, startled, as Kira suddenly sat up in bed. Her hands were pressed to her cheeks and she looked around in panic until she saw Gallegar. “I can sense the dawn,” she said fearfully, catching his hands in hers. “You must go now or you will not be safe!” Gallegar raised an astonished eyebrow. He soothed her by sitting on the bed and taking her again into his lap. Lucas was beginning to think it was the only place he would let her sit. “To feel the dawn approach is a vampiric skill, A Ghra… and you are still new at it. I have time to make it safely back to my sanctuary before true dawn. All will be well.” 97

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira settled back down into his lap with relief. A huge yawn almost cracked her jaw. Danolas hid a smile as he leaned in to question her. “My Lady…when was the last time you ate?” Kira blinked at him, her face a study in confusion. “I do not know,” she began then started chewing on her lip as she tried to concentrate. Gallegar tapped his finger on it and smiled knowingly at her. Kira blushed, but stopped the movement. “When I awoke, it was a Wednesday. She gave me food then. What is today?” “Saturday,” Lucas answered, his brows knitting together in a frown. “Well then, whatever that makes it.” She closed her eyes in seeming unconcern. “Are you telling me you haven’t eaten in four days?” Danolas croaked, his throat closing at the thought. “No wonder your aura is so weak. Great Mother, she must be starving!” Rising quickly, he walked over to a cupboard where a refrigerator was cleverly hidden. He took out some bread and cheese and handed them to Gallegar. “You mean I must eat something every day?” Kira looked skeptically at the food in Gallegar’s hand. “Yes, you must eat daily. Your body has the same needs as a human’s does.” Danolas turned to Gallegar. “Feed her small bits of these while we decide what to do next.” Gallegar began tearing small pieces off and tucking them into Kira’s mouth. At first she didn’t want to take any of it, but after a while, she was chewing passively as the men talked. “I suggest the joining be done immediately,” Danolas said, as he watched Kira, both in the natural and in the psychic realm. When Kira looked at him questioningly, he explained his concern and Lucas’ decision to go ahead with the joining. 98

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “But I must rest soon,” Gallegar objected. “Don’t we all need to be there to seal the joining?” “I think that could be done tomorrow night once you are awake,” Danolas replied. He looked straight at Gallegar. “I sense your concern, my brother. But she will be safe with him. Remember how you felt as I joined with our Lady. All will be well.” Gallegar ignored the mind-speak as he stared down at Kira. Her face was alight with the knowledge she could join with Lucas. Smiling, she sent a narrow message in mind-speak to him only, telling him of her feelings. “Do not worry for me…my Heart. He will keep me safe until I can be with you again.” Gallegar sighed, defeated by the trust he heard in her voice. He turned to Lucas who stood watching them intently. Unconsciously, he took command. “You will take her with you this night. You need privacy for the joining, so you can do so at your home. We can hear if there are any problems once you are joined, but until then, we can focus only on Kira.” Lucas nodded gravely. “I will keep her safe.” His eyes met Gallegar’s and were steady on his. After a moment, Gallegar nodded, remembering their earlier conversation in front of the fire. He saw they understood each other. “Your vehicle is here?” At Lucas’ affirmative, he rose with Kira still in his arms. “My time grows short. I will carry her to your car then I must be on my way.” He looked at Danolas. “I can’t help them once daylight comes. You will be there if necessary?” “Of course. Try not to worry.” “Can we meet at A Crown of Thorns tomorrow night? We can seal the joining and then you can check Kira’s shielding.” 99

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Of course. At sunset then, my brother. Danolas leaned down and kissed Kira’s soft mouth. “Until tomorrow, my Lady.” He looked at Lucas. “I will work on a spell for you.” “Thanks.” Lucas turned to follow Gallegar out. The other two vampires showed great relief to see their Master, and Lucas wondered just how close Gallegar was cutting it before dawn. Noah loped off to get Gallegar’s car, as his Master gently stowed Kira in Lucas’ front seat. “Give us a moment, Lucas…please,” Gallegar requested. The wolfman frowned, but walked away from the car. Gallegar took Kira in his arms and placed a hard kiss on her unresisting mouth. “We haven’t had any time alone together.” “No, only when we joined.” Gallegar gently ran a finger up her soft cheek. “I have not been able to tell you what is in my heart.” He pressed a soft kiss to the corner of her mouth. “We hinted at love, but I want you to hear me say it. I love you, A Ghra…” Tears flowed from Kira’s eyes at his admission. “And I love you, my Heart. I do not understand how I can love you so much…so quickly.” Gallegar’s chest tightened as she returned his words of love. He was a little shocked at the strength of what he was feeling. “I have loved you in my dreams for over a century.” Kira touched his chest where his new heart beat strongly. “My heart is in very good hands. I do not know how I came to love you so fast. All I know is that I do.” “Like the others?” She heard the vulnerability in his voice, and kissed him. “I love each of you…yes, but you…you have my heart, Gallegar. No one else ever will.” Gallegar couldn’t say anything. His throat had closed up tight. He touched his forehead to hers. He saw his car pull up 100

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining behind him. “I didn’t know it would be so hard to part from you…come the dawn.” “You must go. You must be safe. I will miss you.” She kissed him again and then gently pushed him out of the car. Noah was waiting, and Gallegar slipped into the black Mercedes. After giving a last wave, the car raced out of the parking lot toward home. Lucas realized suddenly they were alone for the first time. Having the other men around kept him on edge, but now he didn’t know what to say or do. He watched as Kira surreptitiously wiped the tears from her face. He took her chin and pulled it around so she faced him. Her eyes were large and bruised looking. “You okay?” he asked. She nodded. “I am just tired. But very happy you are here with me.” That made Lucas smile as he started up the car. “Why don’t we head home and I’ll fix you a big breakfast. Give you a little more strength for what will come next.” “I think I am hungry,” Kira said, surprise in her voice. “I didn’t know I was until now.” She watched as he expertly pulled out onto the road. Traffic was just beginning to pick up as dawn’s pale fingers flicked away the night sky. She was quiet then, her mind following another’s passage. Long minutes later, she finally felt when Gallegar was safely inside Sanctuary. She let out a relieved sigh that caused Lucas to glance over at her. “Gallegar is safe.” She smiled. Lucas pondered that for a moment before asking, “Will we be able to do that? You know…track each other’s comings and goings.” “Yes…if you wish.” “You can feel Danolas too?” 101

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira closed her eyes and stretched her mind out to Danolas. He was sitting in his office with a crystal glass of liquid in his hand. He looked up when he felt her presence, smiled, then blew her a kiss. “Yes,” Kira giggled. “He is having a drink before going to bed.” She looked over at Lucas, her smile fading. “Are you afraid of joining with me, Lucas?” Lucas grimaced, as he pulled into the driveway of an apartment complex. He didn’t answer immediately. He pulled into his parking space and shut off the car. “I’m not as afraid of joining with you like I was after you left the club.” Kira knew he was referring to her use of the Death Words over him. He went on. “What I am afraid of is Elijah finding out, and doing us all harm. But the alternative is worse, so I chose to join. I care about you. I can’t let anyone hurt you.” Kira smiled at him, and leaning over, wrapped her arms around his trim waist. “I am so glad,” she whispered. “I did not want to go on without you.” “Keep that thought, honey,” Lucas said hoarsely, as he pulled away to open his door. Getting out, he reached his powerful arms inside and lifted her from the car. “Do none of you think I can walk?” Kira asked, as he carried her up a flight of stairs and down a long hallway. “Honey,” he drawled. “It isn’t we don’t think you can. It’s just we don’t want you to. You feel too damn good in our arms.” She laughed and snuggled against him. Soon she was standing inside Lucas’ apartment. The living room was painted a deep cream color and was decorated in animal prints from around the world. The sofa and loveseat were rich leather, and plants were set here and there on the hardwood floors. It was tidy looking, as if Lucas was hardly there to mess it up. Large windows looked out over a courtyard with a 102

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining swimming pool. Kira could see someone doing laps, ignoring the early morning chill. “Why don’t you go take a shower while I make breakfast?” Lucas spoke from directly behind her and Kira couldn’t help but jump. Lucas snickered, and in retaliation Kira smacked his arm. “That’s gonna cost you some bacon.” He grinned at her. “Come on. Let me show you the bathroom.” He led her down the hall and into the bedroom. Masculine looking in rich browns and greens, it looked more lived in, with clothes strewn here and there. A huge king-size bed took up most of the room. He opened the door to the bathroom. “There are fresh towels in the closet, and you’re welcome to use anything in there you need.” “Clothes.” “What?” “I need something to wear after I bathe. I left my backpack with Gallegar.” “Oh.” Lucas thought quickly, then opening a dresser drawer, rummaged through it until he found an oversized T-shirt he wore when exercising. “Will this do?” Kira took it from him and held it against herself. The hem went to below her knees. “Yes,” she said. “This will do fine.” Reaching up, she gave him a kiss on the cheek. “Thank you.” She walked into the bathroom and closed the door. Lucas didn’t move until he heard the shower running. Then he blew out a long breath, and willed his body to cool down. Having her here was every bit as difficult as he had thought it would be. He’d been in a state of semi-arousal ever since Gallegar had seated her in his jeep. The thought of her naked in the shower…well that was almost more than his poor old body could take. He walked out of the room to the kitchen and busied himself with making breakfast. He tried to put his mind in order. 103

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He flinched at the thought that once they were joined, Kira would be able to read his X-rated thoughts. Hell, what am I saying? If everything went as planned, Gallegar would be able to read them too, and he knew that meant trouble. The vampire had made it quite plain he thought Kira belonged to him. Lucas turned the strips of bacon frying nicely in the pan. His stomach growled and he realized he too was hungry. He added a few more pieces. He frowned unseeingly at the stove. God, he was attracted to her. She was beautiful and fearless, yet she had touched a core of protectiveness in him from the moment he had seen her walking toward him. Do I even have a chance with her? Hell, he hadn’t even joined with her yet, and he was already half in love. What will it be like afterward? Carefully he put the drained bacon in the warming tray and began to break some eggs into the pan. While he was waiting, he popped pieces of toast into the toaster. Four days without food. He frowned again and added a few more eggs. She would need the extra. What would this joining be like? He beat the eggs into frothy gold. Sharing my mind? He thought of the emotion in Gallegar’s eyes, as he spoke of feeling his heart beat for the first time. He thought of Danolas, who was thrilled to now be able to see the other realms so clearly. What will Kira do for me? What will I do for her? Lucas heard a sound behind him and turning, he saw Kira standing hesitantly in the doorway. Her hair was damp and wet and it hung down below her hips. The oversize T-shirt did nothing to mask her femininity, but emphasized her long legs, and Lucas felt his mouth go dry as he looked at her. His sharpened senses could smell the fragrance of his shampoo on her skin. He swallowed hard. “Sit down,” he managed. “It’s ready.” 104

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira slipped into the closest chair. She could sense Lucas was uncomfortable with her, but wasn’t quite sure why. She waited as he brought a plate to her. She smiled a thank you up at him, but he backed off quickly. “While you’re eating, I’ll go take a shower. Then maybe you can tell me some of the history I’ve missed…starting with your awakening.” “All right, Lucas.” She swallowed, heavily. “Can I eat now?” Lucas couldn’t help but grin and the tension level dropped. “Sure, honey, I’ll be back in just a bit.” He loped down the hallway out of her sight. Kira realized she was starving. It was all she could do not to shovel in huge mouthfuls. It was so delicious. She had never tasted this type of sustenance before, but if all food was as good as this, she would enjoy being alive. She let her mind drift as she ate, thinking of the sensations she had felt during her two joinings that day. Gallegar…just the thought of him relaxed her. His was a joining of love, of togetherness, of commitment. She knew now she loved him, in a way that made her heart leap and her body warm. Then there was Danolas. His joining was so different. The feelings that enveloped her with him were of a deep mental bonding. They had met on a different plain of existence, and their mental feelings of love and companionship were as strong as those she felt with Gallegar. She loved him too, in a different way. Kira sensed Lucas’ return, just as she was trying to decide if it would be rude to help herself to more food. She turned to ask him, but was struck dumb by what she saw. Her mouth went dry and her mind went blank. He’d showered, and had changed into a pair of gray sweatpants that rode low on his hips. He had thrown a clean shirt 105

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining on, but hadn’t buttoned it. Kira could see his chest was strongly muscled and a fine pelt of fur covered it, tracing its way down to his navel, before disappearing into the sweats. Suddenly, Kira knew why Lucas had been so uncomfortable. He desired her, and may the Power help her, she was attracted to him too. Stunned, she raised her gaze to Lucas’. His eyes were burning with a silver fire that had no part of power. As she watched, his sweat pants began to show his awakening desire. “Turn away, Kira. Now, while I can still let you.” Lucas’ voice was hoarse with need. Slowly, her body shaking, Kira turned back to the table and stared down at her plate. Her mind was filled with confusion. Gallegar’s face rose in her mind and she squeezed her eyes shut, remembering how it felt to lie in his arms. She had felt a strong need there, the burning desire to give herself to him. Is that what this feeling is too? Her hunger disappeared as she tried to think through what she was feeling. Lucas saw desire in her eyes and wanted to reach for her, to drag her to the floor and press himself into her. The only thing that had stopped him was the shock that also filled her eyes. He walked past her and to the stove, painfully aware of his throbbing erection. Thank God he had kept a pair of briefs on under his sweats or he might have really given her an eyeful. He dished himself up a plate of eggs, grabbed the rest of the bacon and toast, and turning, sat down at the table with her. At least the table hid his groin. Lucas looked at her and frowned, as he saw her staring at the table. Her fingers were laced together and she was squeezing them so tight, her knuckles were white. “Hey,” he said softly, catching her attention. Her gaze met his and he saw again the shock warring with the desire. He 106

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining wanted to go to her, but he wasn’t sure if that was a good idea in his present state. “It’s okay, honey.” He grinned ruefully. “Now you know how I feel about you. It’s kind of hard for a man to hide it.” He tried for lightness hoping it would help her. Kira took a deep breath. She watched him carefully. “This has happened to you before?” She saw dark color rise along his cheekbones. “Well, yeah,” he admitted. “You’re a beautiful woman. I wanted you the first time I saw you.” “Because I am beautiful.” “That’s the way it started, earlier this evening. Now…” He shrugged. “Now it’s more than just your looks. You’re a pretty special lady.” “But I do not understand this feeling.” Now it was Kira’s turn to color. Her blush delighted Lucas. He grinned at her, and started eating his food before it got cold. He decided a change of subject was in order. “If you’re finished eating, tell me about yourself. Tell me how you came to be here.” Kira took another deep breath. There was time later to explore her emotions. This feeling she felt for Lucas was interesting, but her heart still longed for Gallegar. He was the one who shared her soul. In a soft voice she related to Lucas how she had awoken alone and she had first met the Power. She told him of the visions she had been given, of how she had been sent to find Gallegar first. She told him of her welcome at his club, and then how they had been helped by the Power to get back on track, when their first meeting had turned to violence. She spoke of how the Power had sent her to him, and then shared her anguish when she had had to leave Lucas behind. She 107

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining ended with his arrival at The Magick Box and what had happened to her there. Lucas finished eating long before she finished her story. He moved down closer to her and, as she spoke, he took her hand in his and stroked it gently. “And most of this all happened to you in less than twelve hours,” he marveled. “It’s no wonder you’re almost dead on your feet. Beautiful, sexy and strong. Hell of a combination.” Kira blushed again. Lucas raised her to her feet, and led her down the hall back to the bedroom. Pulling back the covers, he set her gently on the side of the bed, and then knelt before her. “Nothing will happen you don’t want, honey.” He leaned forward and kissed her gently on the lips. “Join with me, Kira. Make me part of you.” Kira stared at him. Her breath came quickly from between her lips. “Hold me,” she quavered. “Please, just hold me.” Lucas leaned forward and wrapped his arms around her quivering body. She was cool to the touch. Without releasing her, he lifted her and set her back on the pillow of his bed, then covered her with the down comforter. “Do not leave me.” Kira caught his hand as he started to straighten up. “Easy, honey. I’m just coming around to the other side.” He crawled in beside her, and took her back in his arms. Her skin warmed with the contact of his, and she snuggled down against him, releasing her power as she did so. Lucas felt his body begin a slow burn. He began to feel her power move around him. Like a huge cat, it slipped against his back and through his legs, up his neck and around his head. He began to breathe heavily as the power touched every part of him. It caressed him like a lover, smoothing itself over his shoulders 108

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining and down his flat stomach. When it curled around his groin, he groaned in pleasure. She pressed against him, but his limbs were heavy…unusable. All he could do was keep his arms wrapped around her and hang on for the ride. The power entered him, steadily growing with small bursts of sensation inside his sweating body. It was everywhere. Explosions of feeling rocked through him. He moaned her name and heard her respond with his own. Unable to prevent it, his own power burst from his skin. He could feel parts of himself changing. Kira sensed her power leave her. It grew hot, and stroked its way over the man holding her. She felt him grow warm, and her T-shirt was dampened by the sweat that broke out on his body. He held her tightly, and groaned as her power made him shiver in reaction. Her power called to his and, without warning, his rushed out at her in an explosion of need. It punched through her with the strength of a hurricane. It caught her up, tumbled her and threw her back against Lucas. She heard him moan her name and couldn’t help but answer him with his own, as she felt Lucas’ beast catch her and envelop her in its own heat. She felt him change. His body grew hairier. He growled deep in his throat as his fingers and toes grew claws. She wasn’t disgusted by the change, but excited. She felt wild, feral, as she drew back out of his arms and knelt beside him…watching. Lucas was out of control. In the few times he had shifted since being transformed, he had been careful to hold himself back. Now, in the embrace of Kira’s power, he was helpless to do anything but feel. He felt her draw away from him, and was hit with a pain so agonizing he nearly howled in disbelief. She is turning from me! 109

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He pushed himself up off the bed, and grabbed her by the arms. He couldn’t let her go. Even though she may hate what he was…he had to finish the joining. “No,” he growled gutturally. “Don’t leave me. Please, Kira. I need you.” Without a word, Kira pressed herself against him. He gasped in shock as she began raining kisses on his face, all the while murmuring to him. “I am not going anywhere, my wolf. I love what is happening to you. I want to see it, to experience it with you, to feel your power against me while you change. You are the one who is beautiful. You are the one who is special. Why do you feel you are not a true man? You are what I need. Know this. Reach into my head. Know the truth. You must accept yourself, as I accept you.” Lucas was staggered. He did as she asked, and sent his power into her mind, desperate to know the truth. Her love and acceptance shone like a beacon to a lost man. He collapsed back down on the bed, dragging her beneath him. She wrapped her arms around him and soothed his back with her hands as she held him. The full truth of Lucas’ selfhatred came to her. Lucas was not a werewolf by bloodline. He had been bitten by a rogue shapeshifter, while out exploring the woods with friends. When the next full moon came and he shifted into the creature, he had known a despair that had almost swamped him. If he had known how to kill himself, he would have. It had taken him six long years to get to the point where he could actively be a part of the shapeshifter community. But he had never truly accepted what had happened to him. He had wanted to be normal again. Lucas, for the first time saw himself as unique. A creature of strength and stamina. One with special abilities that far 110

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining outshone a normal human man. Through Kira’s lovely golden eyes, he saw himself as a handsome and strong supernatural creature. For the first time, he was glad to be what he was. His tears fell against her breasts as he wept. The power and heat of their joining swirled around them, and she felt his halfchanged body hard against her. She concentrated…blanketing him with the power of acceptance. Giving him a purpose he had never known before. She was the reason he had been changed. She was his purpose for living. Lucas felt her power change. Heard the answers he hadn’t even known his heart was asking. He was for her. She was for him. A purpose, a passion. A reason for existence. He raised himself up off of her. His silver eyes glowed with his power. Her gold eyes glowed with her own. He knew it was time to finish it, and transform their separate powers into one. Gently, he pulled her T-shirt off one shoulder exposing the top of her left breast. He lifted his clawed hand and rested it on her. He looked down at Kira, his new love for her written all over his face. “The marking of a mate by a male shapeshifter. This will be your brand.” His words were almost formal. “Do you accept this?” Kira’s face shone. “I accept you,” she said, emphasizing the pronoun. “I am for you, Lucas Kane. You are for me.” Lucas smiled and touched his claws to her breast, but Kira stopped him. “Where?”

111

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 7 Immediately he understood, and taking her hand, guided it under the waistband of his sweatpants, to high up between his hard thighs. He felt her hesitation as her hand brushed against his erection. “A secret place,” he muttered his eyes intense with need and emotion. “One very rarely seen.” Their eyes met, and Kira spoke the words the Power placed in her heart. “I give you purpose. You give me passion. Together we give meaning to our existence.” Lucas kissed her naked breast without moving his eyes from hers. “You give me purpose. I give you passion. Together we give meaning to our existence.” Together, they released their power. Using his sharp claws, Lucas raked them down into her breast. The blood power of his beast rose up in him, but Kira’s gentle power soothed it, turning it and sharing it with her own. Kira clamped her hand down on the soft flesh of Lucas’ inner thigh and her power burned into him. As the pain overwhelmed them both, Kira screamed and Lucas growled through his teeth. Their shared power instantly transformed itself into something greater. It burst up out of them and covered the room in a heavy blanket of acceptance and love. 112

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas felt his heart pounding in his chest. Under him he could feel Kira’s heart beating just as ferociously. Carefully, he removed his claws from her breast and bending, gently licked the blood from her wound. He felt his body returning to human, and heard Kira sigh. His new awareness of her knew it was a sigh of disappointment he had changed, and the warmth of her acceptance blossomed anew inside of him. He reached down to remove her hand from his thigh, and was surprised when Kira stopped him. “Let me do the healing spell first.” She whispered the words quickly over him, and then kissing her fingers put them back on his thigh for a swift touch. His thigh stopped hurting immediately. “Now you…” He rolled off of her. He laid a powerful hand over the still bleeding wound and watching her face to make sure he got the words correct, spelled her pain away. A perfect set of claw marks remained. Early morning light filled the room when Lucas staggered to his feet to pull the drapes closed. He climbed back into the bed and held Kira against his chest. “This okay, honey?” he asked, stifling a yawn. “Perfect,” she yawned drowsily. “It’s okay we sleep together? I’m not enough of a gentleman to sleep on the floor.” “It is fine.” Her voice was thick with sleep. He bent down and kissed her parted lips. “Sleep well, honey. Don’t worry about anything. I’ll keep you safe.” She was already gone. Her last act before drifting off was to touch Gallegar’s consciousness. **** Gallegar awoke and followed the sleepy touch back to Kira. He sensed the couple sleeping together in the bed. Sensed the 113

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining joining was complete. He felt Lucas’ male satisfaction, but when he touched Kira, he felt only her thoughts of him. He smiled. Another man may be holding her body, but he still held her heart. **** Long hours later, Lucas was awakened by the shrill ringing of the telephone. He lifted bleary eyes to the clock and saw it was just a little after one in the afternoon. Kira stirred beside him, warm and soft. He grabbed the offending phone, his voice rough with sleep as he answered. “What?” “Hey there, Lucas.” It was Joseph at the club. “What the hell do you want?” Lucas wasn’t happy about being woken. “Hey, man. The boss wants to know why you’re not here giving him a report.” “Tell him it’s because I am sleeping. I didn’t go to bed until eight this morning. If he wants me coherent, I’ve gotta get some sleep. Tell him I’ll be in by five. I can give him a report, check out the club and then head back out to check on the woman.” Lucas looked down at…the woman and grinned. “The club’s fine,” Joseph said hotly. “I got it under control.” “Good,” yawned Lucas. “Then you won’t mind me checking things out.” Lucas hung up the phone and rolled over toward Kira. He pulled her back into his arms and immediately fell back into a deep sleep. The next time he was awokened, it was Danolas on the phone. Kira stirred and stretched next to him, and Lucas felt his body heat rise. “I sensed the joining went well,” Danolas said cheerfully. Lucas dragged his thoughts back to the phone call. “What?”

114

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I wanted to let you sleep as late as possible. I know you have to be to The Howling by five. I thought I could come over and cover you with a protection spell before you leave.” “How did you know all that?” “Your mind is open to me, my friend.” Lucas grunted. “When will you get here?” He watched Kira’s eyes blink open. When they met his, she blushed. “I can be there in half an hour.” “All right,” he yawned. “See ya then.” He propped himself up on one elbow and peered down into Kira’s rosy face. Good morning, honey.” He brushed a kiss across her lips. “Sleep well?” She nodded. “Yes, this bed is very comfortable.” He grinned. “You mean my shoulder is very comfortable.” She blushed again. He knew he could tease her some more, but he felt too good this morning. “I gotta get up. Danolas is coming over.” Kira sat up in bed. The T-shirt was still off one shoulder, but her breast was covered. Lucas looked away before he could think any disturbing thoughts. My mind is wide open, huh? He’d have to learn to shield and fast. “He has a spell to protect you?” “He says so.” He slid out of bed and stretched, watching her reaction through narrowed eyes. He saw her gulp and then look quickly away and he smothered a grin. If she was looking at him that way, he might be able to use it to his advantage. Maybe Gallegar didn’t have it as wrapped up as he thought he did. “I am gonna jump in the shower to wake up. Can you make me some coffee?” He saw Kira’s blank look and just let the grin spread. “Never mind, honey. I’ll show you how another time.” Whistling, he walked into the bathroom and shut the door. 115

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira didn’t wait for the shower to start. She was feeling slightly uncomfortable being in Lucas’ bed. She ran from the room and made her way into the kitchen. Splashing her face with cold water from the sink, she looked through Lucas’ kitchen drawers trying to find the instructions for the coffee maker sitting on the counter. She was so busy looking she didn’t even hear him come into the room behind her. He folded his long arms around her, making her jump, and him chuckle. “Here, Kira, watch me this time.” Lucas pulled out the coffee fixings and started a pot. Kira nodded, as he explained the workings. Very soon, the heady smell of coffee was perfuming the air. Lucas went back into the bedroom to finish dressing as Kira waited, sniffing the air. When the doorbell rang, Kira moved to get it, but Lucas beat her to it. “Can’t take any chances, honey.” He motioned her back into the bedroom. “It is all right, Lucas. Open your mind. Danolas waits without.” Lucas tried it and, in his mind’s eye, saw the witch outside his door, rocking back and forth on his heels waiting. Rather than dressing in his white robe, tonight Danolas wore a pair of white linen pants topped by a white tunic and jacket. His hair was worn loose and flowing, but he still carried his staff of power. “That’s a neat trick,” Lucas commented to her as he opened the door. Danolas came in, his eyes lingering appreciatively on Kira’s long legs. Lucas scowled. “Go get my robe from the chair in my room,” he growled, as he went to pour himself a cup of coffee. Danolas grinned at his back as he followed Lucas. 116

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining She blinked at him, but obeyed. The robe was too long, but it covered her. Seeing her walk back into the kitchen, Lucas knew he’d reacted foolishly. Looking at Danolas’ amused smile, he saw the witch knew it too. Kira came to him, her hands covered by the arms of the scarlet robe. “Help me…” Roughly, he rolled up the sleeves so Kira would have use of her hands. “Better?” he mumbled, refusing to look at her. Kira looked up at him, worry on her face. “What is wrong, my wolf?” Lucas’ head snapped up at the mind-speak. Seeing the anxiety on her face, he forced the tension from his shoulders. “Nothing,” he said aloud. “I’m just being an ass.” Danolas smirked at him, but didn’t say a word. Maybe the witch was smarter than he looked. Lucas turned to Kira. “Go take your shower, honey. Let Danolas and I work this spell thing.” With a bewildered nod, she disappeared into the bedroom. Lucas handed Danolas a cup of coffee and motioned to where the cream and sugar sat. “Are you all right?” Danolas asked pointedly, as he stirred in a generous helping of sugar. “It’s just going to take a little getting used to, that’s all.” Lucas took a large gulp of coffee, and then cursed as it burned his tongue. “I mean, we share something incredibly intimate with her, but we have no actual claim on her.” “We do have a claim on her, Lucas, just not the one you mean.” “That’s my point, Danolas. What if I want it to be?” Danolas gazed at him. “I don’t know if you have a choice, my friend. Kira has come to us for a reason. I don’t think it’s to pick out a boyfriend, even though she and Gallegar do share something. Give it time. All will work out in the end.” 117

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas snorted. “Is that one of your predictions, High Priest?” “No…just common sense. Think of her as your little sister.” Lucas laughed out loud. “Is that the way you think of her?” Danolas had the grace to look embarrassed. “Well, no. Not completely. But I’m trying. It’s a hell of a lot better than the alternative.” “Which is?” “Hating myself. Hating her. Hating you or Gallegar. None of which will help our Lady in the long run.” Lucas was silent as he digested Danolas’ words. He put his coffee cup into the sink. “I gotta get going. We better do this spell.” Danolas put his coffee cup down as well, and walked over to Lucas. “The spell is a basic protection spell, but I have added a bit of deception to the mix as well. It will ward off any suspicions your leader might have, as long as you are careful. The protection part will come into play only if something goes wrong, and you are discovered.” “What will happen?” “Confusion. It will give you time to cover yourself with a different story or even escape if necessary.” Lucas nodded. “How does it work?” Danolas pulled a small jar of ointment out of his pocket. Opening it, he dabbed a bit on Lucas’ forehead, hands and shoes. “This spell will cover you like a second skin. It will stay active until I remove it.” Lucas watched as Danolas lifted his staff and slowly circled it in front of him. He spoke in words beyond Lucas’ understanding and Lucas closed his eyes as he felt the magick touch his skin. It smoothed up his body and fitted against him like a tight fitting suit. 118

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Look,” Danolas whispered. “Open your eyes and see.” Lucas looked down at himself. Shimmering bands of blue fire covered his entire body. He could see it, but after the first brief tingle, the magick was dormant on his skin. He heard a gasp at the door. Kira stood there, her hair again damp, still dressed in his robe. “It looks like a blue spider web,” she commented in awe, drawing nearer and putting out her hand to feel the magick in the air. The spell flickered slightly at the touch of Kira’s power then lay still again. “Pretty cool, huh?” Danolas grinned as he admired his own work. “Pretty visible.” “Oh, that’s easily taken care of.” With a quick motion of his staff, the spell vanished. “It’s still there,” Danolas assured them, “Just invisible. No one but you will know it exists.” “What about another witch?” Kira asked in concern. “No one but those joined may know of Lucas’ involvement.” “Lucas will know it’s there because he wears it. I will know it’s there because a witch recognizes his own magick. You and Gallegar will know it, because through the joining, we have absorbed some of each other’s talents.” “So he is safe now?” “As safe as I can make him. The rest is up to him.” Danolas looked at Lucas. “As long as you don’t come out and admit what you have done, you should be fine. The spell will cover any hesitations or wordings that may betray you.” Lucas reached out and shook Danolas’ hand. “Thanks,” he said. “I feel better knowing this will help keep us all safe.” He turned to Kira and, taking her by the hand, led her to the hallway. Danolas stayed behind and poured himself another cup of coffee. He sensed it was going to be another long night. 119

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas picked up his jacket from the chair and shrugged it on. He was dressed casually in a pair of black slacks and steel gray turtleneck. Kira couldn’t help but admire him. “You’re looking at me that way again.” He ran a teasing finger down her cheek as she blushed. “You stay with Danolas. He’ll get you over to A Crown of Thorns safely.” “I will, Lucas. Please be careful,” she pleaded with him. “Don’t worry about me, honey. I’ll be fine. I’m not sure what time I’ll get there. Depends on Elijah, but I’ll be there. Count on it.” With that, he wrapped her in his arms and lifting her face to his, kissed her long and slow. “That’s what I wanted to do last night,” he whispered in her ear when he finished. “That and more.” He kissed her again, until she was breathless. **** After closing the door behind Lucas, Kira went to find Danolas. He was standing in the living room and staring out the window, nursing his coffee. He turned when he heard her. “Everything okay with you?” he asked quietly. She stared at him then shook her head. “I do not know what to do. I am so confused. Lucas…” She bit her lip. “I am in love with Gallegar. I was sent to him. I feel I am to belong to him…but Lucas. He makes me feel strange.” Danolas put down his cup and gave her a brotherly hug. “Just be honest with everyone in the middle of it. I know you love each of us, and you know we all love you. What that means will sort itself out.” He pulled back out of her arms and looked down at her searchingly. “You want to go get something to eat? My treat.” The pain retreated a little from her eyes. “You mean in a restaurant?” He grinned. “Yeah, you hungry?” 120

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining She nodded. “Oh, yes. I am very hungry.” “Well, go get some clothes on and we’ll go.” Kira frowned. “Gallegar has my backpack. This is all I could find, and I do not think it is enough. Lucas wishes me to have my legs covered.” She opened her robe, and Danolas saw she was wearing a men’s dress shirt. It was a pale blue gray, but respectable enough since it came down to just mid-thigh. “Lucas doesn’t want anyone else looking at your legs,” he sighed. “I guess I can’t blame him. We are supposed to protect you, even from lascivious looks.” He raised his staff. “Let’s see what I can do.” Muttering an incantation, he pointed his staff at her legs. A second later, she found herself wearing, in addition to the shirt, a pair of white leggings with matching socks and hard soled slippers. “Go find a belt, and the ensemble is complete,” he said, as he watched Kira look at herself in a mirror. She beamed at him and then scampered back into the bedroom. **** Two hours later, fed and satisfied, Kira and Danolas arrived at A Crown of Thorns. They were followed by two of Danolas’ witches, as bodyguards for their high priest, just as Gallegar had done the night before. Supernaturals in authority always had a retinue. It had been dark for about half an hour and, as they walked toward the door, Kira recognized Bruce, the vampire she had confronted the night before. He recognized her too, and his eyes grew wide as she approached him. “Peacekeeper,” he said, bowing his head. He reached behind him to open the door, ignoring the complaints of the waiting crowd. Kira saw his fear and it troubled her. “Does your chest still hurt?” she asked softly, putting a detaining hand on his arm. 121

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He looked at her a little wildly. “I will recover…Peacekeeper.” “Let me help you…please.” Without waiting for permission, Kira spoke the healing spell and touched Bruce’s chest with kissed fingers. “The…the soreness is gone!” The vampire touched his chest in amazement. “I am very sorry I had to hurt you. I hope you understand.” “Yes, Peacekeeper. You belong to the Master now. Your will is ours.” “A Ghra… What are you up to now?” Gallegar’s mind-speech was amused. “What is necessary,” she responded tartly. Danolas chuckled beside her. “Come to me, A Ghra… I am impatient to feel you in my arms.” Kira, Danolas and his entourage walked into the club. Kira headed straight to Gallegar’s office. Danolas watched as the vampires in the club all turned to get a good look at The Peacekeeper. He could sense their awe. It looked like Gallegar had wasted no time cultivating their fear of Kira. Or, it could be partly the fact power surrounded Kira wherever she was. Any supernatural being could sense it. Just before they reached the office door, it flew open and Gallegar stepped out. Without pausing, he strode to Kira and swept her into his arms. “A Ghra… Never has the day seemed so long.” “I missed you too.” Kira’s words were muffled, as she pressed her face against his chest. Transferring Kira to one arm, Gallegar took Danolas’ hand in his. “Good evening, my brother. I trust your day has gone well.”

122

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas gave a crooked smile. “Oh, it’s been interesting all right. Let’s go inside and I’ll tell you about it.” He turned and gave his bodyguards instructions to wait outside in the club. Once the three of them were inside the office, Gallegar turned to them both. “You have eaten I trust?” Kira smiled, and her eyes shone. “Oh, yes. Danolas took me to a restaurant, and I ate steak and po...ta…to.” Gallegar chuckled at her obvious pleasure. “You are enjoying these new foods, eh?” “I had ice cream for dessert… something called choc…olate.” “And she ate every bit!” Danolas said dryly. “And part of mine as well.” Gallegar laughed again as he drew Kira down on the couch next to him, while Danolas walked over to examine one of the landscapes on the wall. Kira looked at Gallegar thoughtfully. “Did you eat already?” Gallegar tilted his chin and his voice was arrogant. “I am the Vampire King. There are many who offer themselves to me.” “Humans know of you?” “Some do. Those…whose mind are open and are not afraid.” “I thought people would be afraid of vampires.” “There are good vampires and bad vampires, just as there are in any race.” Danolas interjected from where he was standing, studying Gallegar’s art, “If you were a bad human and you were changed, you usually wind up being a bad vamp too.” “So they are the one’s responsible for the fear humans have of you?” Gallegar nodded gravely. “As their king, I control my flock’s will, but every so often, a vampire turns rogue and breaks free of my control.” 123

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Your power is so strong.” Kira was amazed. “How do they break free?” Gallegar shrugged. “It is believed rogues become infected with a sickness that breaks the bond between master and servant.” “Gallegar, where was this picture painted?” Danolas asked, changing the subject. Gallegar rose and joined him where he stood in front of a painting of rolling green hills and a pristine blue river. “This was painted near the river Shannon, in Westmeath, Ireland.” “I thought I recognized it. I visited Dunguaire Castle as an acolyte. Received my first wand from an Irish witch by the name of Aebh.” “There is much magick in the hills of The Shannon. Many witches live in the area. It is said the magick of the earth empowers their own.” Danolas nodded. “I felt it there. It was hard to leave, but I knew my destiny was here.” He turned and looked at Kira, who was listening interestedly to them. “And there my destiny sits.” Gallegar smiled. “When did you leave Ireland, my Heart?” “I commissioned a private ship for my own safety then immigrated here in 1875. I have been back several times.” He walked back to Kira and brought her hand to his lips in a courtly gesture. “Perhaps next time I can take you with me. I can show you where I grew up.” Kira dimpled at him, and Gallegar felt his body stir. Forgetting Danolas’ presence, he bent to take her in his arms. He pulled her up from the couch and was about to press his lips to hers when she stiffened. “Lucas is here and speaking to me.” 124

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Hey! If you want me to join the party, you better tell your guards to let me in. I can’t get by Butch out here! What…oh sorry, his name is Bruce.” Kira giggled and told Gallegar what was happening. Rolling his eyes, Gallegar sent the mental command to allow Lucas entrance. They all could now sense Lucas as he made his way into the club and through the dining area. There was something wrong. “What troubles you, my wolf?” Kira mind-spoke him softly. “I’m bringing company.” Lucas growled, his mind’s voice angry. “Elijah thought I might need some back-up.” Kira quickly explained the problem to Danolas and Gallegar. “We’ll be waiting,” Gallegar answered, his own voice quiet, yet menacing. “What do we do?” Kira bit her lip nervously as she looked up at the vampire. “They cannot know what we do here or Lucas…or we all are in danger.” “Calm yourself, A Ghra…” He touched his finger to her lip so she would quit biting it. Danolas walked over and stood near Kira and Gallegar. “We’ll find a way to get rid of them. Let’s just see what happens.” There was a knock on the door and Gallegar called for them to enter. Lucas walked into the room with a scowl on his face, followed closely by two other shapeshifters. One was tall and blond, the other average-sized and brown-haired. Both wore cocky expressions on their faces. Kira subtly tested their power. Neither was in the same category as Lucas. Not even if they were to combine their powers. 125

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Who are you?” Danolas asked, with just the right air of condescending in his voice. “You were not invited here.” Lucas answered for them. “My Clan Leader felt it necessary to send someone to watch out for me. He is concerned about my well-being.” “He is afraid I will hurt you?” Kira was aghast. She began to get angry. “That’s it!” Danolas mind-spoke excitedly. “Get angry.” “What…” Kira didn’t understand. “A good idea, Danolas. Scare them, A Ghra...” Kira looked at Lucas, who now walked over and stood near her. “I tried to tell him you wouldn’t like it, but he didn’t listen.” “Scare the shapeshifters, my Lady. Use your powers. Make them see they don’t belong here.” Kira finally understood. She hid a smile as she turned to the shapeshifters who stood solidly by the door. She gathered herself to put on a show. “You must leave.” Her tone was firm. The blond man just smirked at her. “The boss says we’re to stay, so we stay.” “Yeah,” the second shapeshifter chimed in. “We’re here to protect him.” Kira stalked closer to the two men and smiled chillingly. The cocky look dropped off their faces. “You think you could stop me if I decided to do anything?” Kira laughed, and the sound slithered along the shapeshifter’s spines. “You do not even have the power between you to slow me down. I am Peacekeeper. Were you not at The Howling last evening? Did you not see what I can do to one of your kind?” “We were doing errands for the boss. We didn’t see anything.” The timbre of the shapeshifter’s voice revealed that even if he hadn’t seen it, he had heard about it. 126

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The brown-haired man wet his lips nervously. “We’re just following orders. You can’t do anything to us, bitch!” The room was suddenly filled by a roar of angry power as a vampire, a witch, and a master shapeshifter reacted to the boastful words. “You dare!” hissed Gallegar. His eyes gleamed a deep fiery green—his power reached out to encircle their throats. He began to squeeze. Danolas raised his staff over his head and a wind blew through the room, knocking them off balance. Lucas wanted to leap on them, but remembered his place at the last minute. He swallowed down his rage and contented himself with a soft growl. Kira walked a pace closer. “You are both fools. You stand against a Vampire King and a High Priest Witch. I know the Words of Death over you. Do you court your own doom so easily?” The blond man retreated toward the door, but didn’t give up completely. “We’re not supposed to leave Lucas alone.” The words were hoarse as he tried to speak around Gallegar’s choking grasp. Kira kept walking, until both men had their backs pressed against the wall. “He has been chosen to be here. Your leader may not countenance our joining, but I still wish Lucas’ presence. You, on the other hand, are not necessary, nor welcome. Leave now, while I still allow it.” Kira allowed a bit of her power to swirl, making her hair rise and whip around her. Her eyes glowed a molten gold. The two men began to shake, their mouths slack with fear. Lucas cleared his throat. “Maybe we should rethink this. Thomas…Peter, why don’t you go back to Elijah and tell him of The Peacekeeper’s objections? Since she wants me here, I don’t 127

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining think she’ll do anything to me. We’ll regroup tomorrow and see what needs to be done.” The werewolves glanced at each other then back at Lucas. Kira saw their hesitation. “Perhaps a demonstration of my power is necessary.” She smiled coldly and stretched out a slim hand toward them. “Ohbed ockt no veil Shabot…” “Get out of here, guys!” Lucas shouted urgently. “Don’t let her touch you.” Just the words themselves sent a chill down his spine, as he remembered the pain. The men must have seen something in his eyes, for they gave up the fight, pulled the door open and ran for their lives. Danolas used his magick to slam the door shut behind them. “A bit theatrical, but it works.” His grin spread over his face. Kira immediately went to Lucas and put her arms around him. “We were just trying to scare them. I couldn’t mind-speak you quickly enough.” Lucas wiped the back of his hand against his sweaty brow. “I kinda got that by the end. Just hearing those words though…” He couldn’t suppress a shiver. “When you link with Gallegar and Danolas, you can hear their mind-speech as well. No more guessing,” she comforted him. Lucas snorted softly. “Yeah, well…it’s a good thing I’m beginning to trust you guys, otherwise I might have run with my fellow wolves.” Gallegar offered him his hand. “Welcome, my friend. I sense the joining went well last night.” Color stained Lucas’ rough-hewn jaw as he glanced at Kira. “Yeah, it went great.” He looked at Gallegar and Danolas, his silver eyes embarrassed. “Look…I hear I wasn’t too good with my shielding. Sorry if I disturbed you.” 128

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar shook his head. “I was resting, Lucas. You didn’t disturb me.” He looked at Kira. “However I did feel your touch as you wished me good night.” His mouth curved in a secret smile. Kira smiled back at him, her eyes warm. “I followed some of it on the psychic plain,” Danolas interjected, when he saw Lucas begin to frown. “But it was just the emotions. The feelings of the joining, not the details.” He added this quickly as Lucas turned to him with narrowed eyes. “So I’ll be able to feel your thoughts as well as Kira’s once we link together?” “I have found we can shield some things from each other. But if we wish, yes, we will sense each other and be able to mind-speak directly. We also seem to absorb some of each other’s magicks.” “I’ll be able to do some magick and have the powers of a vampire as well.” He looked at Gallegar. “And you will have my strength as a shapeshifter. “Among your other powers,” Gallegar agreed. “Many you are just coming into, Master Shapeshifter.” Lucas raised his eyebrows. “I don’t know what other powers you’re speaking about, but I’ll take your word for it.” He turned to Kira. “A moment in private, if I could?” Kira’s eyes widened. After a brief glance at the other two, she led Lucas over to the opposite side of the room. “What is it, my wolf?” “Everything happened so fast this morning I didn’t have time to do this.” He dug in his pocket. “Do what? I do not understand.” “I saw you wear Gallegar’s ring. And that crystal at your throat carries the smell of Danolas’ magick. I figured they were gifts from them…for the joining.” “They were,” Kira admitted, “but that doesn’t mean…” 129

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas held up his hand. “I know I don’t have to, but I want to. It’s not much…” his voice trailed off. Kira grabbed his hand. “Whatever it is, I will cherish it. You know that.” “Then here…roll up your sleeve. Nice shirt by the way.” Kira smiled as she helped Lucas roll up the sleeve of the shirt she had borrowed from him. “I will be very careful of it. I had no other clothing.” “Honey, everything I have is yours. You look a hell of a lot better in it than I do.” He strapped something on her outstretched arm. “Lucas, what is it?” Kira stared at the intricate band he had placed on her right upper arm. It was made with various colors of dark and light, all woven together to form an exquisite pattern. It clung to her like a second skin. “When one of my people changes for the first time, the others in our immediate clan comb our hair as part of the ritual. It is a way of learning each other’s scent. Of finding our place in the pack.” “This is made of your hair? The hair when you changed?” Kira’s voice was awed. Lucas nodded. “Yes. The hair is taken by our clan’s oldest female and woven into a band in memory of our first shapeshift.” “And you want me to have it?” “Yeah, you’re the closest thing I have to family now.” He raised her hand to his lips, but kissed the soft inner skin on her wrist instead. “It is tradition.”

130

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 8 Kira smiled at him. Her eyes glowed and her pulse jumped a bit after his kiss. “I accept it with love, my wolf.” She turned her arm this way and that, looking at the beauty of the design. “It has a spell in it to keep it on you at all times, but if you want, I can remove the spell so you can take it off whenever you want.” “No!” Kira’s voice was sure. “This is now a part of me…as you are.” Lucas grinned at her in satisfaction. He took his time rolling down her shirt sleeve. He enjoyed touching her. “Well, I guess we better get back over there. I guess it’s time to link up with the others.” He turned to the other men who were standing silently waiting for them. “I’m ready, guys. What do we do?” Kira took him by the hand and led him over to the couch. The other men followed. “You saw the linking last night. The same must be done with you.” Ruddy color filled Lucas’ cheeks again. “They have to touch my brand?” He groaned at Kira’s nod. Gallegar and Danolas looked questioningly at each other, but began to smile as they read in Kira’s mind where she had put the mark. “Honey, don’t tell me I have to drop my pants.” Lucas was horrified. 131

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I am sorry, my wolf. There must be skin to skin contact, as with the joining.” He swore roundly, making Kira’s eyes widen and the other men burst into laughter. “Easy for you to laugh. Your brands are in plain sight. Son of a bitch!” Lucas shook his head as he saw there was no other way around this. “Damn it…let’s get it over with.” Without another word, he unbuckled his belt and shucked his pants. They fell in a pool around his ankles. “That door better be locked!” Danolas grinned then spoke a couple of words. The lock clicked soundly behind them. Kira and Lucas sat on the couch, while Danolas and Gallegar sat on the low table before them. “Do you remember the ceremony?” Kira asked them. Gallegar unbuttoned his black silk shirt and she unbuttoned hers as well. Carefully she pulled it apart so all could see the brand on her breast. A perfect set of claw marks, already healed. Gallegar and Danolas looked solemnly at it and nodded. Danolas gestured around the circle. “Can we do this all at once?” Kira considered that. “Yes, you may both put your hands on his thigh. He can touch your brands at the same time.” Trying not to flush themselves, Gallegar and Danolas put their hands over the brand on Lucas’ inner thigh. Lucas, his face dark with discomfiture, put his hands on Gallegar’s chest and Danolas’ forehead. “Speak the words. Feel the power.” Gallegar started, his gaze locked on Lucas. “She has given me her heart. I have given her my life. Together, in eternity, forever.” Lucas felt the vampire’s power wash over him. It was cool and lit with green fire. It crept into his soul. 132

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “She has given me sight. I have given her my understanding. Together we will see the future.” Danolas’ words mixed with his magick. They were bright and colorful, like the woods after a spring rain. Breathing deeply, Lucas added his own. “She has given me purpose. I have given her my passion. Together we give meaning to our existence.” Kira’s power moved over them like a golden blanket. It twirled their powers into one. Then like a blow, it snapped, shooting into each of them, an awareness of the others. The four of them shuddered from the impact, reeling a moment before they could get their bearings and sit upright again. Lucas’ eyes slowly opened and focused on Gallegar, who sat quietly in front of him. For a moment, their emotions were unmistakable to each other. Each knew the clear truth of the other’s feelings for Kira. Both saw the mute challenge in the other’s eyes. “Whew!” Danolas removed his hand from Lucas’ brand. “It may be inconvenient, but your brand is in the right place. Passion and all that.” Lucas grimaced then pulled up his pants and quickly fastened them. “I am just glad it’s over.” “Let us hope so…” Gallegar watched Kira. She swayed slightly like she was in a trance, her eyes dreamy. He leaned over and buttoned up her shirt, then did the same to his own. Lucas pulled her gently back, so she could lean against the back of the couch. He took her hand in his, grinning to himself. Now he understood why Gallegar wanted to put her on his lap all the time. Anything to be close to her. Gallegar watched him, his face impassive, then turned to Danolas. “You were going to tell us about your day…before Lucas got here.” 133

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas stretched, unkinking his neck. “It’s been a tough one.” He looked at Kira, then back at the other two men. “I called my council together today. I told them about our Lady, and what she proposed to me.” He grimaced as he remembered the look on some of the faces. “They were not pleased to know about the Words of Death. Some felt she should be destroyed so she wouldn’t endanger the Society.” “Where have I heard that before?” Kira murmured, sending a coy glance Gallegar’s way. “A Ghra… you are still here, are you not?” was Gallegar’s amused protest. He looked back at Danolas and his look became more serious. “What did you do?” Danolas shrugged. “They are my advisors. I listen to their council and then make a decision. In this case, the decision was already made. Some were not happy, but I am High Priest. My powers are stronger than any of the others, even combined. They will obey me.” Gallegar smiled slowly. “My flock has also been told of The Peacekeeper. I have marked her as mine. They will give me no problems. They all know the penalty for disobedience.” Danolas toasted him with his staff. “The benefits of a dictatorship.” He looked at Lucas. “And what happened with Elijah, other than the obvious.” “He was very interested in all that went on last night. Especially learning a High Witch was in the mix.” Lucas frowned. “It didn’t seem to worry him much though. I am beginning to think my leader is too overconfident for the clan’s good.” “Elijah has always been arrogant, my friend. It is just you are seeing him with different eyes. With those of an equal, rather than a hireling.” Gallegar looked thoughtful. “I had hoped this news might make him more amenable to your joining, but …” 134

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Nope,” Lucas stated grimly. “He is just as stubborn as he was last night. We did the right thing by joining anyway. I don’t think he will ever allow it. He had too many concerns.” “Speaking of which,” Danolas changed the subject. “We have another concern we need to think about.” He held all their interest for a moment. “Where does our Lady go tonight, when we are finished here? She must be kept safe.” “That is easily taken care of.” Gallegar’s tone brooked no argument. “Kira will come with me to Sanctuary. No one can get in. She will be completely safe.” “Are you crazy?” Lucas was appalled at the thought. “You want her to spend all day underground? She’s not dead. She did fine last night at my apartment. She can go there again.” “Your apartment is not secure!” Gallegar’s voice rose slightly. “We would have no way of keeping her safe.” “I kept her safe all day today. Something you couldn’t do!” Danolas jumped in, worried Gallegar might do something they all regretted. “Lucas, he’s right. Your apartment would be hard to defend. But, Gallegar…think a minute. Do you really want Kira underground? She needs fresh air and sunlight.” “So what do you suggest, Witch?” Gallegar was none too pleased. “She is welcome at my Keep. It is warded so she would be safe. I could give her a room permanently.” “Here I thought you were being noble. Trying to keep us from arguing,” Lucas accused, jumping to his feet. “But you just want her with you.” Danolas’ lips tightened. “I want to keep her safe and keep her happy. I think the Keep will give her both of those.” “She goes home with me.” Gallegar’s voice was firm. “Not a chance…” 135

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira listened to the men as they argued. She felt distanced from it…like it was someone else they were arguing about. It was like watching a movie through the splashes of a waterfall. Her mind felt thick and tired. Nothing seemed quite in focus. She tensed. Something was wrong. Her power tickled the base of her neck. She blinked her eyes and tried to concentrate, but the air seemed to be so thick it was hard to sense anything. She felt time passing, but she couldn’t tell how much. Shaking her head to clear it, she took a deep breath and carefully gathered her magicks together. The four joined powers that now lived within her came to her aid, smoothly separating the thick air until Kira could once again see clearly. Her eyes widened as she saw a gelatinous mass of black ooze surrounding the three men as they stood shouting at each other. “Stop it!” Kira cried. She stood up and backed away from them, her eyes wide. “Don’t you see what is happening?” Gallegar, Danolas and Lucas all turned and looked at her. Their movements were sluggish. “We know what we’re doing, honey.” Lucas walked toward her, his steps slow and measured…his voice thick. “Just calm down. We’ll take care of you.” Kira shook her head furiously. She grabbed Lucas and dragged him back to the others. “See with eyes of power!” she insisted. With a smack, she put Lucas’ hand on Danolas’ arm then slapped her own on Lucas’ and Gallegar’s. “Use the power. Look and see what is around you.” The power flared and the men gasped as they saw what Kira had seen. “Something horrible has entered this room,” she whispered. “This has the stench of evil. It has taken and blinded you.”

136

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar stared at the black ooze that dripped from his clothing. Even though he couldn’t feel it, the awareness of it made him feel unclean. His eyes, filled with sorrow, met hers. “A Ghra…” Danolas too, was gazing at the ooze with horror on his face. “I should have sensed it attacking us.” He looked at Kira. “Why didn’t I see this coming?” Lucas was trying to wipe the stuff from his clothing. Since it had no substance to it, it was impossible to do. After a few minutes of fruitless motion, he stopped. “We gave it a handle to hold on to,” Danolas said in disgust. “We have allowed this evil to find our Lady.” Lucas was angry with himself too, but practically asked. “Okay, we screwed up. How do we get rid of it?” Kira took hold of Lucas’ and Danolas’ hand. “We are as one now. Our new power should aid us. Join hands and join our powers.” She waited till the others had done so, making a complete circle. She closed her eyes and called to the Power for help. They all felt their powers move as one and rise above the room. It hovered like a cloud, with no hesitation in it at all. Kira turned her face up to the ceiling and waited until the magicks showered down on them in cascading sheets of gold, silver, green and blue. As it touched the black ooze, the evil gave off a keening sound and shrank away from the cleansing. Quickly, flowing like a horrible smoky fog, it retreated from the room. They felt their powers chase it out of the club and into the night, where it disappeared in the darkness of the shadows. Kira gave a great sigh of relief. “It is gone.” Danolas squeezed her hand. “My lady, I am so sorry. This should never have happened. My sight should have warned us the evil was here. I have failed you.” 137

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “We all did,” Lucas said gruffly. “We let our personal feelings get in the way, and now we’ve put you in danger.” Gallegar’s anguish was apparent in his eyes. He sat heavily on the couch and put his face in his hands. Kira sat down next to Gallegar and put her soft hand on his thigh. “None of you have failed me any more than I did you last night when I made mistakes. We defeated this evil by working together.” She looked at Danolas. “You told me last night I should not feel like I had to be perfect. Or that I was in this all alone. That together we would solve the problems that came our way. Do you remember?” Danolas gave a small smile. “Yes, my Lady. I remember. You are throwing my own words back at me. But we are here to protect you.” “We are becoming a power that has never before existed. We do not know how to use it or what the pitfalls are. All we can do is stand together and try.” Kira gazed at each man’s face. “We must understand each other. And we must understand that which comes against us. What was that horrible thing?” “Jealousy, A Ghra… Ugly, primitive, jealousy. We all wanted to be the one you chose to be with.” Gallegar still looked sickened at what they had done. “This joining is filled with unexpected uncertainties.” Danolas rubbed the top of his glowing staff with thoughtful fingers. “To protect Kira and each other, we must be aware of them.” “Yeah, and jealousy is gonna be something we have to fight against. We all feel pretty possessive of you, honey.” Lucas looked chagrined. Gallegar reached over and took Kira’s hand in his. “I think it is more than simple jealousy. This day while I slept, I was extremely restless. My dreams were filled with having you in my 138

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining arms again. When I awoke, a part of me was furious you were not here to greet me. All I could think of was having you by my side. The emotions were stronger than I have ever before felt.” Danolas’ brows came together in deep thought. “What you are describing also happened to me. From the time our Lady left last night, I felt…unsettled. My rest was also broken, and even though I was busy with the council, my thoughts were constantly of the Lady Kira. I had to really concentrate to work the spell for Lucas. Seeing her was all I thought about.” Lucas swallowed. He wasn’t comfortable sharing his emotions. “Yeah, it was that way for me too. I didn’t want to leave her today. And even though your spell kept me safe, I was antsy all afternoon. Like an itch I couldn’t scratch. What the hell’s goin’ on here?” “It must be an effect of the joining,” Danolas theorized. “By joining with Kira, we have become a part of her, and her…a part of us. Perhaps, when we are separated, we feel incomplete.” Gallegar pressed Kira’s hand gently. “Incomplete. That’s a good way to put how I felt today. Like I was missing part of my soul.” “Not your soul, Gallegar…your heart. That is what our Lady gave you. That is what you miss when she is apart from you. Just as I miss my sight and Lucas misses—” “My purpose. So what you’re saying is without Kira around, we aren’t whole?” “It is my best guess.” “Does this mean we are going to have to stay together all the time?” Lucas sounded doubtful. “No offense, Gallegar, but I’m claustrophobic. I ain’t goin’ underground.” Gallegar smiled and gave a short laugh. “No offense taken, my friend. Just as the thought of resting in your exposed apartment does not sit well with me.” 139

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It may be the effect will fade in time. As we become more used to it, we will find separation easier to accept. Let’s face it. Gallegar sleeps during the day, and Lucas and I have to take care of business. We can’t be with Kira all the time. Would the Power have set this up without considering those angles?” Danolas shook his head, his blond mane flying around his face. “I don’t think so. I’ll bet it’s just because the joinings are so fresh in our minds. We are still getting used to the whole thing.” “That doesn’t solve the problem that started this whole thing.” Lucas tried to keep himself composed. “Where does Kira go tonight?” “I will go where the Power sends me,” Kira stated firmly. “And at different times, I will probably stay with each of you. But I do know something.” Her chin lifted. Gallegar knew she was girding herself for battle. It amused him and took the tension out of his shoulders. “What do you know, A Ghra…” “I know I want to learn more about myself. I have only existed as I am for less than a week. I do not even know if I am human or not. But as I see more of your…of my new world, I want to learn about it. Learn my place in it.” Danolas sat down at Kira’s other side. “What does that mean?” Kira took a deep breath. She was pretty sure none of the Chosen would like this idea. “I want a place of my own.” She held up her hand as they all began to protest. “No. Each of you has your own home. I want a place I can call my own. A place I can go when I need to be alone and regroup. All of you have access to my mind, so my privacy is limited. I think I need a place where I do not have to think or feel or worry about those things.” She smiled, almost sadly. “Maybe I just want to feel normal.” 140

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “My Lady!” Danolas sounded horrified. “Have we made you feel abnormal?” Kira smiled larger this time. “Of course not. You treat me like I was precious to you—” “Because you are, A Ghra….” Gallegar interrupted. “What we have together is precious to me too.” Her hand cupped Gallegar’s cheek, and her gaze was soft as she gazed at each of them. “But I need this. If I have a place of my own, there will be no need for jealousy either. All of you will be welcome and have a place there as well.” “It will be harder to keep you safe,” Lucas frowned. “And it may take a few days.” “And what of the cost?” Kira asked shyly. “I have not been in this world long, but I know I will need money. Perhaps I can work in one of your clubs—” “No!” The men all spoke together. Kira’s face showed her surprise at their response. “My Lady…” Danolas’ voice gentled. “There is no need for you to work.” “It wouldn’t be safe,” Lucas put in. Gallegar was more direct. “You belong to us. We will take care of you. No Lady of mine will have to get a job. I have more than enough money to take care of you.” “As do I,” added Danolas. “I am not in their category, honey, but all I got is yours. I already told you that.” “But…but I must do something in return. It is not right otherwise.” Gallegar leaned over and kissed her. “A Ghra… You have offered yourself as Peacekeeper for our people. You will be working for us. You can consider us taking care of you as your salary. Does that sound better?” 141

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked at him with a hint of suspicion on her face. “It almost sounds too good to be true. Too easy.” Lucas laughed. “Honey, there ain’t nothin’ easy about this whole thing. But Gallegar is right. You’re going to work as Peacekeeper. Us payin’ for everything just makes sense.” Kira gazed at them all. “I do not know.” Danolas took her other hand, and brought it to his lips. “My Lady, please. Let us take care of you. It would be our privilege and our joy.” Kira could see the sincerity in their faces. She sighed and gave up. “All right. We will make it so.” She smiled at them, her eyes glowing gold. Lucas got up and began to pace. “We can start looking tomorrow.” He shot a look at Gallegar. “I mean, if that’s okay with you. Danolas and I can do the leg work then we all can take a look once the sun goes down.” Kira saw Lucas was really making an effort to include everyone in the decision making. She flashed him a big smile. “We will need a place with several rooms, so all may be comfortable.” Gallegar gave them all a wry look. “Make sure there is a basement for me.” It made everyone grin and any remaining tension drifted away. Danolas conjured up a pad and pencil and together they made some notes as to the type of house Kira should have. “One of my society is a realtor. I will give her our requirements and she can get us a list of houses to look at.” Danolas tucked the pad away. “And for tonight…” Lucas didn’t want to let go of his concern. “As you are all fond of telling me, all will work out…” Kira’s voice trailed off and she looked across the room intently. The three men followed her gaze but saw…nothing. 142

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Kira…” Gallegar began. “What do you want? Why have you come here?” Kira’s tone was soothing and gentle. She rose from the couch and walked away toward the door. Then she crouched down, like what she was seeing was on the ground. “What the hell is goin’ on?” Lucas rose too, but stayed where he was. “She sent you? What does she want of me now?” “My Lady?” Danolas walked slowly over and bending down, spoke in her ear. “What is it you see?” Kira looked over her shoulder, blinking as if she had just remembered them. “You cannot see him?” She questioned in astonishment. “No, A Ghra…” Gallegar rose also, and stood next to Lucas. “We see nothing. Not even through your mind.” Kira put her hand out in a careful motion. “None of us here will harm you. Do not leave.” She looked back at them again. “He senses your power and is afraid.” “Who is afraid?” Lucas asked sharply, impatience coloring his tone. Kira took a deep breath and asked her power for help. The magick rose inside of her and probed through her mind. It showed her she had been shielding her inner sight from her joined ones. Carefully, she peeled away the covering. For the men, it was like being in a dark room where the light was suddenly turned on. “For once I was blind, but now I can see.” Danolas quoted the Christian scripture in awe. He stared down at the figure huddled in front of Kira. It was a child. A boy, with large blue eyes and a shock of unruly red hair. He was very thin, with bare feet. His costume was that of a boy who had lived many years ago, with knickers instead of pants and a baggy tunic. The boy was staring up at 143

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining them with a look of abject fright on his face, as if he was sure they would do him harm. Danolas dropped to one knee beside Kira and held out his hand to the boy. “We will not hurt you, little one. What do you wish of our Lady?” “What is it?” Lucas asked aside to Gallegar. “It is an Ethereal. A spirit.” “You mean a ghost?” Lucas turned back and watched Kira and Danolas try to communicate with the silent being. “People call it that,” Danolas agreed. “But they don’t like it. They prefer spirit or shade. Their kind is known as the Ethereal.” He stopped his explanation as a picture flooded their minds. “I do not know this place.” Kira smiled at the boy in a friendly way. “I do.” Gallegar joined them, standing behind their crouching figures. He saw the boy’s eyes grow wider. “You need not fear me or my power.” The boy was as still as a rabbit. Whether one is dead or alive, a vampire was scary. “It is a tourist attraction known as The Haunted House. They give guided tours daily and tell ghost stories. I believe it is run by the city.” “How do you know this stuff?” Lucas looked at him in surprise. Gallegar shrugged. “We who are thought to be dead know of each other. They have a leader, as do our people.” Kira stood slowly, as not to scare the boy spirit. “I must go there. He has been sent by the Power as a guide.” “As you will, my Lady. I for one will accompany you. Brothers?” Danolas made it a question. “We can take my car,” was Gallegar’s answer. **** 144

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The child sat—no—maybe hovered was the right word, on Kira’s lap in the front seat. Every so often, he would stare at Gallegar with those huge brown eyes and point the way to turn. Gallegar really didn’t need the help with the directions, as he was quite aware of the location of The Haunted House, but it seemed to give the boy pleasure to help him, so he allowed it. The youngster took pleasure sitting on Kira’s lap too. It made Gallegar wonder if he was remembering his own mother’s lap, long ago. He couldn’t have been more than seven years old when he died. “We’re almost there.” Gallegar looked at Kira. “Just up that hill.” As they turned into the driveway they were confronted by a huge metal gate. It had bars that reached at least ten feet in the air and was topped by sharp spikes. The gate was attached to a wall that seemed to span the length of the property. As they slowed down, the child vanished from Kira’s lap. A few moments later the chain and padlock around the gate begin to move, unlocking itself. “Handy!” was Lucas’ only comment. The gate soon swung open and Gallegar eased the car up the driveway. A second car with Danolas’ two witch protectors, Jorad and Tobias, and Gallegar’s vampire protectors, Noah and Gabriel, followed close behind. The grounds were shadowed, but all could see tall trees and thick bushes that spread in either direction from the driveway. “How big is this place?” Kira’s voice was hushed. “I remember reading it was over one hundred acres,” replied Gallegar. “The house is somewhat maintained, but the grounds have gone wild. Not enough money to do it all.” Kira gasped as they came around the last corner. There, standing before them, was a beautiful old mansion. It had a decrepit air to it, a look of disuse and untidiness, as if the owners just didn’t care any more. 145

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Great ambiance for a haunted house,” Danolas said dryly. “It must have fifty rooms!” Lucas craned his head to look up to the roof. “It’s got a widow’s walk and everything.” “I do not see any spirits, and the little boy has disappeared.” Kira looked back down the road. “I hope he is all right.” “A Ghra… He is an Ethereal. He can come and go at will. Don’t worry for him.” “But he is to be my guide. I do not…oh…” Kira cried out in delight as the child popped into view outside the car door. “There he is!” She opened the car door and followed the boy’s beckoning finger. “Now we are ready.” “Ready for what?” Lucas questioned as the rest of them got out of the car. “Are you sensing anything?” Kira closed her eyes and cocked her head to listen. But after a full minute of waiting, she shook her head. “Nothing. We must need this one yet.” She crouched down again and smiled at the boy. “I cannot keep calling you child or this one. Can you tell me your name?” The boy looked at the ground shyly, rubbing his bare foot in the dirt. He scrunched up his face and after a moment, another picture came to them. A small brown bird with a bright red vest, hopped along the ground. It stopped and cocked its head at them. Kira was charmed. “Your name is Robin, yes?” Robin nodded, and then motioning her to her feet, led her toward the large ornate door of the mansion. The men were close on her heels. “Carefully, honey…we don’t know what’s in there,” Lucas cautioned, coming up on her left. As they climbed the steps, Robin suddenly flung himself in front of Kira and disappeared. His movement surprised Kira, but Lucas reacted instantly, tucking her behind him. 146

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar and Danolas moved up quickly, Gallegar putting a secure hand on Kira’s arm. The men’s protectors stood at the ready. They all stood startled, as two huge Ethereals appeared out of thin air. Both had the menacing look of bouncers and glared at the intruders with hot red eyes. One held Robin in the air by his arm. Robin was kicking and struggling, and even though he was silent, his mouth was open in a scream of pain. Kira reacted immediately. Her power surged out of her, spreading itself over and around the two spirits. Her eyes begin to burn and her hair started to fly around her. She moved in front of Lucas, who, with a careful movement, stayed by her side. “Release him!” Her words were terrible in their power. The spirits cringed from her piercing gaze, and then the one flung the boy at Kira in an effort to protect himself. Robin fell through her and landed against Gallegar’s body. The dead always stop the dead. The two bouncers disappeared in a crack of lightning. Gallegar helped Robin to his feet. The young boy stared at him as if trying to decide if he should still be scared or not. Apparently he decided Gallegar was all right, because he flashed a grin up at him that would have melted a few cold hearts. “Well,” remarked Danolas, shifting his staff to his left hand. “That was fun. I wonder what kind of greeting we will get inside.” He looked back at his men. “Stay here and keep a look out. I don’t want to be surprised like that again.” Gallegar gave a nod to Gabriel and Noah, his own guards. “Keep watch here as well.” He took in the four men who were to wait outside. “Work together. It is necessary.” He felt Danolas’ amusement in his mind. “The beginning of a new era of cooperation, my brother.” Lucas just laughed out loud. 147

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira pulled her power back inside her with an effort. “I wish to see who would use a child to prevent our passage.” Her eyes flashed with golden anger. Lucas stepped forward and gave the door a push. It opened with a long creak that would rival any fun house amusement. He looked at Robin who had come up to stand next to Kira. “What about it, sport? Do we go in now?” Robin studied him for a moment, then with a little shrug, stepped around Lucas and led the way inside. The door opened into a large foyer. Built in the eighteenth century, the mansion had all the charm and beauty of its age. The walls were covered in rose striped wallpaper peeling near the floor. A huge chandelier hung from the cracked ceiling. On the right, a walnut banister led to the second story in a graceful curve. The hardwood floor carried the scuff marks of a thousand tourists’ feet, but other than that, there was no sign of life anywhere. “Do you feel that?” Kira asked quietly, as she looked around the room. “It feels so oppressive in here. Like the walls are closing in on me.” The others agreed. It was a chilling feeling that made them even more aware of their surroundings. Robin motioned for Kira to follow him. He walked toward a white door just to the left of the staircase then, before anyone could stop him, walked right through it.

148

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 9 “Shit!” Lucas exclaimed, reaching his hand out to the door. He pulled it back with a yelp when Robin stuck his head out through the door, a mischievous grin lighting his face. With a disembodied hand, he motioned them forward. “Sorry, kid,” Lucas muttered, catching his breath. “We gotta go in this way. He pulled at the door, his muscles rippling under his shirt. “It’s stuck,” he grunted. Gallegar joined him, and it took both vampire and shapeshifter strength to open it. They walked into an enormous ballroom. Still gracious, all done in white and gold, it was a far cry from the beauty it must have been in its heyday. Velvet crimson draperies hung off rods in a haphazard manner. Pieces of carved ceiling lay ruined on the floor. The arched windows were boarded up and paintings lay slashed and piled in corners on the buckled floor. Kira turned slowly in a circle. In her mind, she could picture what it must have looked like. She could see beautiful women in stunning ball gowns curtsy to dapper men in their fine tuxedos. Music drifted through the air, and the murmur of conversations long forgotten could be heard. Through their link, the three men could see the vision as well. Kira sighed. She almost wished she could be dressed in a lovely gown, dancing in the arms of a handsome suitor. “Your imagination is quite strong for a human.” The whispered drawl came to her amidst the trembling sounds of a 149

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining violin. “But most who dance here can never leave. Would y’all take that chance and dance with me?” She turned quickly. Standing behind her was an Ethereal. He exuded a power not unlike what she sensed in Gallegar at their first meeting. He was dressed in one of the formal tuxedos the men in her vision were wearing, but she had not seen this man before. He had brown hair, cut just below his chin, and pulled back into a little ponytail. His brown eyes were piercing, even in a semi-transparent state. His cheekbones were high, almost a slash in his thin face. His mouth was firm and had a quirk to it where a dimple rested in one cheek. A mustache topped his upper lip, and a narrow goatee graced his strong chin. Kira realized she was staring. Not only at him…but through him. Gallegar and Danolas came to her sides. Lucas was off to the right, his eyes fixed on the Ethereal. “Mortals are not welcome here.” The shade stood perfectly still. Only his lips moved. “You have attacked my guards and disturbed the rest of those who congregate here. What do y’all want?” Kira’s power whispered, and she knew she was talking to the leader of the Ethereals. “My Lord,” she began politely. “I have been sent to speak to you. I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I am for—” With a wave of his hand, the Ethereal cut her off. His voice was that of a southern gentleman. “I know who you are. My people have told me everything. I know you have allied with this vampire and this witch. I know you shared a bed with the shapeshifter.” Kira blushed. Lucas let a growl roll from his throat. Gallegar’s brows came together in a fierce frown.

150

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I know you have a strong magick, one even I can feel. My spies are everywhere. What more can y’all tell me I don’t already know?” Her eyes snapped at him. “Do your spies tell you I think you a coward?” The Ethereal went even stiller than before. Then, with a mighty rush of wind, he exploded upward to the ceiling in rage, growing to an enormous height. “How dare you say such a thing to me?” Kira’s laugh shocked them all. “Illusion.” She pointed upwards at the Ethereal leader. “All…illusion. As is this ballroom vision, as is even your costume.” With a wave of her hand, Kira sent a bolt of power into the air. The ballroom went silent. No singing violins now. The Ethereal shrank to normal size. The spirit was dressed simply in jeans and a T-shirt. All illusions were stripped. “Robin,” Kira called. She looked around and saw him peeping at her from behind a broken chair. “Come to me, please.” The Ethereal child skittered up and hid behind Gallegar. “Don’t be afraid, sweetheart.” She looked at the Ethereal leader. “What do they call you?” “Y’all can call me Patrick.” His eyes flashed at her, still angry. His clothes may have changed, but he still had that southern accent. “I ask you, Patrick, do you often hide behind the pain of a child?” The shade’s head snapped up. He was about the same height as Danolas, but it was hard to tell exactly, since he kept floating a bit off the ground. “That’s twice y’all have insulted me. I hide behind no one. What are you talking about?” 151

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked up at him, her face scornful. “Your guards used this child, Robin, to hide behind, and then threw him away like a piece of garbage when he was needed no longer, in hopes of saving themselves. Do you not take responsibility for your people’s actions?” Patrick scowled. “Of course…any good leader does.” He glared at her as if weighing her words for truth. His eyes traveled to Robin, and Kira could see his face soften. “Will you allow me to investigate?” Kira, surprised, nodded, and then blinked as he popped out of sight. She turned to Gallegar. “You know this leader? He seems somewhat,” she had to think for a minute, “erratic for a man in his position.” Gallegar shook his head. “He is unknown to me. Sebastian was the leader of the Ethereals the last time I had dealings with them. It was over a decade ago.” Lucas came over beside Kira and turned her to face him. “Do you know why we are here yet? I’ve got this sinking feeling…” Kira sighed, and put her hand on his chest. “I am to join with him, Lucas. He has been chosen.” The three men went quiet at this. They were still trying to get used to each other. How would another man fit into the mix? Before they could say anything, Patrick glided through the heavy door. Behind him, shuffling their feet—if spirits can shuffle their feet—came the two bouncers who had mistreated Robin. Seeing them, Kira’s eyes began to glow, as she turned away from Lucas. “I see by your expression these are the ones who hurt the youngling. Before I can punish them, I must hear from the boy.” Patrick held his hand up at her instinctive protest. “They are all my people. I must hear from each of them.” 152

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “He is right, A Ghra… If you would have justice here, we must allow him to do this.” Gallegar slipped up and put his arm around Kira’s small waist as he mind-spoke her. She leaned into him and nodded her agreement. “Come to me, Robin,” Patrick gently commanded the boy. Behind her, Robin peered up at Gallegar, looking for permission. Gallegar gave the boy a smile of encouragement. Robin looked next at his leader, then biting his lip, flitted over to him. Patrick drew him into his lap, and asked softly, “Robin, I need you to tell me what happened to you tonight.” Robin glanced at Kira, then back at Patrick. The room was silent for several long minutes as the small shade told his story. How was uncertain, but Patrick understood it completely. When the story was finished, Robin climbed off Patrick’s lap and walked over to Kira. Concentrating, he put the picture of his slender form hugging Kira in her mind. Laughing, she sent a picture of a kiss right back to him. His grin flashed at them all as he waved goodbye, clapped his hands together and disappeared from view. “They will be punished. No one’s going to hurt a child under my protection. No one!” Patrick’s voice was filled with suppressed rage. Gallegar cleared his throat. “Perhaps our Lady can help you.” Kira stepped forward. Patrick found himself retreating a little before he could help himself. He looked skeptically down at the beautiful woman. How can this Peacekeeper help me or my people? As she neared him, she lifted her hand and held it above his chest. “Patrick, Leader of the Ethereal People, you say you know who I am and what I am about. But your spies have not told you everything. I am The Peacekeeper. I have come to help you and 153

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining your people. I have come to join with you, to add you to my circle. Let me touch you so you can know I mean you no harm.” Patrick flinched as her hand came downward to touch his heart. He started to laugh, to tell her human hands could not make contact with an Ethereal. But when her hand touched his essence, the skin under her fingers began to itch slightly. In shock, Patrick watched as his entire body slowly began to change…to solidify. It spread down from his chest, to his arms and down his torso. He could feel the muscles in his legs began to grow firm. Soon he was completely corporeal. He gently placed his hand over Kira’s. The pleasure of flesh-to-flesh contact made him weak in his newly solid knees. “How…” he gasped, staring at Kira. “How did you do that? She smiled at him. “You are the one who did it. My power just gave you a nudge in the right direction. The ability to change your form has always been within you.” “I can change back?” “Of course. Just will yourself transparent, like you do when you wish to transform yourself.” Patrick stepped back from her and closed his eyes, concentrating. He felt triumph as his body faded away till only the essence remained. As soon as he was done, he willed himself back to corporeal form. He solidified with no problems. “Well done, Patrick. You learn quickly.” Kira’s smile lit up the room. “Peacekeeper,” Patrick’s voice roughened with emotion. “You have given me a great gift.” He reached over and took her hand in his. “Tell me what you want of me.” “I am Peacekeeper. I have come to join with you to help you care for your kind. There is a war coming. One that will be waged against all the supernaturals in the city. We must be prepared. We must stand together.” 154

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira could sense the interest of her three joined ones behind her. This was a piece of the puzzle they had not heard yet. “To do this we must be joined, you and I. We will become a part of each other. You will also have a link with the others.” “Oh, Christ,” moaned Lucas under his breath. “Does this mean I gotta drop my pants again?” Danolas stifled a laugh. Gallegar looked away so Lucas wouldn’t catch his grin. Patrick frowned. “The others?” He glanced back at the three men who stood behind Kira. “These men?” Kira nodded and walked back to introduce them. She stepped first to Gallegar. She looked up at him and her golden eyes melted with love. He wrapped a strong arm around her. “This is Gallegar, King of the Vampires in this city. He is the first among the joined.” Gallegar inclined his head in greeting, but his face stayed impassive, as if he’d yet to pass judgment on this newcomer. He kept his eyes on Patrick as he bent and kissed Kira’s soft lips. Their kiss was intimate, and Patrick found himself wondering exactly what their relationship was. Could a human be in love with a vampire? Then again, was this Kira even human? Gallegar dropped his arm and Kira moved next to Danolas. Her smile was bright as she put an arm around his waist. “This is Danolas, High Priest of the San Francisco Witches Society. He is my second.” Danolas quirked his mouth in a quick grin and tweaked the end of Kira’s nose. Patrick could see their relationship was more light and affectionate than she and Gallegar’s, but then thought he might have to reconsider, as Danolas finished by running a caressing hand down Kira’s long blond hair. He gave her forehead a quick kiss before she moved on. 155

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas reached out and took her hand possessively, pulling her next to him. “And this is Lucas, of the Wolf Clan of Shapeshifters. He has been chosen as you have. His clan leader has refused our joining, but I still wish him to be with me.” Kira turned and tilted her chin at Patrick. “And your spies did not tell you the whole truth. While Lucas and I may have shared a bed, we did not share our bodies.” Patrick could see longing in the shapeshifter’s eyes and mentally scratched his head. The dynamics of this group were curious. “This joining,” Patrick said slowly, his gaze sweeping the three men. “You are happy with the results? It has done for you what the Peacekeeper has said?” All three men smiled the same smile. Odd the shifter would react as well. “We are…more than content.” Gallegar answered. “My spies told me some of what The Peacekeeper can do for you. I have heard she knows the Words of Death over your people.” Patrick looked at Lucas, who still held Kira by the hand. “I was told of the pain you went through, shapeshifter. I know the words hold true.” “Oh, they’re real all right,” Lucas informed him dryly. “Real enough I don’t ever want to hear them again!” “If you join with our Lady,” Danolas put in. “You will not only gain her protection, and share her powers, but some of ours as well. The joining binds you and Lady Kira. The link afterwards between us,” he motioned to Gallegar, carefully ignoring Lucas, “binds us together.” Patrick was silent for a time, and when he finally looked at Kira, his eyes were full of pain. His voice was softer and his accent more noticeable. “My people need a lot of help, sugar. I’m new to leading and I’ve made my share of mistakes. We have 156

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining a lot of trouble in the Ethereal realm, and I think y’all have been sent to help me. When I took over from Sebastian, I was greener than a spring meadow. I’ve just been managing through trial and error.” He motioned disgustedly to the bouncers who still stood against the wall. “As you can see, I am not in control yet.” Gallegar frowned. “How long have you been in charge?” “Just a little over a year.” Patrick clenched his fists at his side. “Ethereals are not used to following orders. They spend much time drifting, so it is hard to get them to see a need for discipline. And it has gotten worse lately.” Kira took a deep breath and let go of Lucas’ hand. “I can help you with discipline.” Patrick smiled. “No offense, but you are awfully little to throw a scare into anyone. I know you have powers. Hell, sugar, I saw ’em, but how can that help me?” “I can discipline them for you.” Kira touched his chest again. “Everyone has their share of troublemakers. Seeing what happens to them as punishment stops others from doing the same thing. That is where I come in.” “I don’t understand.” Patrick looked down at the slim hand on his chest. Kira sighed. “Your spies have told you I know the Words of Death over the witches, the vampires and the shapeshifters.” Patrick nodded. “What they couldn’t tell you is I know the Words of Death over the Ethereal People as well.” Patrick jerked away from Kira, his face tight with both anger and fear. Lucas growled from his place behind Kira and made to move to her, but Kira stopped him with a little wave of her hand. “The words will be put under your control, Patrick. I will help when needed. You may use my powers as you see fit.” 157

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “That doesn’t mean Kira is your servant,” Danolas was quick to point out. “She follows her own conscience as to using her magick. You work together. We all work together.” “You don’t mean to use the words against us?” Kira shook her head. “How can I believe what you say? If you do know the Words of Death over us, allying with you would make us vulnerable. You could destroy us from the inside.” “Look at her, you fool.” Lucas lost his patience. “Does she look like she is lying to you?” “Easy, my friend. Remember, until he is joined, he must not know the extent of your feelings,” Gallegar mind-spoke Lucas quickly. Lucas snorted, but went silent. Patrick, of course, only heard Lucas. “She is a pretty little thing, and I can feel the power she possesses, but I am not blinded by it.” “You will only know for sure if you join with me, Patrick. I can give you many reasons why it needs to be so and why you should trust me, but that will only happen when you read my heart. I mean you or your people no harm.” “What about these guys?” Patrick jerked a thumb at the two Ethereals behind him. “You said you could help me with them.” Kira swallowed. “I do not wish to use the words.” Her mindspeech sounded sickened. A picture of Lucas wrapped around her in a thrall of pain, flashed through all their minds. Lucas went white, as he remembered. “A Ghra… You do not have to kill them.” Danolas comforted her. “He’s right, my Lady. There is much pain before the third set of words is used.” Patrick watched them. “Can y’all talk telepathically?” “Yes,” Gallegar answered, hoping to allow Kira time to come to terms with what she must do. “When we are linked, we can hear each other’s thoughts.” 158

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Even you?” Patrick questioned Lucas, his eyes narrowed. He hadn’t missed the pale face. Lucas hesitated a heartbeat, before answering. “My Clan Leader has not approved the joining. I am not allowed to link without joining with The Peacekeeper.” His heart started to pound. He hated this pretense he was under. He wanted to be able to shout to the sky he too was joined with Kira. He held himself quiet with an effort. “My wolf…” The loving thought caressed him, helped soothe his turbulent thoughts. Kira turned to Patrick. “I can use the Words of Death to discipline your two Ethereals.” Patrick scowled at her. “I don’t want ’em dead, sugar.” Kira went on patiently as if he hadn’t spoken. “The words can be used to cause pain. You can tell me when to stop.” Patrick thought of something. “Can I use them against my own?” Kira shook her head. “No, your voice gives them no power. Only I can use them.” Patrick thought she sounded sad, as if using the words hurt her in some way. He knew that couldn’t be true. No one did something that might hurt them. It was self-preservation. He rubbed his chin, feeling the rough stab of bristles that would never be shaved again. “All right,” he said, coming to a decision. “But only as far as I choose.” Danolas gave a bark of laughter. It did not sound amused. “Believe us, Ethereal, she will be more than happy to call it quits. Before you even say anything, I wager.” “A Ghra…” Gallegar came forward and rubbed a comforting hand up and down her arm. “Can we help?” “No, thank you anyway.” Kira sighed softly. “This I must do myself.” 159

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Patrick followed Kira as she made her way to stand in front of the two guilty shades. The rest of the men followed at a distance. All three were tensed to go to her at the first thought of trouble. The shade leader stood silent as Kira looked long and hard at the spirits. “What’s gonna happen to us?” questioned one of them. He watched Kira with fearful eyes. The other spirit just stared at Kira, with a sneer on his rugged face. “This is the Peacekeeper.” Patrick’s voice was calm. “She will punish you for hurting Robin.” The two men exchanged glances, obviously remembering what had happened on the front stoop. “We didn’t do nothin’.” The second shade’s words were sullen. Kira spoke for the first time. “You disobeyed your leader. You hurt a child. That cannot be tolerated.” She looked at them sadly. “You are not even sorry you did these things.” Without another word, Kira stepped forward and laid her hand on them both. Her power held the men’s essence in place as they squirmed and wriggled, trying to escape. “Tomash nageth flune Estra callis och.” The two shades screamed out loud. So abrupt and surprising was it, Patrick leaped forward to help them. “No!” Kira cried out. But it was too late. By touching the two shades in the middle of the chant, Patrick himself had been caught. Patrick felt nothing at first. Couldn’t understand what they were shouting about. Then it hit him. Icy, cold nothingness. Absence of light. Of all feeling. A terrible, horrible sucking void where his body should be. He reached down to feel himself, but 160

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining there was nothing there. Then the pain of the nothingness punched him. He was being extinguished from the inside out. He choked, and fell to his knees. He could not draw an ethereal breath. What does a dead man fear? Except the total absence of his own existence. Patrick knew the Words of Death could snuff him out like a candle. What would happen to a spirit who ceased to be? The other two shades were writhing on the floor. Kira quickly knelt beside Patrick, laying her hand on his chest, her eyes wild with fear for him. “Be at peace, Patrick. Be at peace.” As suddenly as the nothingness had taken him, it was gone. Patrick could feel himself tremble as he began to gain feeling in his essence once again. He drew in a deep breath and slowly stretched himself, as if taking stock on all body parts. He heard the other spirits’ screams, but it took a moment to register what they were. Patrick prevented himself from giving the instinctive demand to Kira to free the other two men as well. He forced his mind to consider the fitness of the punishment. He shivered. If these two shades shared their experience, it would be a great detriment to any other disobedience. She still touched him, her expression worried. “I’m okay, sugar…you sure pack a wallop! Give it another minute then let ’em go.” He started to struggle to his feet, but found a large hand under his arm to help him. Patrick looked up into Lucas’ sympathetic silver eyes. With Lucas’ help, he stood. “You only had the chant spoken over you once.” Lucas’ voice was rough with feeling. “Try it two and a half times.” “There is pain such as you can’t imagine,” Gallegar added, his face bleak in remembrance. Patrick looked at Danolas for his opinion. Danolas raised his staff in defense. “Hey, don’t look at me. I took her word for it. Trusted her from the beginning. I just saw 161

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining the words in her head. No pain that way. Just seeing them spooked me. Don’t need to feel them.” Lucas snorted. “Coward!” The laughter in his voice took the sting out of the word. Patrick touched Kira’s arm. Her face was drawn as she watched the two shades on the floor. “Release them, sugar. They’ve had enough.” Kira’s face eased. The words were spoken over the two Ethereals. They curled up on the floor weeping in relief. Patrick knelt next to them. “What we just experienced were The Words of Death spoken over us just a single time. It takes three times to kill. I am told the pain gets worse with each repeating. These words will be used as punishment for those who resist my leadership.” He placed a callused hand on each of the men’s shoulders. A shade can touch another shade. “Go, and tell all what has happened here. Things will be different from now on.” Patrick waited until the two shades gathered themselves up enough to stagger, literally, through the door. He turned to Kira, who was watching him tearfully. “I am sorry,” she sniffled. “I did not want to hurt you too.” Patrick took her hand. “I was the one who jumped in where I shouldn’t have. Got to experience the thing for myself.” He shuddered again. “Don’t want to do that again!” “It’s too bad others of your people didn’t see the demonstration.” Lucas looked around him. “It would have been more effective.” Patrick didn’t say anything. He just rubbed his face wearily. Then in a hoarse voice he said, “It was seen.” Kira was the only one who could see the disturbed look in his eyes. “What…what is it?” She squeezed his hand. 162

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Patrick gave a broken sigh. “Stand very still,” he said. “Let me show ya what troubles y’all have stepped into.” He raised his hands to the ceiling in a commanding gesture. His fingers came together with a snap. “Now!” he shouted. It was horrible. They were all suddenly surrounded by Ethereals. Lucas stepped back from a spirit who stood toe to toe with him, then cursed as he had to hop around to prevent stepping on a dozen more. Gallegar hissed in agitation, glaring at the bevy of shades who were so close he could feel their cold breaths. Danolas raised his staff instinctively, to push back the crowd that flew around his head. Kira stood stock still, with Patrick at her back. There were so many spirits in the room, the energy level was full to the bursting. It was hard to take a breath. There wasn’t a single square inch, other than where they were standing, that wasn’t chock full of Ethereals. She opened herself to them and immediately staggered as thousands of whispered voices filled her mind. “Kira!” shouted Lucas. The last thing she saw before she fainted was him lunging through the shades to her side. Patrick caught her as she fell, but he was roughly pushed aside when Lucas reached them. “What did you do to her?” Lucas stared at him through steely eyes as he gathered Kira into his lap. Gallegar and Danolas fought their way through the crowd and knelt down by her side. “She fainted, Lucas.” Danolas stroked Kira’s clammy hand. “You didn’t hear what went through her mind.” Gallegar touched Kira’s face, his expression bleak. “She opened herself to the emotions of all these spirits. It overloaded her psyche.” Lucas frowned. “Why didn’t I—” 163

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He was cut off by a sharp mind-thought from Gallegar. “You cannot share our thoughts, remember?” Out loud, the vampire answered the half-formed question. “You were busy stepping on shades. You didn’t see her expression.” Lucas grimaced. He tried to touch Kira’s mind, but got nothing. Grumpily he asked, “Can you sense anything?” Danolas shook his head. “She is unconscious, but I do not see any damage on the psychic plain. She’ll wake up in a second.” Patrick watched them as they hovered around Kira. They had moved almost as one to protect her. The shapeshifter was quickest, but then their kind always was. But the seriousness on their faces told him they would have gone through a wall to get to her if necessary. They had gone through and over a wall of shades. It would have been considered rude, if they had not been so worried. He looked at Danolas. “You can examine her mind in the psychic realm?” Danolas gave a nod of agreement. “One of our Lady’s gifts to me was true vision. I can see many things on the psychic plain.” “She’s beginning to move.” Lucas’ face showed his relief. He stared down at her until her eyelids began to flutter. “Honey, can you hear me?” There was no answer, but her eyelashes fluttered harder. Gallegar tried. “A Ghra… Open your eyes for me.” Slowly Kira’s eyes opened. Lucas pressed a kiss to her forehead, pretense be damned. “You okay?” Kira took a slow breath and struggled upright in Lucas’ lap. “My Lady, we saw what you saw. With our link, we heard what you did.” Danolas smoothed his hand over hers. 164

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked at them all, her tears overflowing. She heard Lucas curse again. “They are so unhappy. So lost. It is no wonder you cannot make them understand the need for your leadership. They see only their pain.” She looked at Patrick. “What has happened to them? Why are there so many of you?” Patrick rose, his handsome face grim. He motioned at the Ethereals that moved around the room in unceasing motions. “They have nowhere else to go. Someone or something has shut The Gates of Life.” Danolas and Gallegar went very still. Kira searched their minds, but their shock was such they had blocked out all conscious thought. “Who could have done such a thing?” Danolas stood upright, dismay filling his face. His sapphire eyes shone with some unreadable emotion. “What are the Gates of Life?” Lucas couldn’t read Gallegar and Danolas either. He figured it must be another special magical thing, since he had never heard of them. “They are the gates to the other world,” Gallegar said quietly, his voice very thoughtful. “The gates to Heaven and to Hell.” Kira looked up at Patrick. “Someone has closed the gates where people go through to heaven or hell?” “Not people,” he corrected. “Spirits. My kind.” His brown eyes glistened with feeling. “When a human dies, their body sloughs away and only their essence, their spirit, is left. Some of my people move immediately through the gates to the next life, others remain here for a time to complete something they started in their human existence.” “Who chooses who goes and where they go?” Lucas asked curiously. “Whatever power made the gates does the choosing. I believe it is God. He makes the choice as to who goes through 165

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining the gate of Hell or the one to Heaven. Most Ethereals know as soon as they die if they are to go or to stay for a while.” “What about you?” Kira asked softly. “You stayed.” “I was murdered in my old life.” Patrick’s voice was steady, but there was a faraway look in his eyes. “He was never caught and punished, but died in a car accident a week after my own death. He went straight through the gate.” Patrick’s satisfied expression and tone gave no doubt which gate he meant. “Because I never received justice in my old life, I look for justice here now.” “How long have the gates been closed?” Gallegar looked around the room at the sorrowful spirits. Patrick closed his eyes as if in pain. “Almost ten years. Ten years we have filled the city with Ethereal dead. Nothing we have done has changed anything. Sebastian even went to a local wizard for help.” He threw a glance at Danolas, who asked, “What happened?” “He never returned.” Patrick’s voice was stark. “I tried to find him, but the wizard wouldn’t admit to even seeing him. He just disappeared.” He shuddered, as he remembered the cold feeling of nothingness the death words inspired. “I took over after that. I even tried to ship people to other cities to use their gates, but the gates rejected them. We can only leave through the gates of the city in which we died.” “I must help your people, Patrick. I know the Power has sent me to right the wrong that has been done. She looked at Gallegar, Danolas and Lucas. “We must help them. The agony in their hearts can not be ignored.” “We will help them, A Ghra… but we must find out exactly what happened first. We may be tampering with powers as strong as our own.” 166

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas nodded. “A little research will be necessary. Your safety is our prime consideration.” “Yes,” Patrick agreed suddenly. “You must be kept safe. I have seen y’all’s powers, and know in my soul you are the ones to fix the gates. I will do whatever I can to help you.” Kira offered her hand to him, and he helped her out of Lucas’ lap. With a disgruntled look, Lucas rose also. “The best way you can help is to join with me. Become part of our circle. Together we can help your people, and prepare for the storm that is coming.” She moved to him, and unselfconsciously, put her arms around him. Startled, Patrick just stood there for a moment before cautiously returning the embrace. “Please, Patrick.” She spoke softly, looking up at him. “We need you and your people. Who else is better informed in the supernatural world? Who else has a plethora of spies we can use in the coming days? You are as necessary to this mission as we are. Please say you will join with me.” Patrick stared down into her large eyes. He could see she meant everything she was saying to him. He felt an invisible burden lift from his shoulders. He wasn’t going to have to do everything himself. He was so damn tired of being the only one who cared. Maybe having a little back-up wouldn’t be a bad idea. He looked at the three men. A vampire, whose eyes softened like a lover’s whenever he looked at Kira. A witch, who treated her like a sister, yet touched her like a sweetheart. A shapeshifter, who acted so possessive of the woman, that Patrick was afraid to even smile at her. Somehow they were blending together into a unit, a family. A very strange family, but there it was. Patrick smiled. Adding a shade to the mix might be just right. He looked at the three other men. He wasn’t sure they 167

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining were too happy about this, but he had been chosen…right? He looked down at Kira. “Sugar, you’re just what the doctor ordered. I’d be pleased to join with you.”

168

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 10 Not long after his announcement, he led Kira into a chamber on the second floor. It had been refurbished with period furniture, and was the most comfortable place in the old mansion. Because it was one of the places the public was shown, the dust was kept down to a minimum. Patrick grinned as he thought of Gallegar’s parting shot. Gallegar had been grim as he watched Kira lead Patrick through the ballroom door. The other two men had stood next to him, their faces impassive, but their body language wishing him straight to hell. “Ethereal…” Gallegar’s stern voice had stopped him in his tracks. “When you are done with…our Lady…” The emphasis was on the pronoun. “We will speak about removing your people from all of our domains. There is the question of trust between us.” The vampire raised an eyebrow to make his point. Patrick grinned again. If this joining thing went as planned, he wouldn’t need spirits in their places. He would know what was going on just by a thought. Kira walked slowly around the room taking it all in. “This is really quite lovely, Patrick.” Patrick stepped over to the fireplace and deliberately tilted a picture that hung above it. He saw Kira’s questioning look, and shrugged, embarrassed.

169

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “The people from the city bring tours up here. I try to move something out of place now and again. Makes them happy. Keeps the tourists coming back.” Kira giggled. “It must be fun to watch them.” “Yeah, I’ve put together a group in charge of making spooky things happen during a tour. Coldness in a room. Touching someone’s arm. Breathing down someone’s neck. That sort of thing.” He chuckled. “It does have its moments.” “And it provides money to keep a roof above your heads.” Patrick frowned. “Such as it is.” Kira walked over to him. “Maybe we can work on getting your house fixed up a little too.” “What are ya talking about?” “I am not exactly sure. But I would like to make sure this beautiful old mansion stays in one piece.” “It will take money to do that, sugar. Unfortunately, I am fresh out!” “You are not alone any longer, Patrick. That is why we are here, standing in this room. We are to join.” Patrick moved away from her, suddenly nervous. He felt like a guy on his first date with the most popular girl in school. “So, how do we do this joining?” Kira smiled at him. “Each joining was different. What I felt with one was completely different than the others. So will it be with you. The joining chooses the how…and the why.” Patrick watched as she walked toward him, her hands held up in front of her. He met them with his own, palm to palm. His skin tingled. It was still a rush, touching real flesh again after all these years. “Join with me, Patrick. Do not be afraid. Sense all that I am, all that I will be. Become a part of me now.” Patrick closed his eyes. He felt almost sleepy. His fingers intertwined carefully with Kira’s. Slowly he relaxed. 170

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He started to speak, but was cut off by the rush of pictures that suddenly flowed through his head. He saw himself as a baby, his father rocking him in his arms. He saw his mother as she helped him blow out the candles on his fourth birthday cake. He watched himself wreck the go-cart he had struggled to build when he was twelve. Time moved inexorably ahead, and he saw himself at his high school prom and when he graduated from college. His heart broke again, as he watched himself weep over the woman he had lost in a freak riding accident before he could make her his wife. He then saw himself on that fateful night, when he heard the sound of the bullet and felt the sharp pain rip through his chest. The cold of death as it enveloped his body. The silence of the grave as he was buried. He heard a gasp and realized Kira was sharing his thoughts with him. Kira watched the pictures change, as Patrick rapidly lived again through the first years of being a spirit. She sobbed. So much pain, so much loss, it was overwhelming. Again and again he had wondered…why did it have to be him? Learning the tricks of his new existence and the politics of getting along with other shades. Jumping ahead through fifteen years of ghostly life, to when he took over the reins of leadership with the disappearance of the old Ethereal Leader, Sebastian. She shared his struggle as he fought to build the Ethereals back into a cohesive people. The emotions pummeled through him. She felt his frustration, his anger and his sorrow as he tried to work with his people as their new leader. Patrick felt terribly exposed. He knew Kira had seen everything that had flashed through his mind. No private thought or feeling had gone unnoticed. He felt naked before her. Her cries mingled with his own. 171

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Dear, Patrick…” Her words were like a gentle kiss. “You have shared yourself with me. Come now, see all of my uncertainties.” He watched as a blue light formed in his mind. A shape came into view. It was his turn to gasp as he recognized Kira lying naked and still on a bare table. He realized he was watching her birth…her awakening. Her memories flowed over him. From her first awareness, the meeting of her creator, to her vision of the mission she had been sent on. He relived her first meeting with Gallegar, and while the details of the joining were shielded, he could feel the deep love they shared. He saw her meeting with Elijah and felt her pain at his refusal to allow Lucas to join with her. The agony of incompleteness. He watched as her time with Danolas gave her strength and helped her go on. Patrick jerked in surprise when he saw Lucas and Kira later come together in joining. That brave son-of-a-bitch. The shapeshifter had ignored orders and done it anyway. He could feel her joy at it, and the deep fear he would be discovered and punished. He sensed the need for secrecy. Without thinking, he promised never to speak of it. Her timeline flowed into his own as pictures of their first meeting came through. The last was of them standing in this room, their hands pressed together. Patrick felt the power that lived within his essence stir. Kira’s power was summoning it, calling it gently. The two powers came together. Kira laughed softly. The powers joined together not with a bang, but with a sigh. Deep contentment came over the both of them. Patrick’s soul filled with the hope that things would turn out all right. Kira was given the belief if she just had faith in herself and her joined ones, her mission would succeed. They 172

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining both had tears running down their faces when they opened their eyes. “One last thing,” Kira whispered as she unlaced her fingers and cupped one hand around the back of Patrick’s neck. Patrick knew immediately what was happening and listening quietly, heard the voice that told him to touch the copper bracelet he wore to Kira’s right wrist. He felt her pulse quicken beneath his fingers. “Hope can make your burden light,” she murmured. “That is why I brand the back of your shoulders.” “Faith is what keeps you going. Like the pulse of life beneath my band.” “Join with me, dearest Patrick. Enter the circle.” “I give you hope. You give me faith. Together these virtues will triumph.” Patrick felt the power between them grow stronger. He repeated the magical words back to her. “You give me hope. I give you faith. Together these virtues will triumph.” In a shattering burst, the power sang through them. Patrick shouted in surprise. He hadn’t expected pain. Ethereals rarely felt it. Kira sobbed out a choked moan. The scent of their seared flesh filled the room. They dropped together to their knees and he cradled her to his chest, his teeth gritted against the pain on his neck. “Just…a…second…” Kira managed. She took a deep breath. “Listen closely to my words, so you too may use them.” She spoke the healing spell. He was astonished when the pain vanished, stretching his neck carefully. He sensed Kira had branded him with the letter “K.” He smoothed his hand over the burn on her wrist. It looked like a star, the same design as on his bracelet. 173

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I hope I do this right.” Patrick repeated the spell, watching her anxiously. Her sigh of relief was his answer. “Danolas taught us the spell. Gallegar’s and my brands ached for hours until I joined with him. He healed us.” Kira rested against him. He moved, so they were sitting more comfortably. “And so now you can heal everyone?” She shook her head. “No, we can heal. You received part of Danolas’ magick when you joined with me. You will get more when the link is complete.” Patrick raised his eyebrows. “I don’t think the shapeshifter is looking forward to that.” Kira gave a little giggle. “Lucas was given his brand in an…interesting spot. He is embarrassed.” She sent a picture to him, and Patrick broke into a huge grin. “We had to make sure it was in a place not readily seen.” He took her hands in his, his face serious. “I owe you an apology, sugar. You were right, now we’re joined, I can feel you were honest with me.” She pressed a kiss to his whiskered chin. “Trusting in words is difficult, but seeing the truth of the heart, that makes one sure.” Patrick leaned back, looking down at her curiously. “And just what is in your heart, sugar?” Kira’s face showed her confusion. “I am just a good ol’ boy from Louisiana, but I knew coming into this thing, you have a pretty strange relationship with those guys.” “I love them…as I love you.” “An hour ago I didn’t think I’d be saying this…” Patrick’s smile was sheepish. “But I love you too.” He touched her lightly on the cheek. “Somehow though, I am pretty sure my feelings for you are in a different ballpark than theirs.” 174

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining She frowned, uncomfortable with the conversation. “I love you in a special way…like a …” “Maybe like a friend,” he finished for her, his face knowing. She thought about that for a while. Her feelings for Patrick did not have the depth she felt with Gallegar, or the security she knew with Lucas. Or the teasing comfort as she did with Danolas. But she did feel an intimacy with him, like a close friend, one she could share secrets with. He watched the emotions sweep across her face. A question that had occurred to him earlier came to his mind. “Do you love the vampire?” Kira felt the heat as her cheeks flushed. “Yes, he is my first. My soul and his are one.” “More than the others?” “Each is different.” Her tone was stubborn. “Look, sugar, I am just trying to understand where I fit in here. Those boys didn’t want me anywhere near you. If they had had their choice, I would have been cheerfully tossed out the window.” “When you link with them, you will understand better.” Patrick shook his head at her. “I understand a lot now. At least joining with you showed me I wasn’t crazy. I thought the shapeshifter was a little too intense for a bystander. Y’all may want to work on his presentation.” “You can mention it to him.” She smiled in amusement. “As far as my feelings…I love each of you. It is part of being joined. Each love is different and necessary. Things are more intense between Gallegar and I because he was the first I loved and I was sent to be with him.” “And Lucas?” Kira’s eyes showed her pain. “I do love him, but …” She got up from where they had been sitting. 175

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I do not know. I feel something for Lucas…” The thought trailed off into a sigh. He rose also and gave her a hug. “Well, mine is just a friendly type love. I think you got enough of the other kind hanging ’round you!” She hugged him back. “I am going to like having you around, dearest Patrick. You make me smile.” “Well, maybe this will make you smile even more.” “What?” “When we joined, I saw you were given something by each of the others. Kind of a remembrance of what was done.” She nodded. “Yes, Gallegar gave me this ring.” She showed off the silver band. “Danolas gave me this necklace.” She lifted her chin so the gem was easily seen. Patrick touched it gently. “It looks like living crystal.” “It is.” “And Lucas?” Kira pulled back her sleeve to reveal the intricately woven armband. “This was a part of him, when he first changed.” “Interesting. Makes mine pale in comparison.” She frowned at him. “Whatever you give to me will be special.” He grinned. “These are special all right.” He closed his eyes and concentrated. Suddenly two bright lights appeared next to him. They flickered as they moved around his head. “What are they?” Her eyes widened with amazement. “Will-o-wisps. They are special lights only a few can see, and even fewer control. I give them to you to wear.” He pointed at Kira and the two lights dove toward her, each attaching to an ear lobe. She squealed as she felt the warmth of the twinkling lights. He caught her chin in his hand and looked them both over. “Very nice.” 176

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining She rushed to the mirror on the wall. “They glow like fireflies!” “During the day, they will appear as small diamonds. But with the first shading of nightfall, they will begin to glow.” She gave him a big hug. “They are wonderful. Thank you.” “Do I go down and link with the boys now?” Kira opened her mouth to say yes, but felt a strong check in her soul. It wasn’t time for the linking. That was interesting. “No…” she said thoughtfully. “It is not time for that yet. I do not know why.” Well, one way or another, we better get back downstairs before your boys send out a search party.” “We have learned that part of the joining is a sense of incompleteness when we are separated. We think it will lessen as time goes on.” “Well, so far I’ve felt surges of love and protectiveness for you, but haven’t been away to feel the incompleteness.” Patrick took her by the hand and led her to the door. “Maybe by the time y’all are done with me, I’ll be as crazy for you as they are.” Kira laughed, the tone like a bell. “No, I do not want you crazy.” She looked at him with soft golden eyes. “I just want a friend.” **** Downstairs the three men heard the laugh. Each reacted differently. Gallegar, who had been standing completely still by the wall, sensed the joining was over. He felt Kira’s pleasure at the completion, and Patrick’s relief tinged by the newness of a growing love. He relaxed, as his careful probing showed none of the deep emotion he himself remembered from the time of his joining. What he and Kira shared still seemed intact…special. Lucas’ joining had worried him, still did in fact. Gallegar knew Kira had 177

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining strong feelings for the wolfman and that made him uncomfortable. But when he remembered the ugliness of the jealousy spell that had attacked them, Gallegar was determined to control himself. To not allow that negative emotion to make a flaw in their wagon wheel of protection. Danolas heard the laugh and gave a sigh of relief. He found he was more attuned to Kira during joinings, even though she shielded him. The emanations on the psychic plain were too strong for him to ignore completely. It was like watching a psychic fingerprint being laid. He could sense another spoke in the wagon wheel had been added. It would be interesting to find out why Patrick had been chosen. So far Kira had been given, life, understanding and passion. She had returned heart, vision and purpose. He wondered what the joining with Patrick meant. Lucas was just plain happy when he heard the laugh. It meant Kira was done, and she would soon be coming back to him. Granted, the ghost would have to come along… But as long as Kira was back where she belonged, he could handle that. He looked over at Gallegar and Danolas. They were pretending, just like he was, this new player meant nothing. But Lucas knew better. They would accept him because Kira said they needed to, but that didn’t mean any of them liked it. Maybe it would be easier when they were linked up with him. There was silence at first when all came together in the ballroom. Fragile Ethereals flitted this way and that, trying to see what was going on. It was slightly irritating. Kira smiled as she looked at everyone. Her eyes sparkled. “The joining is complete.” “I welcome you, on behalf of us all.” Gallegar’s words were formal. Patrick grinned and shook his proffered hand. 178

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “You were right. The joining does look a lot better from this side.” He shot a glance at Lucas. “For you, it looks a little dangerous.” “I’ll be just fine. Danolas fixed me up with a nice spell.” “Good. I will tell you now there were times I sensed more intensity of feeling for Kira than was warranted by someone not joined with her.” Gallegar was concerned. “You could tell he was not what he seemed?” “Yeah, but not just him. Y’all treat each other like you’re linked at the hip. Forgive the pun.” “We’ll have to watch closer. All of us…and that includes you, my friend.” Danolas clapped his hand to Patrick’s shoulder. “I supposed we have to link with him now,” came Lucas’ grumbling voice. “Actually, you are saved that fate right now, shapeshifter. It’s not time yet.” Lucas narrowed his eyes. “What the hell does that mean?” “Just what he said, my wolf.” Kira laid a small hand on Lucas’ arm. “I am told the link must not happen yet. But it will.” Danolas was puzzled. “But why, my Lady? The link helps us work together. Prevents us from having misunderstandings.” He threw a pointed look at his fellow linkees. “I would think it very important.” “I am unsure as to the why, Danolas. I think we just need to wait and see.” “And what does he bring to the cosmic wagon wheel?” Lucas grinned in amusement. Kira took his question seriously. “He brings me faith. Faith that all that happens will turn out for the best.” “And she gives me hope. Hope that my kind can exist with dignity once more.” Patrick grinned and wrapping his arm 179

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining around Kira’s shoulders, gave her a quick hug, ignoring Lucas’ narrowed eyes. “Plus, maybe a little free decorating.” He explained Kira’s idea of keeping the mansion up better. “The idea has merit,” Gallegar said cautiously. “Especially if one could buy your mansion from the city. We could then clean it up at our leisure.” Kira threw her arms around Gallegar’s neck in her excitement. No fool, Gallegar lifted her off the ground in his own embrace. His body tightened swiftly at the feel of her softness against him. He felt like it had been centuries since he had lain with her on his couch, loving her. He had trouble hearing what she was saying though the buzz of desire that filled his skull. “That is a wonderful idea, my Heart. Could you do that?” It took several tries for Gallegar to clear his throat. “Money is not a problem for me, A Ghra… I have several lifetimes worth to spend.” He looked down at her radiant face. “If it pleases you, we can find a way to make it happen.” “It pleases me very much. What do you think Danolas…Lucas?” Lucas shrugged. “Everyone should have a place to call their own. Just like you said earlier.” He was rewarded by Kira’s beaming smile. “And my resources are at your disposal.” Danolas grinned as they all smiled. “I guess we are going into the real estate business.” Kira lost her smile when she looked around at the Ethereals drifting around them. “If there are so many of your people here, does that mean the whole city looks like this?” Patrick shook his head. “The city is vastly overcrowded, but here it is worse.” “Because here reside the Gates of Life?” Danolas guessed. 180

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Yes, they are within this house. It draws the Ethereals here. This is where I decided to stay and rule my people.” “I wish to come back tomorrow and look at these gates.” Kira touched Gallegar’s face as he frowned at her. “I will be careful. I promise to have the others with me. Please,” she asked, knowing his would be the final word on the subject. Somehow, without even trying, Gallegar had become the unspoken head of the Chosen. “Only if you can be kept safe.” Gallegar eased Kira to the ground, reveling in the slide of her dainty form against him. He looked over at the other men. “Her safety…” “We will take care of her, Gallegar,” Danolas promised him. “Trust us, brother…” “I am learning to.” Gallegar answered out loud. Kira sensed the Power as it entered the room. The others were talking among themselves, not giving her their complete attention. She held herself very still when she felt it glide over her, almost in an embrace. “My daughter, I am well pleased with you. But you are not done. More is asked of you. More will be given to you. Receive my wisdom, and listen to the council of those you love and whom love you.” The Power’s embrace strengthened, making it hard for Kira to even breathe. Lucas was the first to notice Kira’s stillness. Her eyes were wide, trancelike in her exotic face. He took her hands in his. “Honey, what’s goin on?” Kira couldn’t answer him. Her brain was busy trying to take in the myriad of images that flowed into her mind. Sights and sounds filled her brain almost to the bursting. Without thinking, she pulled her hands from Lucas’ grasp and grabbed the sides of her head. She stumbled away from him, toward Gallegar. “It hurts,” she whimpered. She crumpled. 181

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar moved so quickly, none of them saw him. He had Kira in his arms before anyone took their next breath. “Danolas,” he ordered. “Look beneath the pain. What is happening? Danolas heard Lucas swearing, could sense his anger, and had to beat through it to find Kira in the other realm. “Lucas, my friend,” he pleaded. “Control yourself. I cannot hear our Lady.” He felt Lucas take a deep cleansing breath. Patrick, on his other side, put his hand on the shapeshifter’s shoulder as if to give him strength. With the interference gone, Danolas was able to swim through the concern and find Kira on the psychic plain. The strength of the bombardment staggered him. “The Power,” he gasped, rubbing his own forehead in pain. “It speaks to her, but there is too much…too much information.” “What can we do?” Gallegar’s eyes began to glow green. A fragment of his power seeped out from under his own selfcontrol. Danolas thought furiously. He finally had to pull himself away from Kira’s mind to do so. “When we were attacked before, we bound together to defeat the enemy. We should try that again.” “But that was something evil. This is the Power. It shouldn’t be trying to hurt her.” Lucas was unconvinced. “Maybe it isn’t,” Patrick put in quietly. “Maybe it wants to see how we handle it.” “You mean she is being hurt to test us?” Lucas face went livid. “He may be right,” Danolas offered. “The Power we have seen in the past would not hurt Kira. She is too important to it. This could be a test for us to see if we are willing to help Kira when needed.” 182

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Then let’s get it over with!” Gallegar spoke in a commanding growl. “I want her free of this immediately.” He looked to Danolas for instruction. “Gallegar, you continue holding her. Patrick, Lucas put your hands on them both.” Danolas followed his own direction. “Now, try to let your magicks out slowly. If I am right, the Power will take it from there.” The four men took deep breaths, as if choreographed. Slowly, magicks lifted into the air. Green, blue, silver and brown, they spread gently over Kira. The magicks mingled, struggled for a moment then merged with her own golden light. Kira, who had up to that point been frozen in Gallegar’s arms, sucked in a breath, then another. Her body eased from its torment. They all willed her their own strength, which she reached out and gladly took, like a little girl burying her face in a bouquet of flowers. Her face regained its color, and she opened her eyes. She continued to stare, but now there was no pain or fear. They could sense she was receiving whatever the Power had for her, but they couldn’t tell what it was. She shielded them from all details. “When’s she gonna come back?” Lucas ran his hand down her arm to comfort her. Gallegar still held her tightly in his embrace. “Soon, brother. She must hear what the Power has to say to her.” Danolas tucked his staff in the crook of his arm, and carefully smoothed Kira’s hair back from her face. “Am I going to get as touchy feely with her as y’all are?” Patrick asked. His hand moved of its own volition and touched her on the shoulder. He snorted. “I guess that answers that.” He looked slightly embarrassed.

183

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira blinked her eyes. Once…twice. Awareness flared in them. She looked at Gallegar who bent his head and kissed her…hard. “You frightened us, A Ghra…” “I am sorry,” she whispered. “I felt you combine your powers to give me strength. It was what was needed. The Power was pleased.” Lucas muttered under his breath about how Powers didn’t know their own strength. “The Power told me what you did was right. That eventually we would be able to act when necessary without thought. We will just do. It was not a test, but a training session.” “Yeah, but why did this Power have to go and hurt you to train us? That don’t seem fair to me.” Patrick sounded skeptical. Kira shook her head as she moved reluctantly from Gallegar’s arms. “I did not know how to take in the information. I was supposed to ask for help immediately. It was training for me as well.” “Are you all right now, my Lady?” Danolas could see no sign of damage, but wanted to make sure. “I am fine. And now I must go.” “Go?” echoed Gallegar. “Where do you go, A Ghra…” “I don’t know, but I can show you how to get there.” **** The two cars pulled away from The Haunted House. The second car of four bodyguards followed Gallegar’s Mercedes. Patrick hadn’t bothered to bring anyone since he had people all over town. Besides, there was very little which could be done to harm an Ethereal. Gallegar climbed in the driver’s seat and looked askance as Lucas slid in the front seat. The wolfman pulled Kira onto his lap, leaving the back seats free for Danolas and Patrick. 184

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar’s jaw tensed briefly, but he had let it go with good grace, understanding the need Lucas had to touch Kira. Since she needed to give directions, and it made room in the back, it seemed to work out for the best anyway. Lucas would have liked to use the time to snuggle up with Kira, but Kira’s stiff body had other plans. Her skin itched with restrained power and her eyes kept burning with a light golden glow. She was in a state of high nerves as they passed down the darkened city streets. Gallegar thought he could use those eyes as a compass. When he was going the right direction, the glow burned hotter. When he turned wrong, her light faded. As they drew nearer to the edge of the Lower City, Danolas met Gallegar’s gaze in the rearview mirror. “My Keep is just a few blocks from here. The Magick Box straddles the boundary between the cities. If we keep going along this road, we will cross over into the upper city.” “Y’all seem concerned, Lord Gallegar.” Patrick’s voice was questioning. “My people do not often travel in the upper city. It is too dangerous for them.” Lucas turned his head to look at him. “Why dangerous? I’d think a vamp could go just about anywhere he wanted.” Gallegar’s smile was almost sad. “Your people can blend in with humans easily. Mine can not.” Lucas nodded. “Yeah, we can change our shapes at will, and we only have to worry about losing our control and getting hairy once a month.” “And a witch is either an immortal or a human with special powers, so you can fit in with others in the city,” Gallegar continued. Danolas inclined his head in agreement. 185

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “My kind is allowed out only at night. We could traverse the upper city, but if something went wrong… If one of my flock were hurt in some way or recognized. Our skin is different, our eyes can glow. Our teeth. The secret of our existence would be out.” “Secret?” Patrick was surprised. “There are those out there who believe in all of us. What secret?” “Those people who believe in vampires, shapeshifters, witches, and spirits, are thought to be crackpots…crazies. Even though there are those who study our kind, there is no proof. If a vampire was found out, truly discovered, he would become a lab experiment, and panic would arise among humans.” Gallegar quit speaking for a second, as he negotiated a sharp turn. “And then there is the temptation.” “Temptation?” Gallegar sighed. “When all is said and done, my people live off the blood of other life forms. We are hunters. To put an unschooled vampire into a crowd of unsuspecting humans could be very serious. So I do not allow my flock out of the Lower City boundaries.” The men mulled that over. “We just crossed the line,” Danolas announced quietly. “We are now in the upper city.” Gallegar looked at Kira. She had paid no attention to the conversation they had been having. All her concentration was on where she was going. She was poised on the edge of Lucas’ lap, like a fledgling ready to take its first flight from the nest. “I’ve never seen her quite this way before.” Lucas’ voice was low. “She’s really intense.” Gallegar agreed. Her intensity was a worry to him as well. He kept driving, maneuvering his car into a section of the upper city built with high skyscrapers. Row after row of them, in a silent dark queue. Each almost identical to the next. Suddenly Kira stiffened and gave a cry. “Here! Stop here!” 186

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

187

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 11 Gallegar pulled over to the curb in front of a tall modern skyscraper. It was at least thirty stories high and made entirely of glass. Sculptured figures decorated the entranceway. The building was cold and dark. Kira tried to scramble out of the car, but Lucas held on to her. “Whoa, honey, we need to know what’s happening here.” “I have to go. I must. There is not much time.” There was a frantic aspect to her that scared them all. “My Lady.” Danolas tried to touch her arm, but she jerked away from him, struggling frantically to get out. “Tell us what you need.” Kira said nothing. She just continued to struggle. Gallegar frowned. Moving carefully, he turned Kira so she was facing him, and took her face between his strong hands. “A Ghra… Listen to me.” He used his power to break through the panic and keep her still. “Kira…we are your Chosen. We are to help you, remember? You need us, but we can’t help you if you don’t tell us what is going on.” He looked deep in her eyes, but he saw no recognition in them. It scared him. He thought a minute, trying to find something that would break the hold on her. Suddenly it dawned on him, and he gave her a small shake. “A Ghra… You are putting us in danger by not talking. All of us are supernatural creatures. You have brought us into the 188

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining human world. We are in danger here. To keep you and ourselves safe, we must understand what is happening.” Kira stopped struggling. Her eyes blinked, and comprehension returned to her face. Blowing out her breath, she relaxed against Gallegar’s hands. “I am sorry, my Heart. All of you.” She paused and gave a frightened laugh. “The compulsion is great. I do need you. This time I need you to protect me from myself.” “Just part of the job, honey,” Lucas quipped, but he was relieved she was back and talking. “Can you tell us more, my Lady?” Danolas patted her on the arm. Kira sat back from Gallegar, and Lucas adjusted her comfortably on his lap, his face possessive. She looked up at the building. “He is in there…” Lucas groaned. “Not another one.” She threw him a disapproving look. “I must go to him. There is not much time. There is great danger. Please.” Gallegar looked at Kira for a moment then got out of the car. The others joined him on the sidewalk. The bodyguard’s car disgorged its four occupants and they came to stand behind their leaders. They all looked up at the building before them. There was something frightening about it, something they all sensed on a different plain. Gallegar turned to Patrick as an idea struck him. “Do you have people in this building?” Patrick nodded. “I have them everywhere.” “We need to find out what is happening inside this building. I don’t like what I am feeling.” “Consider it done.” Patrick turned to Kira. “I’ll be right back, sugar.” With a sound like a slap, he vanished. “We must go inside!” Kira fretted. 189

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Not until we know it’s safe.” Lucas was firm. “Let us do our job, honey. We’re here to protect you.” “High Priest!” They all turned to see Danolas’ acolyte standing in front of a plaque that hung by the building’s entrance. “There is a sign here.” “What does it say, Jorad?” “It reads…Cassidy Genetic Institute.” Gallegar didn’t stop the hiss that filtered through his fangs. “A laboratory?” Danolas’ face was grim. “I have heard of this place. It’s a place that studies the abilities of what they call Enhanced Humanoids or Suprahumans. Those who have special abilities and aptitudes.” “Like us?” Lucas spoke with an inhuman growl. He felt his inner beast come to life. “No, we are supernatural. They are considered the next step in evolution.” “And humans buy into this?” Danolas shook his head. “I know this because of my contacts as a witch. Humans think this is just what the sign says, a genetics laboratory.” Kira plucked at Gallegar’s arm. “I must go to him. Please, Gallegar.” “Wait till Patrick gets back, A Ghra… There is something here disturbing to me.” “To all of us,” Danolas put in. “To all of us,” Gallegar agreed. “If we walk blind into a situation, we could all be hurt.” Kira subsided. She understood what Gallegar and her other joined ones were saying, but they didn’t feel the urgency she did. If she didn’t get up there soon, all would be for naught. 190

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Pacing, she tried to hold on to her patience. She was almost jumping through her skin by the time Patrick popped back. “Can we go now?” she demanded, rushing to him. “Just a sec, sugar.” Patrick turned to Gallegar, Danolas and Lucas. “There’s something goin’ on all right. My Ethereals are as nervous as coons in a dog run.” “What do they know? Have they seen anything?” Danolas asked. Patrick shrugged. “Something about the sovereign bein’ replaced. I think we are about to walk into the middle of an oldfashioned execution.” “No!” Kira cried, pulling strongly on Danolas’ arm. “He is the one. We must save him.” “You’re to be joined with this sovereign? The old one, not the one who’s taking over?” Patrick looked at the other men. This time he sensed the same displeasure in himself he saw in them. No wonder they hadn’t wanted him around. Whew, I don’t even know the guy and I don’t want him anywhere near Kira. He stood scowling down at her until he saw the other men’s knowing looks. Not as easy as you thought, is it?” Lucas mocked him with a chuckle. Patrick opened his mouth to sarcastically respond, but Kira broke in first. “We must save him, please.” “All right, A Ghra… We will come to this sovereign’s assistance. But we must be careful. We do not know of the abilities of these Suprahumans.” Danolas hefted his staff. “If the Power sent us here, we must believe we can help.” “Yes,” Kira breathed. Her eyes glowed in relief and she stood taller. “I allowed my fear to overcome me. I am Peacekeeper. I will join with him.” 191

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The others felt the sweep of her power. Theirs moved to meet it. All at once they felt stronger, more secure. Kira headed for the door. When she pulled on it, it didn’t move. Lucas tried it. “It’s locked up tight.” He looked at Gallegar. “I don’t think either of us is strong enough to break it open.” “Then let’s try another way.” Danolas raised his staff and spoke an incantation. The air itself moved and shimmered. The door gave a groan and they heard the locking mechanism detach itself from its locked position. It clicked open with a loud snap. Danolas waved his staff. “After you, my Lady.” Lucas snorted and placed himself in front of Kira. “After me, you mean.” They all walked cautiously through the open door. Jorad closed it behind him and wove a spell to relock it. Once inside the huge lobby, Kira opened her senses to try and find the sovereign. The others added their magicks to hers without a word. Kira felt herself drop back into that semitrancelike state she had entered before. Without a word, she walked across the lobby to the elevators and pressed the button up. “Is it safe?” Danolas wanted to know. Patrick gave a little shrug and popped out again. The rest waited, their senses and powers on full alert. After a moment, Patrick was back. “The elevator is empty. My shades say the party is on the thirtieth floor.” The elevator arrived and all stepped in. Even with the nine of them, there was plenty of room to maneuver. Lucas reached over and pressed the button for the twenty-ninth floor. “We must go to the thirtieth floor, my wolf,” Kira protested. Lucas shook his head. “We may need the element of surprise. If they don’t know we’re already here, stopping a floor early and walking up may give us an advantage.” 192

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Good thinking,” Patrick commented. The closer the elevator got to the floor, the more the group could sense the turbulent emanations. Something very bad was happening. Kira’s eyes were glowing with power by the time they reached floor twenty-nine. “I am staying in the elevator.” Kira’s words were determined. “I will arrive in their midst as The Peacekeeper. I will not show fear.” Gallegar started to argue, but sensed the firmness in Kira’s mind. She was in Peacekeeper mode. She would do what was necessary. She would go in alone if she had to…just as she had done with him. “All right,” he agreed, surprising everyone. He took charge again. “I will go with you, as will Lucas. The rest can come up the stairs as Lucas had planned. If there is trouble, having many spread throughout the room will keep us from being vulnerable.” Danolas hesitated, his gaze dropping to Kira, who stood resolute. “It is all right, my brother.” This time it was the vampire who comforted the witch. “We will take care of her. This time, your magick will work best…unannounced.” Danolas nodded, and he, Patrick and the bodyguards stepped off the elevator. “Follow the High Witch’s instructions. Serve him well,” Gallegar said to Noah and Gabriel, as he pushed the button to close the door. “We can feel where he is, and he can feel us,” Lucas commented. “Yes, and Patrick can use the Ethereals if we get in trouble.” “They know someone’s coming,” warned Lucas, changing the subject. “The elevator light.” 193

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It matters not,” said Kira. Her face was glowing with her power, her exotic eyes strikingly golden. “Get ready!” Gallegar said. He and Lucas drew themselves up into their most intimidating bearing. The doors opened into a huge conference room. Wooden paneling ran along all the walls, and Lucas wondered what had happened to all the windows. Tables ran along the sides of the room covered in innumerable food dishes. Several kegs of beer sat on one end of the room next to an open bar. People were huddled in small groups. It looked like a party, but the atmosphere didn’t feel festive. When Kira, Gallegar and Lucas stepped off the elevator, everyone turned to look at them. No one looked friendly. Kira took a closer look at the big room. She knew Gallegar and Lucas would keep her safe, so she was free to use her power and look around. The room was full of people. All shapes, sizes, sexes, and races. None looked enhanced to Kira’s untrained eye, but her power could sense abnormalities in their auras. Something just a little off surrounded all of them. She looked toward the far end of the room where a stage was raised, and she caught her breath. Gallegar and Lucas whipped around and looked at Kira when they felt her power surge. She wasn’t looking at them, but across the room. Carefully, keeping their eyes on the people who were slowly crowding closer to them, they turned and looked also. Their stomachs rolled at the sight. On the stage was a man. He hung spread-eagled against a large circular table that had been set on its side. He was attached to the table by large knifes that pierced his hands and feet. He had been beaten severely. Some type of blade had been used to make slashing cuts through his clothes and into his flesh. Streams of blood flowed down from his wounds to pool on the floor beneath him. 194

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas and Gallegar flinched when Kira’s scream of anger shattered the psychic plain. The burst of power that exploded out of her rocked everything within ten feet. Quickly they staggered to her side. “A Ghra…” Gallegar rasped, his hands coming down strongly on her shoulders. “Control! Use control or you will destroy friend and foe alike.” Kira’s power receded. She looked at them apologetically. “I am sorry. My temper—” “Let’s not worry about that right now, honey. We need to help that guy.” Lucas was appalled at the spectacle before him. His people could be cruel, but they didn’t hold with torture. Kira firmed her shoulders and walked toward the stage. Several men came forward to stop her, but one look into her glowing eyes, or at the anger on the faces of Gallegar and Lucas, and they stepped quickly aside. Kira’s eyes were only for the man pinned to the table. Her power told her this was the Sovereign, the one she was to join with. How had he come to this? She sensed great power in him, but it was muted, as if under miles of water. He had a powerful body, one that spoke of much strength. His arms and legs were as muscular as Lucas’. His black hair fell over his face so she couldn’t see what he looked like. What was left of his blood-soaked and tattered clothes was what looked like a tight fitting two piece catsuit. It had once been black. As Kira got closer, she noticed several people sitting on the side of the unfortunate Sovereign. One, a young man, was sprawled in a throne. His whole demeanor was contemptuous of everything around him. He could have been handsome, but his sneering face destroyed any attractiveness he may have had. He too, was dressed in black. He wore leather pants and a too-tight fitting leather vest, that gaped at the buttonholes, showing black 195

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining hair on his chest. He had bleached the hair on his head white and had styled it so it stuck up in large tufts on his head. Kira stopped in front of him. Her words were abrupt. “I am here to see The Sovereign.” The bleach-haired man sat up languidly and looked Kira up and down insultingly. Both Gallegar and Lucas tensed behind her. “So,” the young man drawled in a patronizing voice. “My first petitioner. You have come to give me your allegiance. To show me due respect.” Kira’s eyes flashed gold fire. “The only respect you are due is disrespect. You are not The Sovereign. You are nothing!” “Oh shit! The fat’s in the fire now.” Lucas’ mind-moan was almost funny. He and Gallegar stepped forward. The people on the stage came forward in anger. The young man jumped out of his chair like a jackrabbit. His face went red in rage. “How dare you? I am Superjack. I am the Sovereign. I rule here.” He swept a hand in front of him at the crowd gathered. His voice was petulant. “Ask any of them.” Kira sniffed. “You sound like an angry child. I do not know how you have taken the true Sovereign’s place, but you are a weakling and a parasite.” Superjack was incredulous a girl would walk in and speak to him so. “Who do you think you are?” he screamed. “You will pay for that!” He motioned to one of the men standing next to him. “Seize them!” Three of the enhanced came forward. They were all large men with longer than average arms and legs. The features were slightly simian. They came at Kira with a rush.

196

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar and Lucas tensed to stop them, but suddenly, the three monkey men flew into the air and hung there, screeching. Their arms and legs kicked back and forth. They heard Danolas’ amused voice in their heads. “I thought you could use some help, my friends.” “Perfect timing, Danolas. Just keep them there for a minute, will you?” Lucas stepped forward and addressed Superjack, who stood there staring at his men with his mouth hanging open. “You don’t know who you’re dealing with, kid. This is Kira, The Peacekeeper. I suggest you listen very closely to her. It may mean the difference between your life and death.” Superjack shut his gaping mouth. His gaze flicked back and forth nervously between Kira’s small group and his floating men. “Just who the fuck are you?” He managed to sneer. Gallegar stepped forward. “We are those who have joined with her. I am Gallegar, King of the Vampires.” A loud murmur went up at his declaration and the crowd of people backed away from him. “There are no such things as vampires,” one of Superjack’s cronies said loudly. “Really?” Gallegar smiled, letting his power slide from its bonds. His eyes glowed green and his face paled. A set of fangs slipped from beneath his red lips. A supernatural wind blew gently through his hair. He looked otherworldly and deadly. “You are so beautiful, my Heart.” Kira’s mind-voice was awed. Gallegar smiled and brought her hand to his lips. He accidentally nicked her palm with a fang, and a tiny droplet of blood oozed forth. Staring seductively at Kira, he licked her hand clean. Kira couldn’t help the rush of desire that went through her. Superjack swallowed noisily, staring at Gallegar. His crony squeaked, as he hid behind one of the others. 197

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Good show, you two. Let me give it a try now!” Lucas stepped forward. “I am Lucas, of the Wolf Clan of Shapeshifters.” He grinned at the gasps that rose up around him. He didn’t think any of this would make its way back to Elijah, but he couldn’t take the chance. “I am also one of the Lady’s Chosen.” He looked at the crowd on the stage. “What?” he snarled. “No questions about shapeshifters? How sad. Now I can’t prove it by doing this…” He willed the claws to burst through his fingers. The nails on his hands were smothered by the six-inch razor-sharp claws. There was pain, but it was easily managed now. That was part of Kira’s gift to him. He held his hands up to Superjack and growled at him. “Want I should scratch your back?” Lucas could hear the mind-laughter of the others. He grinned, keeping his eyes on Superjack. The others on stage were looking at him for help, but the kid didn’t know what to do. He saw Gallegar was still holding his otherworldly pose, so Lucas kept his claws out, just in case. Kira spoke, her voice smooth as glass. “There are others. Those who have power just as great as you have seen here. I will ask you one more time. I wish to see The Sovereign. Take me to him.” Superjack licked his lips. They could all sense the fear in him. How had this kid beaten The Sovereign? Was he more powerful? It seemed ridiculous. The kid’s eyes narrowed. “You’re right!” he said. “I’m not The Sovereign. But I will take his place after the execution tonight. I have beaten him in a fair fight. It is the way of the Enhanced. I will be the next sovereign, so anything you want to say to him, you can say to me!”

198

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked at the boastful young man. She was sure he hadn’t beaten the old Sovereign. Her skepticism must have shown on her face. “You don’t believe me.” Superjack sneered, and he put his chin in the air as if that would give him more courage. “Wanna see how I did it?” With speed faster than the eye could see, Superjack moved in front of Kira. He had her by the throat before any of them knew he had even moved. “You see, bitch. I don’t need parlor tricks. I can beat you fair and square.” Kira heard the shouts of her joined ones in her head. Lucas moved to use his claws on Superjack, his expression feral. “No, my wolf. Do not strike him. He is only a child wanting to prove a point.” “His point is to kill you, A Ghra…” Kira heard the strain in Gallegar’s voice. He too, had moved up behind the young suprahuman. Kira smiled. Superjack looked nonplused. “My loves, would this boy’s hand damage either of you?” “Of course not!” Lucas answered out loud. “But it’s you…” “You have given me more than your life and your passion. You can also give me your strength. Will it so, and he can not damage me.” Gallegar met Lucas’ eyes. It went against everything in them, but together, they stepped away from the man. They gave their strength to Kira and felt her take it into her body. “Do you wish to harm me, pretender?” Kira’s tone was icily sweet, as she spoke to Superjack. “Go ahead. Try if you can.” Superjack’s eyes widened. He hadn’t expected this. Gingerly, he squeezed Kira’s throat. Nothing happened. He squeezed again. Still nothing. Struggling to keep his face impassive, he squeezed as hard as he could. His fingers made no impression on the woman’s neck. 199

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Keeping the fear from his eyes, Superjack stepped back. “I will allow you your life,” he stated breezily. “So all can know I am a benevolent leader.” Lucas snorted. “You can’t even spell benevolent.” Kira also stepped back. She was thoughtful as she stared at the young Suprahuman. He was clever, turning that around the way he did. “Now what?” she questioned her joined. “You don’t believe he beat the old guy fairly, do you?” Patrick asked, from his hidden position. Kira shook her head. “Do you need to touch The Sovereign, so you can understand what happened?” Danolas reminded the others of her need to touch each of them at different times. Kira quickly translated for Patrick who could not hear clearly since he wasn’t yet linked. “Yes, I need to touch him. He lives, that much I know, but his power is held at bay. If this usurper’s gift is speed, he shouldn’t be able to keep The Sovereign in such a state.” “He’s lost a lot of blood. He may just be unconscious,” Lucas remarked. “I must touch him to find out.” They all thought for a moment. They had the strength to force Superjack to allow Kira to check on The Sovereign, but that was fraught with danger. Kira could get hurt, or the kid could just up and kill The Sovereign now, rather than waiting. “Perhaps, A Ghra… you can deceive him into thinking you must see the sovereign face to face. Make this upstart think you don’t believe that is the sovereign.” “What good will that do?” Lucas asked Gallegar. “If he doesn’t have the real Sovereign, how can he say he beat him? All you need is to get close.”

200

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira thought a moment. Gallegar’s plan was a good one. It was up to her to make it work. “Superjack!” she called imperiously. “Yeah, what is it? Are you ready to admit I am the new sovereign?” “No, I cannot do anything until I examine the man you have there. Assuming that is The Sovereign?” “It’s him. Trust me.” Kira laughed. “I do not trust anyone who wishes me harm, and you have shown that clear enough so far. Let me examine the body. Allow me to see his face. Then I can know for sure where my loyalties should lie.” Superjack looked at her calculatingly. “You mean, if I can prove to you the body there is the old sovereign, you will give your allegiance to me?” Kira smiled. “Once I know who it is you say you triumphed over, then I will know who to join with.” Her words were noncommittal, but Superjack was one who heard what he wanted to. “How do I know you won’t try anything?” Kira’s lip curled. “A show of my good faith.” She turned to Gallegar and Lucas. “Change yourselves back. Danolas, give him back his monkey men…gently.” Lucas and Gallegar didn’t look happy, but a second later, they had returned their bodies to the way they normally looked. A heartbeat after that, the three goons from the stage dropped heavily to the ground in front of Superjack. “All right?” she asked. “All right.” Superjack sat back in his chair to watch. Kira, Gallegar and Lucas moved forward.

201

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Wait!” The young Suprahuman stopped them. “The vampire and the shapeshifter stay there. You go alone.” He grinned at her, thinking he had cut her off from her allies. “Kira…” warned Lucas “I will be all right, my wolf. You are all close enough to protect me.” Kira pressed a kiss to his cheek. She met Gallegar’s serious eyes and then stepped up on the stage. Her heart was in her throat as she made her way to the table and its horrible trophy. The warm metallic smell of blood filled her nostrils. She sensed Gallegar’s quickly smothered reaction to it as he smelled it through her, and she soothed him without thinking. Stepping closer, Kira felt the warmth of The Sovereign’s body. Not dead yet. Her heart tripped a little. Kira moved so she could brush the hair off The Sovereign’s battered face. The hair was still soft and silky even though it was matted with blood. His face though bruised, was handsome with a high forehead and strong jaw. His long black lashes fanned over his cheeks. As soon as she touched his face, Kira could feel the power move through her. His power battled to meet hers, but was held back behind a hidden curtain. She closed her eyes and pressed through the curtain calling him, seeking that which made him what he was. **** Benjamin Cassidy, Sovereign of the Suprahumans heard the siren call. His consciousness wavered, held captive by fetters of thick bitter poison. He fought it, trying to break free to answer the beautiful voice that was calling to him. He struggled up, up, up, as though fighting through syrupy bands of confused thought. The higher he came, the more conscious he became of his body’s agony. He writhed, feeling sharp searing pains in his 202

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining hands and feet. The siren voice soothed him, quieted him. He stopped moving to better hear it. “Sovereign, can you hear me? Come to me, Sovereign Lord. Fight…fight what has been done to you.” “Who…are…you…” Benjamin whispered, his voice tight with pain. “Oh…” the voice filled with joy. “I have found you. I despaired of getting through to you, Sovereign.” “Who…are…you…” Benjamin asked again. He felt his consciousness slip but the beautiful voice called him again, giving him strength. “I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I have come for you, Sovereign. I am for you, Benjamin Cassidy. You are for me.” “I don’t understand. Am I dead? Are you an angel? What has happened?” Benjamin’s voice grew a little stronger. The voice—Kira—spoke softly, but there was anger in it. “You are not dead, Benjamin, and I am no angel. I am the Peacekeeper. I have been sent to join with you against your enemies. You have been betrayed by one of your own. He is claiming he did battle with you, and beat you in fair combat, but this I do not believe.” “Who?” Benjamin asked. “A young enhanced by the name of Superjack. He is the one.” “Superjack?” Benjamin was amazed. Even if that twerp had gotten the drop on him with his hyper-speed, Benjamin should have cleaned his clock. What is going on? His thoughts were muddy and it was hard to sift through them. “I don’t remember fighting a battle with him. What did he do to me?” Kira’s voice sighed. “It is better to show you, Benjamin, than to tell you. Please, what you see will distress you, but you must remain calm. It is very important you understand this.” “All right.” Benjamin would have said anything, just to get this Kira to show him the whole picture. 203

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Remember, be calm…” The voice faded away and in its place came a picture. Benjamin could see it was the meeting room, where he judged disputes and held celebrations. The room was filled with Suprahumans, except for a group hidden by the stair entrance and a couple of men near the stage. There was also another, a woman kneeling in front of a table where hung… Benjamin jerked with shock. Kira’s voice soothed him quietly. “Easy, Sovereign, please…be easy.” It was him. It was his own body that hung so callously, pinned to the table with his own ceremonial daggers. He was so beat up, he barely recognized himself. He felt a shout rise in his throat, but Kira’s voice was there, preventing him from crying out. “Shhh…if he knows you are awake before I can change what has been done to you, he may kill you. Tell me what you remember.” Benjamin fought down his anger. It was actually helpful, breaking him free of the cold sluggishness of his thoughts. He tried to go back in time to the last thing he remembered. “I was sitting in my chamber…reading some papers on the genetics of beast changers.” Benjamin frowned mentally, trying to replay the moment in his mind. “I was just reading. I had a glass of wine. It had gone warm, so I didn’t finish it. I was hungry, and just about to go down to the kitchen for a snack.” He stopped for a minute. Something hovered just on the other side of his consciousness. He felt Kira lend him strength. That in itself was amazing, but he didn’t have time to act on it, because the thought that had been escaping rushed back with a bang. “I was stung by something. I thought it was a bee, but my enhancements prevent any damage so I didn’t worry about it.” “Where were you stung, Benjamin?” 204

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “On the arm. What does it matter?” Kira didn’t answer for so long, Benjamin was afraid she was gone, a figment of his tortured mind. He felt himself falling back beneath the waves of poison and he struggled to maintain his balance. Kira returned to whisper in his ear, her voice grave. “It was no bee, Sovereign. You were injected by a needle. He drugged you.” “Impossible,” Benjamin argued. “Nothing can harm me.” “Something did. Now that I know what I am looking for, I can see the drug running through your body. Sovereign, he did not battle you at all. He drugged you and—” “And carved me up like a Thanksgiving turkey. That son of a bitch. How? What drug could do that?” “Is this not a genetics lab?” The question stopped him in his tracks. He suddenly remembered that Superjack, alias Myron Feldmen, was the head scientist in the labs. Theoretically, he could have come up with something. “Myron…the little weasel—” He snarled. “Sovereign…” Kira’s voice interrupted his grousing. “I had been sent to help you even before I knew what this Myron had done. I am Peacekeeper. By joining, we will become a part of each other. I have come to join with you to help you take care of your kind. There is a war coming. One that will be waged against all of the supernatural in the city. We must be prepared. We must stand together.” “I am not in any position to help you now, sweetheart. What can I do?” “You have been chosen for me. There are others here, strong leaders who have also joined with me. Together, we can heal you so you may reclaim your seat of power. If that is what you wish.” “You’re telling me you can fix me up so I have no wounds. So I can break that little bastard’s neck myself.” 205

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “If you wish it.” Kira’s voice was amused. “Or I can show your people my power, and do it for you.” Benjamin stopped listening. He wanted to feel his hands around Superjack’s neck. He wanted to feel the bones breaking. He was a little shocked at the savagery of his thoughts. So, she wants to join with me? He wasn’t in any shape for that, but if she could get him to where he could fight…well, hell, he’d do whatever she wanted. “Okay, sweetheart, where do I sign up?”

206

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 12 Danolas felt Kira make contact with Benjamin Cassidy, known as The Sovereign. With his ability to sense Kira in a stronger way than his brethren, Danolas was in the position to monitor the conversation and relay it to Gallegar, Lucas and Patrick. They all knew when Benjamin accepted their Lady for himself. Gallegar kept a weathered eye on Superjack. He sat in the chair for a while, but as Kira’s time of communicating with The Sovereign grew longer, he rose and now paced back and forth on the stage. Finally, it became too much for him. He stomped over to where Kira stood next to Benjamin. “Enough! You should have been able to tell who that is by now. All of us know. That is the Sovereign.” “Quiet!” Gallegar commanded. “You don’t want to disturb our Lady when she is using her power.” He smiled chillingly. “You never know what may happen.” Superjack stared at him, furious, but afraid to do anything. He marched back over to his chair and threw himself down angrily. “One more minute,” he demanded. “Tell the bitch. She’s running out of time.” Lucas growled at Superjack. “Watch your tongue…Myron. You wouldn’t want to get it sliced off, would you?” Superjack flushed at hearing his name. “How did you… Never mind. My name is now Superjack, the fastest of all the Suprahumans. You couldn’t catch me.” 207

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas used his shapeshifter speed and planted himself in front of Superjack, his hands placed on the arms of his chair. Superjack blinked at his alacrity and his face tuned pasty. He hadn’t seen Lucas move. Lucas smiled, wishing he could control his fangs like Gallegar. “You don’t know much about my people, do you…Myron? I look forward to teaching you about all of my abilities.” He pushed himself off the chair, and backed down to stand next to Gallegar. “And you haven’t even seen a vampire move.” Gallegar still wore that chilling smile. “My friend…don’t give away all our secrets.” Superjack looked away, and his gaze caught Kira still kneeling beside The Sovereign. He looked back at them, his expression smug. “Tell her to get away from him. It’s time for the execution.” On the psychic plain, deep in Benjamin’s mind, Kira heard Danolas’ warning time was running out. She jerked herself up and out of The Sovereign. Coming to her feet, she swung around and called to Gallegar. “I need more time!” In her mind, she added, “I must join with him, now. It is the only way to heal him. To bring him back to what he was.” Turning, she hurled herself on Benjamin’s body. She felt the blood seep into her clothing, cold and sticky. She emptied herself back into Benjamin’s consciousness. “I understand, A Ghra… We will protect you.” Gallegar turned and nodded to Lucas, who nodded back. They both felt Danolas’ agreement, and Patrick’s assurances through the witch. “To me!” Gallegar shouted. He sent a burst of green power into the crowd. Lucas growled, as his claws again ripped from his fingers. They both charged over and stood at Kira’s back. Danolas appeared in a puff of smoke next to them. Patrick 208

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining popped in down below as he marshaled the Ethereals in the building. Gabriel, Noah, Jorad and Tobias, Danolas’ other witch guard, made their way through the throng of Suprahumans, and took up positions around the part of the stage that held the table. Superjack screamed for his people. He raced back and forth, his ability to use his hyper-speed in battle limited by his inexperience. The monkeymen and a few others who had shared the stage with him obeyed him and jumped into the battle. Others from the crowd also began to fight. Gallegar’s vampiric power tore through their enemies. Lucas’ howl struck fear into the enhanced humans, his claws slashing as he defended Kira. Danolas’ staff waved and jumped in his hands. Incantations spilled from his mouth. Smaller wands moved frantically as the lesser witches fought, and bodies were thrown across the stage by Gabriel and Noah. Back on the psychic plain, Kira slipped into Benjamin’s mind. He let out his breath in relief as he felt her return. “I though you had left me.” “No, my Sovereign. I just had to make sure we were protected while we join. Your friend, Superjack, wants to kill you a bit sooner than expected.” Benjamin started, his body jerking on both plains, causing agony to bloom in his body. “Are we safe?” he gasped out. He felt Kira’s soothing power once again. “For the moment. My Chosen and their people will protect us.” “I can’t wait to meet them.” He felt her smile. “You will be a part of us all very soon.” He sensed her retreating a little. “Where are you going?” “I must make you aware of me in all ways, Benjamin. I need you to open your mind to me. I have been holding the pain in your body at bay, but cannot do that while we join. The pain will be great. I am sorry.” 209

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Do what ya gotta. The quicker the better.” “Open yourself to me, Benjamin. Feel my essence. Know my power.” Benjamin relaxed himself as best as he could, since it was hard to relax his body in his mind. He sensed the power he knew as Kira touching him. A picture came into his mind, forming slowly out of the shadows. For the first time, Benjamin saw her. A low whistle came from him. The face matched the voice. The Peacekeeper was gorgeous. She walked toward him, and Benjamin was surprised when he saw his psychic self walk forward to meet her. Her head only came up to his breastbone. “You are beautiful.” It was the first thing out of his mouth. She smiled at him and lovingly ran her fingers down his arms. “It is time, Sovereign. Do you wish to join with me?” “Oh yeah!” Now that he saw her, he was more than ready. She pressed herself against him. Her hands went to his back and gently stroked. Benjamin returned the favor, his psychic self stroking her hair, her back. Without warning, Kira’s psychic shielding dropped. Pain stabbed through him, sharp and hot. He felt like his whole body was on fire. He groaned into the top of her head. “The pain is from all your wounds. I cannot keep it out any longer.” Her tear-filled voice touched him. “Join with me now, and the pain will end.” Benjamin stood still, trying to hold the pain at bay. It was so bad he was afraid he might pass out. The only good thing about it was the drug had been flushed out when the burst of pain came in. He could think clearly again. Well, as clearly as a man bleeding from twenty wounds could think. He opened his eyes and saw Kira’s power floating around him. It was bright gold, and had the scent of flowers to it. “Moon flowers…” 210

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The power hovered around him, waiting, but for what? He got his answer when his own power swelled up out of him to join it. He watched as the two powers seemed to play tag, almost playfully. His chased Kira’s gold, the red power twirling around it, herding it one way and then another. Kira’s power was patient, allowing the game, but after a time the golden power pushed back at his. He felt his power tremble, irritated she would stand in his way. The red cloud of power huffed and squirmed, but eventually the gold quieted the red and gave it back to him to control. Wrapped in his own power, Benjamin felt Kira remove the knives that pierced his flesh. As each dagger was removed, he felt a new gushing of pain and blood. He ground his teeth against the pain, determined not to cry out. Kira sobbed softly and he lifted a ruined hand to calm her. The pain was tremendous. “Take what I have to give you, Benjamin. Take the healing. Take my love.” Benjamin felt her hands moving over his body. It wasn’t sexual. In fact, he was surprised to find he wasn’t thinking of Kira in that way. Her hands were cool and as she passed them over the wounds on his body; the pain disappeared. The more she touched him, the better he felt. His strength returned, and with it, his enhancements. The touching continued, but now it was Benjamin who touched her. Running his hands over her face, her body, he gave back to her what he had taken. Her strength. He opened himself wider to her and let her see the type of man he was. What made him special. What made him a Suprahuman. Kira almost bit her tongue in surprise. His abilities were legion. He could do it all. He was the one Enhanced who could copy all the other Suprahumans abilities. No wonder she had felt such power. This was a man worthy of leading his people, just as the others she had joined with were. 211

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira reached up and touched his face and gave him what he had given her. She showed him her life. She showed him who and what she was. Benjamin held her, in awe of the woman who had come into his life. He hugged her tightly. For the first time, he understood all she had been trying to say to him. All she could do for his people. All they could do together. On the psychic plain, they pulled slowly out of each other’s arms. “It is time to go back.” Her voice was almost sad. “It is time to fight.” Benjamin was looking forward to it. “Your wounds are healed, my Sovereign, but we have one last thing to do before the joining is complete.” “And what is that?” Kira didn’t answer. She didn’t have to. The knowledge filled his mind as surely as it filled hers. He watched as she placed her hand on the back of his. A dagger appeared in his hand and he touched it to her left arm, just above the elbow on her biceps. The power rose above them, ruby set in gold. “I give you control. You give me strength. Together we will conquer our enemies.” Kira watched the ruby red power descend onto her arm. “You give me control. I give you strength. Together we will conquer our enemies.” Benjamin felt the tickle of power in his hand. Their eyes met and the power exploded, searing their flesh and dragging them back from the psychic plain to the real world. **** Benjamin stood upright, his heart pounding from the experience of joining. He felt a sharp pain in his hand, and saw a “K” had been burned into it where they had joined. He looked down and saw Kira lying in his arms in a faint. He smiled. She was just as beautiful in the real world, as she was in his mind. He frowned when he saw the charred skin through her burned shirt. He ripped the shirt away from the burn and was 212

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining surprised to see the shape of his dagger burned into her arm where the blade had touched her. The pain of the joining, as well as what she had done for him, had left her unconscious and he hoped she stayed that way. The brand hurt like hell. Noise finally intruded on his mind. He looked around and saw himself in the middle of a battle. Suprahumans of all enhancements fought a few strangers and—he blinked in surprise—an army of…ghosts? Benjamin looked down at Kira. He didn’t want to leave her, but this was his fight. He bent down and gently leaned her against the tabletop. He looked in disgust at his blood that stained the carpet. It stained his clothes as well. His shirt hung in ribbons on his muscular frame. With a tearing motion, he ripped the torn shirt from his torso. Benjamin reached down and picked up two of the daggers. He stuffed them in his waistband. He grabbed the others and stood over Kira, one in each hand. Calling on one of his enhancements, he took a deep breath and let out a roar. Gallegar, Lucas, Danolas and Patrick heard the roar. It sounded like a hundred male lions had sneaked up behind them. As one, they turned to do battle, knowing Kira’s life was in their hands. They stopped, surprised, as they saw The Sovereign standing strong and well in front of them. It was he who was roaring. They turned back to the battle, but found most of the Suprahumans had lost the will to fight when they saw Benjamin. Only those loyal to Superjack fought on. When he saw Kira leaning against the table, Gallegar jumped up on the stage. He went to her, ignoring the big man standing at guard. “She is well. The blood is mine.” Benjamin looked at him then glanced around the room. “She gave all her strength to me. I replaced what I could but…” 213

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar touched her face with gentle hands. “She has given you what you needed.” He bent and tenderly gathered her bloody form to him, unmindful of his own clothing. “I will guard her here. You have a battle to win.” Benjamin inclined his head in agreement, noting the loving way the dark man touched Kira. He leaped off the stage and landed near Lucas, who was methodically shredding one of the monkeymen’s clothing. Benjamin used his daggers to fight off another Suprahuman who had been coming at his back. Lucas glanced his way and seeing who it was, nodded his thanks. “Is Kira all right?” he asked. “Yes.” “Good,” Lucas growled, planting his foot on the monkeyman’s face and giving it a kick. The man flew across the room. “Now go kill that little bastard so we can be done here.” Benjamin laughed, liking the big man. Using his daggers, he fought his way through the crowd looking for his enemy. A man with long blond hair waved a staff at one of the beast changers. Benjamin blinked as a rope appeared out of nowhere and wrapped itself around the beast changer. It fell to the ground wound up tight as a mummy. He passed a brown-eyed human who was pummeling one of the flyers. The flyer kept trying to hit him back, but his fists went right through him. Benjamin had to see it twice to believe it. He pulled his attention back to the battle and after several minutes of searching, saw Superjack trying to fight his way to the door. Benjamin took a deep breath and kicked into hyper-speed. Before Superjack knew it, Benjamin stood in front of him. He switched into his strength enhancement and jerked the young Enhanced off the floor by the neck. Superjack wriggled and squirmed as he tried to catch his breath. Benjamin stared at him, anger darkening his eyes. 214

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Finally, when Superjack went limp in his grasp, Benjamin turned toward the crowd. He switched enhancements one more time, and let out his lion roar. “Enough!!!” The crowd paused. All who were still fighting turned and looked toward the sound. The sight of the young Enhanced in Benjamin’s grip shut the fighting down quickly. Benjamin strode to the stage, Superjack still in his hands. Once there, he whirled around and swept the crowd with glaring red eyes. He dropped Superjack in a heap before him. Gallegar still crouched by the table, holding Kira, protecting her with his strong body. Lifting her, he walked over to Benjamin. Lucas, Danolas and Patrick joined him, the bodyguards just behind them. Benjamin touched Kira on the face. “Does she waken yet?” he asked softly. Kira herself answered him. “I am awake, Sovereign. I am just very tired.” Relaxing, Benjamin leaned over and kissed her on the cheek. Gallegar’s arms tightened around her. “I thank you for my life, sweetheart. But if it hadn’t been for that drug, he never would have gotten close to me.” One of the Suprahumans stepped up and bowed before Benjamin. “Sovereign, please forgive us. When we were called here, you were already on display. Superjack and his minions said he defeated you with his hyper-speed. We didn’t know what to think. Are you saying he used a drug against you?” “Karl.” Benjamin put his hand on the man’s arm. “Myron has come up with a drug that could not be defeated by my enhancements. If this drug works on me, it is logical to assume it will work on us all.” Many of the Suprahumans paled at this news. None wanted to see a drug like that exist. If it could take down their strongest warrior… 215

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It must be destroyed!” Karl was outraged. “See to it,” Benjamin ordered. “You are now the head of the lab. Ferret it out and destroy it.” He didn’t notice Karl’s look of surprise and pride. He turned to Superjack, who was just regaining consciousness. “Now I must deal with the traitors. Gather all who stood with this creature.” Hurriedly, all those who had fought on Superjack’s side were shoved together in front of the stage. Benjamin stood above them. His chin-length black hair was still matted with his blood, and without a shirt, he looked like a pirate of old getting ready to punish his crew. He glared at the fifteen men and women who stood silent and frightened before him. He paced back and forth, stepping over the moaning body of his erstwhile replacement. “This is all?” he inquired. “As many as we saw fighting against you and your people. Some are dead.” A man, who had eyes like a snake, pointed at the bodies littered on the ground. “They have escaped my wrath.” Benjamin stared threateningly at the group of traitors. “But you have not. I will see to you after I have dealt with this pretender sovereign.” He reached down and grabbed Superjack by the arm. Superjack squealed like a pig, and struck at the muscular arm holding him. “I did nothing wrong! I met you in fair challenge! You’re cheating! It’s that bitch’s fault.” He got no farther as Benjamin reached out and slapped him hard across the face. “You owe the lady an apology,” he said, quiet menace in his voice. Superjack just narrowed his eyes and stubbornly stayed quiet. Lucas cleared his throat. “I do believe I told the little bastard I would slice off his tongue if he spoke to Kira that way 216

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining again.” He flexed his claws. “Don’t suppose you’d let me…” His voice trailed off sadly. Gallegar and Danolas heard him laughing uproariously in their heads. Superjack’s expression was priceless. He started plucking at Benjamin’s arm in an effort to get away. “My apologies. I think I have something different in mind for…the little bastard.” Benjamin looked at the group who stood protectively around Kira. He couldn’t hear the laughter and thought Lucas was serious. “I think I owe you thanks for my life as well. Kira said you were protecting me so we could finish sharing the power…joining she called it.” Gallegar stepped forward. He allowed Kira to drop to her feet, still holding her carefully around the waist. “I am Gallegar, King of the Vampires, first of the joined. I welcome you to our circle.” He and Benjamin shook hands. Benjamin noticed his possessive arm never left Kira’s waist. The blond man Benjamin had seen fighting earlier bowed elegantly. “I am Danolas, High Priest of the San Francisco Witches Society. Thank you for allowing us to come to your party.” He grinned hugely, his eyes sparkling. Lucas next greeted him. “I am Lucas, Master Shapeshifter of the Wolf Clan. I am Chosen.” He said it with a smile on his face. Benjamin knew through the joining the werewolf was also joined, but it had been done in secret, so he had to be careful how he spoke of himself. Patrick, came forward, and willed himself corporeal. Murmurs rose behind him. “I am Patrick. I lead the Ethereals. I am new to this joining, just as you are. I expect you will have a few questions for us. I don’t suppose you got to hear everything in the rush.” 217

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Benjamin looked at the four men who stood proudly before him. He watched Kira’s face as they introduced themselves. Love and admiration gleamed in her eyes. This was a special group. One he himself had joined. He hadn’t known what he was getting into at the time, but he found that he liked these men. Kira had been right. He laughed. “You know none of your kind really exists? And here I thought my people were the oddest in the city. Where have you all been?” “Most of us live in the Lower City, away from the humans. It is safer there.” Gallegar gave the group a meaningful glance. “None may know about us.” Benjamin snorted. “If you can keep our secret, we sure as hell can keep yours.” He turned and looked at Superjack. “Now as for you…” Myron squealed again. “It was a fair challenge. Just because no one saw it doesn’t mean I didn’t win.” Karl, the Suprahuman who was now head of the lab, sneered at Myron. “You wouldn’t know a fair challenge if it hit you in the face!” Benjamin had a look of contemplation on his face when he turned back to the crowd. “You didn’t see Superjack win, did you?” The crowd muttered amongst itself. After a while cries of: No! We did not see him win! We saw nothing. No challenge is handled that way! were heard. Benjamin nodded. “And you didn’t see me lose either.” He looked down at Superjack, still squirming in his hard grasp. “I think perhaps we should redo the challenge, here in front of everyone.” He ignored Superjack’s gasp of surprise. Kira put her hand on Benjamin’s other arm. “Is that necessary? You may get hurt again. You are not completely well.” 218

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar, who had been following the same train of thought as the Suprahuman, pulled her back against him to comfort her. “It is necessary, A Ghra… If there is any doubt of Benjamin’s abilities to lead his kind, he will not be an effective leader.” “Who would dare doubt it?” Kira huffed angrily. “I saw the truth. I will make sure everyone knows it!” “I can’t hide behind a woman’s skirts, sweetheart.” Benjamin was firm. “You already saved me. I have to reestablish my authority.” “He’s right, honey. Let it go.” Kira glared at Lucas when he finished the mind-speech, and then at the others as she asked. “Is this a guy thing?” Danolas tried to smooth the waters. “It is more a leadership thing, my Lady.” Benjamin stepped in. “I will fight with Superjack, so all may know there is no way he could do to me what he did, without drugging me first. It must be done.” He wasn’t asking for permission. He was stating a fact. Kira sighed, and then nodded. She didn’t like it, but all of the Chosen felt what Benjamin intended was the right thing to do. She trusted their judgment. Benjamin sensed Kira was still worried, so he bent and kissed her cheek. He felt Gallegar’s heated glare on the back of his neck and shivered. Okay, so the vampire was saying “hands off.” He gave Gallegar a little bow in recognition, and with a slight smile, Gallegar nodded back. They understood each other. Benjamin stood and looked around the room. “Make the Challenge Circle!” All the Suprahumans scurried to do his bidding, moving back to form a large circle that encompassed most of the room. The prisoners were held just off to the side and Kira and the Chosen climbed up on the stage for a better view. 219

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Once the circle was in its place, Benjamin threw Superjack into its center with a negligent toss. Superjack scrambled to his feet, searching for a way out. His eyes were wide with fear, his nostrils bulging in an effort to pull in enough air. Benjamin jumped into the circle himself and smiled at Superjack. “You have one shot, traitor. You better make it good.” He moved himself into a fighting stance, but his motions were careless. He wasn’t worried by anything Superjack could do. Superjack gulped. All could see his Adam’s apple move up and down. He gave one more desperate glance around the circle as if looking for freedom, before turning back to Benjamin. He screamed his defiance at Benjamin and, using his hyper-speed, lunged ferociously at him. Benjamin saw him coming, even without the enhancements he had. What he didn’t see until the last minute was the minisyringe Superjack held in his outstretched hand. He barely had time to swing away as Superjack made his pass. He could hear the crowd’s gasping, and fury lit his brain when he realized they thought he was retreating from the coward he was fighting. Not stopping to think, he kicked into his own hyper-speed enhancement and raced after him, grabbing him above the wrist where he held the syringe. Angrily, Benjamin squeezed until Superjack screamed with pain. The audible sound of a bone breaking filled the room. The syringe fell to the floor and rolled to Karl’s feet. It was over. “You son of a bitch!” Karl bent and carefully retrieved the poison. “So much for a fair fight.” He looked at his Sovereign. “Are you all right? Did he touch you with this?” “Not this time.” Benjamin gave Myron a hard shake. The beaten Suprahuman was whimpering as he cradled his broken wrist against his body. “Last time he took me unawares. This 220

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining time I was prepared for him. But not even I thought he would try to cheat in a room full of his brethren.” “Coward! Cheat!” The rooms exploded in angry catcalls. “What do you plan to do with your betrayer?” Kira and the other Chosen made their way down to Benjamin. Benjamin gave Superjack another little shake. “Our law allows me to deal with him as I see fit.” His face darkened. “To cheat on a fair challenge. To develop drugs that would harm his own kind and then to use them. All of these are evil enough to warrant death.” Kira’s Chosen looked at each other. They could feel the stirring of Kira’s power. Danolas mind-spoke to Kira. “If any deserved the punishment, my Lady, it is this man.” “I will kill him only if that is the Sovereign’s desire. I will not give him the idea.” The High Priest bowed in agreement. Patrick looked at both of them. “Y’all were using that mindspeech again. I didn’t get it all.” Benjamin looked down curiously at Kira. “You can read each other’s minds? I thought I heard you say something.” She nodded. “All my Chosen can read mine, when I so choose. The joined who are linked together can read each other’s as well.” “Will I do this link thing?” Reading minds sounded good to him. It wasn’t an enhancement a Suprahuman could have. “Yes,” Kira sounded distracted. “Later on tonight.” Benjamin thought he heard Lucas say, “Shit!” Gallegar smoothed the hair from Kira’s face. It was sticky with Benjamin’s blood. “What will you do with Superjack, Sovereign? As a leader I know that punishment should be given quickly. But it is a difficult decision.” 221

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Benjamin thought for a minute. He’d made his decision the second he saw himself pinned to the table in Kira’s vision. It wasn’t something he wanted to do, but Superjack needed to be executed. For the good of all his people. “Hold him,” he said to two large Suprahumans who stood in the crowd. They took Superjack by his skinny arms and turned him to face Benjamin. Benjamin stood tall, and strong above him. “As The Sovereign of the Suprahumans, I declare you, Myron Feldmen, a traitor to your people.” Benjamin glared down at the pathetic young man. “You have lied and cheated in order to promote yourself, not caring who you would hurt in the process. For these crimes I sentence you…to death.” He pulled one of his daggers out of his waistband, and held it above Feldmen. “It is already marked with my blood. Now yours will stain it as well.” “My Lord…” Kira’s voice was soft. Benjamin blinked at her. She had stopped him just as he was on a roll. The thing was hard enough to do without having to stop for conversation. “What is it?” he asked, trying not to show his irritation. Kira came and stood next to him. She was still covered in his blood, but he didn’t think she had noticed it yet. Any other woman would have been screaming for a bath. “Sovereign, as I told you…I am The Peacekeeper. I have been sent to help you take care of your people.” “Yes, I remember that.” Benjamin frowned at her. “What does that have to do with this?” Kira sighed. “I am also here to help you discipline your people. You may use me to do so.” “How would you do that?” Benjamin looked her up and down as if trying to find some hidden strength she could use. 222

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Sovereign,” Kira whispered, but her voice carried through the room. “I know The Words of Death for your kind.” There was utter silence in the room. No one said anything. Danolas wondered if the Suprahumans had heard of the legend of the Words of Death. His answer was in the suddenly pale faces that filled the room. They’d heard all right. Benjamin cleared his throat. “You…Kira, know the Words of Death that can destroy my people?” “Yes, Sovereign. Because you have freely joined with me, I put these words at your disposal to use when needed.” “Noooooo…” shrieked Myron. He tried to jerk free of the two men, but they held him fast. Benjamin stood staring at Kira, his mind in a whirl. This beautiful woman was in possession of the greatest curse on earth. What should I do? She was giving it to him freely. Should I use it? He looked at Myron. He was to die anyway. What a lesson for the rest of the Enhanced, especially those who had chosen to fight alongside Myron. He looked at Gallegar. “Does she know the Words for your people?” “Yes,” Gallegar answered. “And all the others as well.” “We have seen and felt the Words in action, Sovereign. They are to be believed.” Lucas’ voice was hoarse as he shared his thoughts. “You would do this for me?” Benjamin swung around to look at Kira. She looked so tiny standing there. “This is a horrible thing.” “It is one of the reasons I have come. To make the Words available to those I join with.” “As a leader, I would never ask someone else to do what I would not. But I can’t use these words, can I?” “No, Benjamin.” The words were sad. 223

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He looked around at the four other men who had joined with her. They all nodded gravely to him. They understood what it was he was asking, and felt she should do it. Benjamin heaved a sigh. “It will be done,” he commanded. “Myron Feldmen…stand before us.” The two men dragged him closer, Myron screaming obscenities at them all. Kira stepped closer and laid a hand on Myron’s chest. Out of his mind with fear, he spat at her. It oozed wetly down Kira’s cheek. Benjamin swore and quickly wiped it off her cheek. Kira thanked him quietly and then looked back at Myron. “Be still,” she ordered him, wrapping him securely in her power. She nodded to the men. “Release him and move away. No one may touch him or the same fate may befall him.” She stared into Myron’s rolling eyes. “Flanesh oche bashtel Domnar sadit lemant.” Myron’s body arched almost in half. It vibrated as if something was shaking it. He screamed, his voice shrill in the closed room. Kira said the words a second time, her voice low but firm. “Flanesh oche bashtel Domnar sadit lemant.” The words hit Myron between the eyes. He fell to the floor then was up again. His feet moved, running in place. He moved so fast, his legs were a blur. His mouth opened in a soundless scream. Kira looked at Benjamin. He tensed his jaw, but nodded. As Kira began the third repetition, her Chosen willed their strength and love to her. Benjamin felt it and automatically added his. It wasn’t until then, that he realized that this was the first time Kira would actually execute someone. 224

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

225

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 13 “Flanesh oche bashtel Domnar sadit lemant.” Now, Myron was moving so fast his feet were burning, his body on fire. The Words had taken his own enhancement and used it against him…to kill him. A second later, he gave an anguished scream and with a final spasm of pain, sank to the floor. He lay unmoving. A moment later…he was dead. Kira turned to Benjamin. Her eyes were full of tears and Benjamin pulled her against his chest to comfort her. He’d felt the agony she’d gone through when she had said the words a third time. He looked out at his people. Some were crying. Some were afraid. Some may even have been angry, but every one of them looked at him and Kira with awe on their faces. “It is done,” he announced, his voice rough with emotion. “The penalty for treason is death. The Peacekeeper has given him death. All should remember this.” He looked at the prisoners who were staring at Kira with expressions of abject horror. “Take them to the security chamber. I will see to their punishments tomorrow.” As the group was led away and the dead were carried out, Benjamin took his daggers from his waistband and pounded the ends together. “People have died here tonight,” he shouted, his voice ringing out in the room. “But most of those who died were 226

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining traitors to our kind. We have won a great victory. I see food and drink has already been prepared. Let us toast the fallen and celebrate our fortune.” He gathered Kira under his arm and motioned to the others in her group. “We have new friends and allies. Those who will support us and help keep our people safe. I have joined with Kira, who is The Peacekeeper. Her allies are now a part of our people. Treat them with respect and care. Now eat, drink and tell stories. The night has just begun!” The crowd gave a ragged cheer, as if wanting to get in the spirit of things, but not knowing quite how. Most moved directly to the bar at the side of the room. “Benjamin…” Kira turned to him and laid a soft hand on his brand. He tried not to flinch, but she saw it. “This is painful.” She motioned to his brand and then to her own. “As is mine.” “Yeah,” he snorted derisively. “But it is the least of my worries tonight.” “What our Lady means,” Danolas said with a laugh, “is neither needs to stay painful. Allow me.” Swiftly he spoke the healing incantation over Kira’s brand. She sighed in relief. Benjamin stretched out his hand and Danolas did the spell. Afterwards, Benjamin flexed his hand in amazement. It was as if he had never been burned. Gallegar touched Kira’s bloody face, and then pulled at his own clothing. “Would you have a place where A Ghra… and I can clean up? This blood makes it very difficult for me to concentrate.” “Of course,” Benjamin answered. “I have clothes you may borrow as well.” “My thanks,” returned Gallegar. I think Kira could use some too.” 227

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Oh, Lucas,” Kira mourned. “I ruined your shirt. I am sorry.” Lucas laughed. “Not a problem, honey. I’ll buy you another one since you looked so damn good in it.” “If you will come this way, I’ll take you to my rooms. You can shower and change there. The rest of you, make yourselves at home. There is plenty of food. Perhaps we can talk more about this joining I have entered.” “Great, I’m starving.” Lucas rubbed his hands together, his thoughts on his stomach. “I haven’t eaten anything since early this—” “We will be glad to answer anything we can for you, Benjamin,” Danolas interrupted, throwing Lucas a scolding glance. Lucas grinned sheepishly. **** Benjamin showed Gallegar and Kira to his personal chambers. There was a full bath in the bedroom, as well as one next to the sitting room. He found Kira a pair of navy sweats that were too big for her, but she would be able to lace them up so they didn’t fall from her slim waist. She was glad to peel her clothes off and climb in the bathroom shower. “We can find our own way back down.” Gallegar unbuttoned his shirt in the sitting room. “Your people will need to speak to you. You don’t have to wait.” Benjamin handed Gallegar another set of clothes, black, just like he was wearing. He grabbed some clothes for himself. He would shower in one of the guest rooms down the hall, before returning to the party. Gallegar stripped the ruined clothes from his body. He took a quick shower, wanting to beat Kira out so they could talk. He had just pulled on his jeans and was toweling his long hair dry, 228

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining when his supersensitive hearing caught the sound of the water in the other bathroom being turned off. Without thinking, he walked into the bedroom and knocked on the bathroom door. He didn’t wait for an answer but pushed open the door and went in. Kira was standing next to the large marble bathtub wrapped in nothing but a fluffy white towel, her eyes wide in surprise. Gallegar’s body went as hard as a stone. His loins suddenly ached with need. She was so beautiful. Suddenly, there was nothing more he wanted to do than touch her fragrant damp body. He walked toward her like a man in a dream. All doubts of making love to her disappeared in a white-hot ball of desire. Kira watched as he came closer. She knew she should protest his being here, but her voice had dried up in her throat. When he reached out and touched her, the very air left her lungs. Sparkling pleasure traced her skin wherever his hand touched. By the time his lips bent to take hers, she thought she might go mad. Her head whirled with passion. She felt the hardness of his body against hers and it thrilled her. Instinctively, she moved against him. She heard him groan deep in his throat, and he pulled her tighter to him. He lifted her off the floor and moved quickly so her back slapped against the bathroom door. He pressed his body to hers, fitting the bulge in his jeans into the notch at her thighs. Gallegar groaned as his lips slanted over hers. She tasted of spice and darkness. Of moonlight and flowered meadows. He pulled her tighter against him, uncaring of her dampness, but needing the softness of her body. His mouth moved over hers hungrily. He’d been starved for her since last night and had made do with a few kisses and touches. Now they were all alone. He parted her lips and plundered the bounty within. 229

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “A Ghra…” When Gallegar spoke, his voice was rough. “I love you. I want you.” His hands moved from her waist to her naked thighs. He stroked them, feeling his own urgency rise. “Let me love you…I need…” He took her mouth again, not able to finish the thought. Kira couldn’t answer. She was too caught up in the feelings he was producing in her to say anything. She gasped when he pulled away from the door and carried her into the bedroom. She fell onto the bed, Gallegar following her down. They fit perfectly together, his loins pushed firmly against hers. An ache began to form in her belly. The movement of his hardness against her made tendrils of feeling swirl up and run through her. She moaned as he pressed light kisses up her jaw line. Feathery kisses that traveled across her cheeks, eyelids and down her nose, before returning and nibbling on her swollen mouth. He raised his head, breathing rapidly. His eyes were the greenest she had ever seen them, and they stared deep inside her, like he was trying to see into her soul. “I love you, A Ghra… I have loved you for years.” Tears come to her eyes and he bent and gently kissed them away. She sighed with emotion, her body moving with her need to be closer to him. “Mo Chridhe…My Heart…” Kira mind-spoke him, saying words in Gaelic she didn’t even know she knew. Warmth exploded in his chest when she spoke to him in the tongue of his youth. His heart beat so hard, he thought it might burst. He gave a brief thought to what the Power had told them last night, but it was pushed away by the ever deepening need that filled his heart. His lips fastened back on hers with an insistence that brought tears back to her eyes. His hands began to move over her body, gently, possessively. With a tug, he pulled the towel 230

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining from her breasts and his hand cupped the warm flesh. Their groans mingled, as he moved a thumb back and forth over a dusky nipple, causing it to bead in arousal. “Gallegar!” she gasped out loud, tearing her mouth from his. She arched her back instinctively to bring herself closer. He growled as he forced her head back so he could capture her lips’ sweetness one more time. His hand moved to her other breast, and pleasured it as he had done the first. “Touch me, A Ghra…” He spoke against her mouth. “I need to feel your hands on me.” With one hand, he took hers and placed it on his naked chest. She cautiously moved her hand over him, glorying in the soft hair that covered him. She felt the ripples of movement under her hand, as she gave him pleasure. Her fingers touched one flat nipple, and he jumped, groaning loud in her mouth. Startled, she jerked away. “No…no…A Ghra… More…please.” Gallegar grabbed her hand, and put it back on his chest. She continued touching him, her fingers circling his flat nipples as his mouth devoured hers. She could feel his fangs slide against her tongue, careful not to bite her. Unable to stand any more, he captured her hand and dragged it down his body. “Feel what you do to me. See how I need you.” He pushed her hand around his jean-covered erection and pressed himself to her. His shaft jerked and thickened even more at her touch. Kira felt need thunder through her. Her breath came in short little gasps as she felt his body pulse against hers. She wanted more. To open herself up to him. To give him everything he needed. He bent his head and kissed the top of her breast. Licking gently, he trailed down to one pert nipple, and then with a little growl of desire, took it between his teeth. 231

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining She cried out and bucked underneath him. The movement pressed him deep into her thighs. He let go of the nipple, moaning. A light sweat broke out on his body. “Gently, love,” he panted as he fought for control. He moved his hands down to her hips to keep her still before he returned to nibbling and kissing her breasts. His tongue flicked lightly back and forth across each of her aroused nipples. Kira thought her body was going to explode. The need that rose up in her at Gallegar’s touch was making it hard to think of anything else. She writhed against him, as he spoke Gaelic love words to her. The feel of his mouth tugging on her breasts sent all coherent thought out the window. Her legs parted instinctively to allow him better access. He felt her body soften…felt it open for him. His need blazed and he dropped a hand to open his jeans. He grabbed at the zipper, frantic to be inside her, but careful, knowing he was so aroused he could cause himself damage if he wasn’t. “A Ghra…” he moaned, then kissed her. “I wanted our first time together to be in my own bed at Sanctuary, but I can’t wait. You are too desirable…” Pushing his jeans and underwear out of the way, he pressed his naked shaft against her softness and moved it gently against her. It was all he could do not to bury himself deeply inside her. The feel of her moist lips against the head of his penis brought him close to exploding. Reaching down, he ran his hand up the inside of her thigh. “Tell me you’ll come home with me tonight so I can spend the day loving you the way you should be loved.” He kissed her again…hard. “I promise to make up for my rush…but now I need you.” Kira blinked. She felt him moving between her legs. Her body cried out for his possession. When she felt the alien touch 232

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining of his penis rubbing against her, her breath caught in her throat. A niggling doubt suddenly jumped to the surface. “Mo Chridhe…” She took his face in her hands. “I want to love you. I want to go home with you when the night is over and sleep and love in your arms. My body cries out for you. But what of the Power? Are we supposed to be doing this? And what about Lucas? I do not want to hurt him by going home with you.” Gallegar went totally still. The hot desire that consumed him turned instantly into enraged anger. Adjusting his pants, he levered himself off of Kira with an upward flying movement that only a vampire could manage. A second later he stood next to the bed, glaring down at her. To Kira it looked as though he had levitated off of her with a rush of psychic wind. He was so beautiful standing there she couldn’t help but put her hand out to him. But he ignored it, looking down at her with a furious expression. “Why would you bring up the shapeshifter at a time like this?” Gallegar vibrated with the need to bury himself in her body. His thoughts were turbulent. He skipped over the first part of her concern and focused on the second. She dropped her hand. She self-consciously pulled the towel up to cover her breasts, but by doing so exposed the soft triangle of curls between her thighs. Gallegar’s eyes darkened. “I care about Lucas. I do not want to hurt him.” “What about me?” Gallegar questioned, his body painful, his heart aching. “Do you care you have hurt me by speaking of him?” Kira’s eyes filled with tears. “Of course I do! I love you. I want to be with you. Do you think I was pretending all that went on before?” She hung her head. “But is it the right thing to do? I have feelings for Lucas I do not under—” 233

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar came at her with a roar. His hands came down on both sides of her trapping her firmly beneath him. His still throbbing erection pressed down on her. She cringed in surprise. “What feelings?” Gallegar shouted. “Do you feel for him as you do for me? Do you want him to touch you like I have? Do you respond to him the way you do to me?” He captured her face and pressed a hard kiss to her lips. He forced his way inside, ravaging her mouth with his tongue. After a moment, he pulled his mouth from hers, his chest heaving. He looked into her eyes. She blushed and looked away, not knowing how to explain what she felt about Lucas. She didn’t even understand it herself. “Did more happen in his bed than a simple joining? Have you already given up your innocence?” Gallegar’s tone was bitter. He rolled off of her and stared up at the ceiling. “I could have taken you last night, before you even knew Lucas.” His voice was full of pain. “Then you would have been mine.” Tears slipped down Kira’s cheeks. She sat up and put a hand on his bare chest. He flinched, but didn’t move away. “I love you, Gallegar. I do want you. What we just shared… I feel like I was at the entrance to heaven then I was cast out into hell. I want to be with you. My body aches at the thought, but my mind advises caution.” She tried to touch Gallegar’s face, but with a lightning quick move, he rolled away to sit at the edge of the bed with his back to her. Kira fought the tears that burned in her throat. “I do have feelings for Lucas. I am attracted to him.” Kira saw Gallegar’s back tense at her words. “But he has never touched me this way. He has never seen me naked. He has never touched my breasts or lain against me throbbing with need as you have. We shared a bed to sleep in. We shared a kiss the next morning to say goodbye. I know he cares about me.” “He is in love with you.” Gallegar’s voice was flat. 234

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “And that is why I cannot hurt him. No matter how I feel about you, he too is a part of me. If he were to know what had happened here tonight, his pain would be great. How could I live with myself?” Gallegar got up from the bed. His motions were that of a very old man, and when he turned to look at Kira, the anguish on his face made her catch her breath. “And how can you live with yourself, knowing what you are doing to me?” He walked around to Kira’s side of the bed. “I also am in love with you. I want to spend my eternity with you. I see you and my mind goes blank. I touch you and my body shatters in need. The thought of you wanting another makes me wild. I am a part of you, not only because of the joining, but because you are my destiny.” He touched her cheek. “You must make a choice, Kira. I will not be kept as a stud in your stable, while you decide which one of us suits you best. I will be the only one in your bed when the time comes or I will not be around at all. Perhaps the Power stopped us tonight to keep you pure. If so, I should be grateful but I find I can’t be, for now I know your true feelings for your wolf. I will not share you, A Ghra… not in this way. If you want to be with me, you have to tell him so.” Gallegar walked away from the bed, pausing at the door. He turned back and the look he gave her was full of pain and pride. He walked out without another word. Kira lay on the bed. She heard Gallegar moving around. He finished dressing in the other room. It wasn’t until she heard the door slam behind him as he left that she allowed the tears to fall. She turned over and pressed her face into the pillow as huge sobs racked her body. She hurt so badly. Her body still ached with longing for Gallegar’s possession. Her heart felt like it was broken. Her mind scrambled in turmoil over what they had said to each other. It was a pain without end. 235

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining After a long while, Kira’s crying slowed. Her head hurt and her nose and eyes felt swollen. But the worst was her heart. The ache in her body might go away, but she was very much afraid the pain in her heart would never end. She didn’t understand her feelings for them both, but she did enjoy both their affections. It made her feel safe and loved. He was right when he said it wasn’t fair…to either of them. But what am I to do? She and Gallegar had been warned last night not to make love to each other. Was that just for last night, or forever? If it was forever, then she couldn’t let them think they might have a life together, either him or Lucas. But if had only been for last night, was it Gallegar she should make love to, or Lucas? She was attracted to both of them. Kira bit her lip and then gave a sob, as she remembered Gallegar’s way of preventing her from doing that. She had known them both for such a short time. Can I make such an important decision in such a short time? Should I? I am confused…my body is confused. But is my heart? Gallegar was the one she thought of, dreamed about. But she had enjoyed herself in Lucas’ arms when he kissed her. Kira gave a sigh. Gallegar was right. What she was doing was wrong. It was wrong for her to allow both of them to be so close to her. She got out of bed, her body sore from Gallegar’s handling. Tears came to her eyes again as she thought of what had happened. She put on the borrowed sweat suit and her socks and shoes, wishing she had kept her mouth shut. Her body and her heart desperately wanted to know what making love with Gallegar would be like. The thought brought quick heat to her cheeks. Kira rummaged through Benjamin’s bathroom drawers and found a hairbrush. Sitting at the edge of the bed, she began to 236

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining brush out her tangled hair. Her eyes filled again, remembering Gallegar wrapping his hands in her hair to drag her mouth to his. Oh God, she had handled it so poorly. How can I face him? How will I face any of them again? She continued to brush her hair, the rhythmic strokes soothing to her tired mind. Kira’s motions suddenly slowed. The hairbrush dropped to the floor unnoticed as her eyes lost their focus and began a steady glow. She rose in an uncoordinated movement and walked dazedly to the door. She had gone back into a trance. To protect her from the pain of her argument with Gallegar or just to keep her moving in the correct direction, Kira didn’t know. She was aware of it happening, but didn’t fight it. The numbness felt just fine. She walked to the stairs and carefully made her way down to the twenty-ninth floor. There she boarded the elevator and was carried back down to the lobby. No one tried to stop her. She met no one who would. Kira pointed her finger at the lock on the front door and it fell apart with a sizzle of metal. The door opened at her touch, and soon she was standing out in the cool air of early morning. She turned, shivering and began walking into the night, deep into the upper city…alone. **** When Gallegar returned downstairs, he stayed in the shadows, far away from his companions. He was heartsick, both with himself and with Kira. He couldn’t believe she had done what she did. And he couldn’t believe how he had treated her afterwards. He leaned his head back against the wall and groaned as he remembered the feeling of Kira’s soft body beneath his. Then he flinched at the memory of the harsh kiss he had forced on her. He shook his head slowly back and forth. He had known her only two days and already she had him tied up in knots. He loved her. 237

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining But now it seemed she didn’t love him. At least…not like he wanted her to. If he was a human, he would be talking happy ever after, with a little house and picket fence. As a vampire, he wanted her love through all eternity. It had been their vow to each other when they joined. Had she not meant it? He didn’t know what Kira wanted. He had thought she wanted him, but tonight had showed him how wrong he was. She cared just as much about the shapeshifter as she did him. He thought of Lucas. No matter how hard he tried, he couldn’t dislike the man. He loved Kira too. If she did choose Lucas instead—that thought ripped through him like a knife— but if Lucas was chosen, she would get a great guy. His friend. Gallegar sighed and shut his eyes at the pain. It just meant if Kira chose Lucas instead of him, he would never be able to handle seeing either of them ever again. Patrick popped in next to him, making him start. “Where’s Kira?” Gallegar pointed up the stairs. “She’s getting dressed. She’ll be down in a minute.” Patrick narrowed his eyes, looking at Gallegar’s tense mouth. “Are you okay?” Gallegar frowned at him, wishing for a drink. “Fine.” “It’s just that you look like a man who was expecting a taste of honey and found vinegar in the glass instead.” Patrick tapped his own mouth knowingly. “Stay out of it, Ethereal. It is between Kira and me.” Gallegar ran a tongue over his lips. They were sore. “As long as we are joined with the gal, it does touch us.” Patrick held his hands up, as Gallegar pushed off the wall at him. “Whoa now. We felt when her shielding went up, Gallegar. And we still can’t feel her. That makes us concerned. We’re supposed to be.” 238

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar let out a deep breath. He forced himself to lean back from Patrick. “We argued. About…us.” He shoved a distracted hand through his long hair. “I was angry. I left. She still had to get dressed.” Gallegar didn’t realize what he had revealed, but Patrick’s eyebrows shot up in surprise. “She loves you.” Patrick was offhand about it. It made Gallegar want to hit him. “Not enough,” he answered hoarsely. “She loves another as well.” “Lucas.” Patrick saw Gallegar look at him in shock. “It’s not a surprise. I could sense that much during the joining. I wouldn’t worry about it if I were you. She loves all of us.” Gallegar didn’t say a word. “’Course, you’re not me and you’re in love with the gal. That right there says you’re gonna have trouble.” “I will not share her…” Patrick snorted. “Hells bells, man, you have to share her with all of us. That’s what the joining thing is all about. Maybe when this is all over things will be different, but until then…remember this.” “Remember what?” “You got something none of us will ever have. You were the first.” Gallegar glared at him. “I wish to be the last!” “And you might be. But I’ll tell you what, ol’ son, you won’t have a chance if you push her into the shapeshifter’s arms.” Patrick could see that hit the vampire hard. “When she and I joined, she told me how afraid she was that she might hurt y’all. This whole thing has happened so fast she doesn’t know how to handle it. Jesus, she hasn’t been alive but a week. She may have 239

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining all the looks and emotions of an adult woman, but she hasn’t had a lot of practice.” He could tell Gallegar was finally listening. “Here she is, brand new on this earth and suddenly she is just flooded with all this emotion and love. She’s surrounded now by five men, who would pretty much do anything for her. Who love her. She’s got two men who feel she should belong to them. That can be a major recipe for disaster…if the man she finds herself in love with won’t accept she needs time to work it all out.” Gallegar heaved a sigh. He stared at Patrick, a mocking smile on his face. “Were you this smart before you died, or did it just come to you afterwards?” Patrick grinned, tilting an imaginary hat. “I’m just a wise man.” He grew solemn. “And a man who loves Kira, but will never be in love with her.” “I think I need to go back up and make things right.” Gallegar headed for the stairs as he spoke. “I’ll be back in a while.” Patrick saluted him before he popped out of sight. Gallegar made his way back up the stairs. Patrick’s words had given him hope, as well as shaming him. He hadn’t given Kira any time to adjust to her new humanity. Even if she had been wrong, playing Lucas and him off each other, she hadn’t done it intentionally. If he loved her, he had to give her time enough to find out what she wanted. And while she was doing that, he would make sure she knew being his mate was what she wanted. Starting right now. He opened the door to Benjamin’s room and, crossing to the bedroom door, gave a little knock. “A Ghra…” He stepped through the door as he spoke. “I wish to talk…” Frowning, Gallegar looked around the room. He walked swiftly to the bathroom, but he saw nothing but her bloodied clothes. Picking them up, he noticed her socks and 240

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining shoes were gone. Swiftly, he went back into the bedroom. The sweat suit was gone, but he found a hairbrush on the floor. There was no sign of Kira anywhere. Panic crawled up into his throat. Where is she? Quickly, he opened himself up to her. Uncaring of who heard, he called out to her as he searched for her aura. He heard…he felt…nothing. A pounding of feet up the stairs told him the others had heard him calling for her. They all appeared in the doorway, concern on their faces. “What’s going on?” Danolas was first to ask. “I can’t find Kira.” Gallegar stood helplessly, her old clothes in his hands. “I left her here to get dressed. She’s gone. I can’t sense her anywhere.” “What the hell you mean you left her here? You were supposed to stay with her!” Lucas clenched his fists angrily. Angry color ran up Gallegar’s neck. “I know. I…we…” His gaze caught Patrick’s, who shrugged. Gallegar’s shoulders slumped. “We had a fight. I left because I was angry.” “You had a fight?” Benjamin’s voice was incredulous. “I thought you two were…well, you know.” The Suprahuman looked embarrassed. Lucas growled and started forward, but Danolas laid a stilling hand on him. “Peace, brothers. If Kira had been abducted, she would have called for help.” “Her shields were up.” Gallegar’s voice was hoarse. He put the clothes down on the bed. “She could still have called to us if she wanted our help.” Danolas looked around at the other men. “I think she probably left on her own.” “Oh Christ, not another one.” Lucas looked at both Patrick and Benjamin. “No offense, but the roster is gettin’ kinda full.”

241

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “What the hell are you talking about?” Benjamin sat down on his bed. Everyone pretended not to notice how messed up the covers were. Lucas felt a stab of pain deep in his gut as he looked at them. Gallegar wouldn’t meet his eyes. Patrick looked a Danolas. “You think she has gone after another to join with.” The witch shrugged. “She joined with three of us last night. It’s not a stretch to think the Power would command her to do three tonight.” “Why didn’t she come find us?” Lucas asked. He snorted. “Never mind, I think I know. Better none of us, than having to be around you, eh Gallegar?” Anger jumped into Gallegar’s eyes, but he refused to give the shapeshifter reason to fight. “Yes, Lucas. You may be right.” His voice was strangled in his throat. “If she was angry with me, she may have not wanted to have anything to do with any of us. For that, I am sorry.” “Y’all seem to forget. Kira ain’t stupid. She wouldn’t go off in a snit.” Patrick floated over and stood next to Gallegar. “She may have gone back into a trance,” Danolas mused. “If it held her as it did on our way to the Suprahuman institute, she may have just gone unthinkingly.” “Are you tellin’ me she’s out there on the streets alone? That’s almost worse than being kidnapped.” The wolfman paced back and forth. “Don’t forget, Kira’s got powers of her own. She can probably take care of herself.” Lucas swung around at Benjamin’s words. “She may be able to take care of things, but she shouldn’t have to. That’s why we’re here.” “We should probably make sure she isn’t somewhere in the building. I’ll have my shades check.” Patrick disappeared. 242

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “If she has left, who would she go to?” Gallegar began pacing the room himself in his agitation. “What leader might she contact?” Benjamin looked at the other men. “You know the players better than I do. I didn’t even know you existed.” Lucas chewed his lips, as he tried to think. “There’s no one left in the Lower City. Leastwise, not anyone I can imagine Kira wanting to join with.” Gallegar nodded. “You’re right. There are only the corrupt supernaturals left. Those who would do evil, rather than good. But who is left in the city that might be considered admirable to join with?” They heard the sound of footsteps and Jorad, the acolyte rushed in. “High Priest! Someone has disengaged the spell I put on the front door.” Danolas frowned. “With another spell?” To change another’s magick took great skill. “No, my Lord. The lock was destroyed. It was melted from the inside.” Lucas grunted. “Well, that tells us Kira is gone. Now we just have to figure out where. Who could she be headed for?” Danolas gasped, and moved to the door, with Gallegar following close behind. “What is it?” Lucas wanted to know. He and Benjamin followed them out the door and down the hall to the elevator. “There is only one other leader I can think of in all of the city the Power might send Kira to.” Danolas looked at Gallegar, and realization bloomed in the vampire’s eyes. “Probably the most cunning of us all.” Gallegar looked back at the two, just as Patrick appeared out of thin air behind them. “She has gone to meet with the Faerie Emperor.” 243

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

244

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 14 Kira felt she had been walking forever. Her feet hurt and since she had left her coat in the Mercedes and hadn’t stopped for it when she had been summoned from the Suprahuman’s building, she was cold down to her bones. The streets had been empty. She had come across a squeaking rat and a half-starved dog, but it was late enough that few humans were walking around. She saw cars go by, but none had stopped to bother her. She thought once she was glad Gallegar had gotten her a change of clothes. All she would have needed was someone to see her walking down the street covered in blood. But the thought of Gallegar made her heart hurt, so she tried thinking about where she was going instead. The Power led her farther into the city. She walked for several miles before she passed out of the business part of town and through neighborhoods of exquisitely kept houses. The trance she was in kept her purpose steady, but didn’t take away her awareness, so she could tell when she left the sidewalks and started along a waterfront area. She continued walking, curious now as to where she might end up. The evening was dark and spooky, and Kira could hear the sounds of the night animals as they snuffled their way along the ground. Still, even in a trance, she knew she didn’t need to be afraid. After a long walk, Kira stopped at the edge of the water to get her bearings. She saw she had arrived at the back of a baseball 245

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining stadium. Picking her way carefully along the back fence, she finally found herself standing at the entrance of Pacific Bell Stadium—the home of the San Francisco Giants. She recognized it from a poster she had seen at the restaurant Danolas had taken her to. A frown crossed her face. She missed Danolas. But thinking of him made her think of…others, and she cut that off quickly. She was led to a side entrance. She touched it, and it gave way to her magick with a soft…snick. Moving slowly, she walked across the wide entrance and through the archways that led to the stands. Grimacing at the pain in her feet, Kira made her way down the hundreds of stadium steps to the baseball field. The Mound of the Faerie wasn’t always housed in the middle of a baseball field. For the safety of their people, the faerie had spelled it so it was never in the same place twice. Plus, it couldn’t be seen by a normal human, so it was rarely discovered. The faerie people consisted of many type of supernatural creatures, all grouped under the heading of faerie. Elves, Gnomes, Trolls, Goblins and Dwarves fell under this category, as did dozens of other lesser-known faeries. Most were immortal. The faerie were the holders of the old magick. Magick that existed before the creation of the world. It was different than the magick a witch would wield. Most witches got their power from the earth, whereas a faerie carried the power inside themselves. The faerie considered a witch’s power…new magick, and something to look down upon. Kira stood in front of the silent mound. It was several feet taller than her and looked to be about thirty feet wide. There was no movement, so she just waited. After a time, the mound trembled. A passageway shimmered into being directly in front of her. From it stepped three faeries. 246

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining One was small and dark green. A goblin, with bulbous eyes, long skinny nose and sharp teeth. It had skinny arms and legs and was totally hairless. It held a faerie animal on a leash. The animal looked somewhat like a cross between an anteater and a wolf, with large tuffs of hair covering all of its body except its elongated snout. The third faerie was as beautiful as the others were ugly. With the pointed ears he had, Kira knew him to be an elf. He had shining silver hair that reached to his waist. His face was lean with a beauty that shone in the night sky. He was tall and thin and wore a crown of stars on his head. It was this faerie who spoke. “What dost thou want here, child of man?” Kira felt the trance lift from her. She smiled as her power stirred within her. “I wish to meet with the Emperor of the Faerie. Please take me to him.” The shining elf made no response to her statement, but just studied her for a long moment. A wind began to pick up around the mound and Kira felt herself begin to shiver. The goblin and his odd-looking pet didn’t move. “Thou speak as though thou knowest of my kind, yet thou art human. How can this be?” Kira sighed. “I am who and what I am. I will explain everything to your Emperor.” “Sssheee mussst be sssearched.” The goblin spoke in a sibilant tone. The ant/wolf slobbered at his feet. “Wilt thou agree to this?” The elf pointed to the goblin’s pet. “This is a Slornoth. A magick seeker. He will see if thou art true magick or counterfeit.” Kira looked askance at the slobbering creature. “If he must seek me, he has my permission.”

247

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The goblin excitedly brought the creature to Kira. It began circling her, its snout sniffing the air. After several times around, it stopped, looked at its master and whined. “Sssheee isss sssheilding,” the goblin spat. The elf looked at Kira. “Thou must drop thy shielding so the seeker can do its work.” Kira looked at the three faerie. She didn’t want to drop her shielding completely. She didn’t want the animal to know what her magick was. She suddenly realized she wished her Chosen were here. She had been a fool to allow herself to be entranced and go off without them. But she was here now and had to get inside the mound. Sighing again, she concentrated and dropped the shielding just enough to let magick pour through. The Slornoth went crazy. It bustled around Kira, making happy little noises deep in its throat. It whined to its master, who pursed his lips and looked sour at the outcome of the seeking. The elf was gratified. “Thou dost carry true magick. I will take thee for an audience with the Emperor.” The goblin and the Slornoth moved ahead of the elf through the shimmering doorway. The elf turned to Kira and held out his hand. “Come, thou art now a guest of the faerie people.” She took it, and together they walked through the shimmering doorway, which faded from sight after their passage. **** “So just where is this Faerie Emperor?” Lucas asked. He was sitting in the back of the Mercedes with Patrick and Benjamin. Danolas had shotgun this time. Danolas shook his head. “That’s the hard part. The home of the Emperor, The Faerie Mound, doesn’t stay in one place. It moves around.” 248

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “How the hell do we find it then?” Benjamin asked. “How do we find Kira?” “We wait until we can sense her.” Gallegar drove slowly down the streets in a residential neighborhood. “We know Kira’s aura went this way. If we have to, we can track her.” “This sucks,” Lucas grumbled. “I’m gonna tan her hide for running away from us.” No one else said anything, but all were in agreement. No matter what had happened between Kira and Gallegar, Kira’s leaving had been a bad idea. “Tell us about the Faerie. All I’ve ever heard was legends.” Patrick smiled. “They’re immortal, so none come to my part of town.” Danolas turned and spoke over the back of his seat. “They are a people of tremendous power. Their magick has been around since the beginning of the universe. They keep to themselves and don’t mingle with other supernaturals. As you said, they are immortal, and it’s said they carry the cunning of the ages in their souls. Most of what we know is from the stories and legends we read when we were children.” He glanced back at the second car in the side mirror. “There are stories that they mate with humans to keep their bloodlines fresh. Then they steal the immortal child and replace it with a changeling, who dies soon after.” “Nice,” grunted Lucas. “But none of that helps us find them.” “We aren’t looking for them,” Gallegar put in. “We’re looking for Kira.” “Who we wouldn’t be looking for now, if you hadn’t left her in the first place,” Lucas shot back at him. Gallegar’s fingers clenched on the wheel. He took a deep breath, holding onto his temper. Lucas had been sniping at him since Kira had disappeared. 249

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “We will find her,” was all he said. “Is their magick stronger than yours?” Benjamin asked, trying to change the subject. He had been impressed by what he had seen Danolas and his acolytes do. “They’d say it is. But I am not sure. It’s probably just different. I’ve never had a chance to go head to head with a faerie.” “Hopefully you won’t tonight.” Lucas was nervously drumming his fingers on the armrest. “This is crazy,” he finally said out loud. “We’re never gonna find her, just driving around in a car. There has gotta be a better way!” “I’m open for suggestions,” Gallegar bit out. He’d just about had it with Lucas and his pessimism. “Don’t look at me. I’m not the one who lost her in the first place. This is your mess to clean up.” “That’s it!” Gallegar pulled to the side of the road and slammed on his brakes. The four men went flying, their bodies hitting what was in front of them. They all stared at Gallegar, shocked into speechlessness. Gallegar sat still, his arms braced on the wheel, his body tense. “I know I screwed up. I shouldn’t have argued with Kira. I shouldn’t have left her alone. I should have stayed with her and brought her down to the party.” He turned and looked right at Lucas. His eyes were like emeralds in his face. “Do you think I wanted this to happen? I’m in love with Kira. She is more important to me than my own life. The thought of her out here by herself, doing whatever it is she is doing without us scares the hell out of me. I would do anything to get her back safely.” They sat silent as Gallegar sighed and ran a hand through his already tousled hair. “Would taking a stake to my heart make 250

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining you feel any better, Lucas?” he asked quietly. “Will yelling at me make Kira return to us?” His gaze met Lucas’ once more. “I know we both love and want her, but we can’t let it get in the way of why she was sent here.” He looked down, and his jaw tensed. “I forgot that once already this evening. I forgot Kira is more than just the woman I love, and so we hurt each other. I would give anything if it hadn’t happened. I would give my life for her…just as I know you would. Can’t we put this behind us and work together?” Lucas sat there, immobilized by Gallegar’s speech. He could sense his sincerity and his anguish through their link. He probably could have already, if he had let himself see it. He was just too angry at Gallegar. Not just for leaving Kira alone, he admitted to himself. He was angry Gallegar had spent time loving her. Lucas wasn’t sure how far it had gone, but he was pretty sure they hadn’t made love. Gallegar didn’t have the look of a satisfied man, just an unhappy one. The bottom line was he was jealous. The same emotion that seemed to plague them over and over again. He didn’t know how he could help it, but he knew he had to try. He laughed to himself. The funny thing was when he wasn’t mad at Gallegar, Lucas thought of him as an all right guy…for a vampire. “You’re right,” he said, leaning forward and putting his hand on Gallegar’s shoulder. “It’s time to end this. We’re a team, but we haven’t been acting like one. I don’t blame you for losing Kira. That’s not why I was mad.” Their eyes met, and understanding flashed between them. “We all love her. We’re the luckiest men in this city to be with such a woman. Even though she makes us crazy sometimes.” They all gave a weak chuckle. Lucas went on.

251

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I’m sorry too. I can be a real asshole when something doesn’t go my way. I know we can’t pretend it never happened, but we can go on from here…okay?” “Okay,” Gallegar’s voice was ragged. “Anybody else got any problems, while we’re clearing the air?” There was silence for a minute, before Patrick piped up. “Now that you mention it, I’m kinda pissed Benjamin and I haven’t gotten to link with y’all yet.” Gallegar gave a snort of laughter, but Lucas shook his head firmly. “Sorry, friend, but there is no way in hell I’m dropping my pants in a car full of guys on a dark street!” Everyone burst into laughter, except Benjamin, who looked from one to another, and asked, “What’d I miss?” They were still laughing when they felt Kira’s shields drop and her power flow back into them. It was so sudden, Gallegar was glad he hadn’t been driving, because it hit them all and bent them double. They hadn’t even been aware of the deprivation, till it had ended. “Holy Mother of God!” Patrick crossed himself, as he shook his head, trying to clear it. It took a few minutes for the power to get back to a normal level within them. “Remind me to tell Kira she’s not to raise her shields completely again. If we had been in battle, we would have been helpless. That could have wiped us all out.” Benjamin wiped his forehead with a shaky hand. Lucas agreed with a growl. “I can sense her. I know she’s alive, but I feel fear too.” “It is good she has lowered her shields. We know she is all right.” Gallegar’s voice was rough with relief. “Better than that,” Danolas said, with a smile. “I know how to find her. I saw a flash of The Faerie Mound when she came back to us. I now know where she is.” 252

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining **** Kira lost track of all the corridors and rooms they traveled through since entering the mound. Some had been fancy, others quite plain, but all beautiful to see. There were faerie in the rooms too. Kira could get glimpses of them as they flitted past, peeking at her through the doors. The goblin and his pet had peeled away from them soon after entering the mound. Kira got the impression he hadn’t wanted to be around her, any more than she wanted to be with him. The tall elf hadn’t said another word to her, just motioned her to follow him as they set off down the many hallways. “How many faeries live here?” Kira snatched a quick look at a small faerie as it peeped out from under a chair. The elf jumped, almost like he had forgotten she was there. “It is unknown how many reside in the mound. It is thought there are ten thousand faeries living here. But they come and go as they please.” “Is the mound big enough?” Kira asked, her eyes wide. The shining elf turned and smiled at her. “It is as big as it needs to be. There is always enough space.” Kira noticed he had dropped the polite courtly speech he had used outside. “Since we are talking normally with each other, can you tell me your name?” “I am known as Tamblith…of the Star People. May I know yours?” “I am Kira.” She stopped, not knowing quite how to continue. “And your people?” Tamblith pressed politely. Kira smiled as the answer came to her. “My people are the Chosen Ones.” They had entered a hallway wider than any they had gone down previously. It was decorated in flowing crimson drapes and 253

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining gilt carvings. At the end was a large door. Kira could sense the power that hummed around it. A muted light shone like flickering flames of fire around the doorframe. The elf waved a hand at the entrance. “This is the chamber of our Emperor. He will wish a token.” Kira blinked at him. How she wished she wasn’t alone. She had no one to give her council. She opted for honesty. “What is a token, Tamblith?” Tamblith gaped at her. He looked at her unbelievingly for so long, Kira began to get impatient. She repeated herself. “My apologies, my Lady. I have never had an applicant not carry a token for the Emperor.” “I did not say I did not have a token. I just do not know what a token is.” Tamblith scratched his head. “A token is a gift, one to curry favor.” Kira smiled. “I have myself to offer to your Emperor.” Tamblith sighed as he opened the door. “I hope that will be enough.” The chamber was lit with the same fiery light as the door. The carpet was a deep pile, scarlet in color. It made the whole room look like it had been drenched in blood. Soft golden curtains hung along the walls. Elaborate furniture graced most of the room, with a large couch at the center. It too was made out of red velveteen and had golden arms and legs. Soft pillows were strewn over it. On it, reclined the Faerie Emperor. He was an elf, older than Kira had expected, in his mid-fifties, if she went by human age. He had golden hair, real gold, and his face was golden too. In fact, everything about him was golden, from the top of his head to the slippers on his feet. A golden man. His face was handsome, but lined around the eyes and mouth as if he didn’t smile often. He looked tired. He stared at 254

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira and his look made her uncomfortable. He raised his hand and held it out imperiously to Tamblith, never taking his eyes off of her. Tamblith cleared his throat apologetically. “She has no token, my Emperor.” The Emperor sat up on the sofa. “You have nothing to give me?” His tone was incredulous. “I do.” Kira looked at the Emperor. The Emperor glared at Tamblith, who swallowed quickly. “She says she has herself to give.” The Emperor laughed. He raked Kira up and down with disparaging eyes and then laughed again. “She has true magick, my Emperor.” Tamblith’s voice was shaky. The emperor reclined back on his couch. His expression was bored. “What magick does this child have that would interest me?” Kira held her chin up proudly. “I have magick such as you have never seen, Emperor of the Faeries. I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I…” Kira waited for her power to tell her who to join with, but there was nothing. She firmed her jaw and went on. “I am here to join with your kind and to protect them. A war is coming, one that can do damage to all of our people. I have been sent here to help you, Emperor of the Faeries, so your people will continue to live.” The Emperor sat stock still, his mouth slightly open as he listened to Kira’s announcement. His shocked eyes glanced at Tamblith—then to Kira—then back to Tamblith again. He opened and shut his mouth a couple of times before coming to his feet. He loomed over her. “You dare threaten me…human?” 255

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira frowned at him in confusion. “I did not threaten you.” Her words were matter-of-fact. “I just told you what would happen to you in the future if you do not join with me. A war is coming, one that will be fought against all supernaturals. If you wish to survive it, you must ally yourself with other supernaturals and join with me.” She paused, considering. “And I do not think I am human. I do not know what I am.” Without asking permission, the Emperor took Kira’s chin in his hand. Kira wished again her joined ones were with her. They would not have allowed him so close. That she had the power to stop him wasn’t the point. She just wanted them with her. “You carry the old magick in you.” The Emperor turned her chin back and forth as if examining it. “You have strength.” He dropped her chin and turning, flung himself back down on the couch. “But you carry the stench of other magick also. I smell death on you, Peacekeeper.” Kira blushed, wondering to herself if it was magick he smelled, or Gallegar’s scent on her skin. “I am allied with other supernaturals. Their magicks are all different. In joining, we have shared those magicks with each other and become stronger as a result.” The Faerie Emperor sneered at her. “My kind does not need to ally themselves with those of lesser magick. We are strong, not weak!” “With my Lord’s permission?” Tamblith waited to speak. “Yes?” The Emperor made the word sound frightening. “New…new blood is always welcome to our people. Perhaps a treaty based on that.” With a snarl, the Emperor flung out his hand. Tamblith was hurled into the air and slammed into one of the curtained walls. He was held there by the Emperor’s power. Blood poured from his mouth. Something had been broken inside him. 256

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “We take new blood by conquering it, not by allying with it!” the Emperor roared. “That has always been our way!” Suddenly, the goblin who had greeted Kira outside rushed into the room. Bowing low, he crawled up to the Faerie Emperor. He was shaking with agitation. “We have vissssitorssss. They try to attack thisss placcce.” The Emperor waved his hand again and Tamblith dropped to the floor. Kira rushed to his side. “I know a healing spell. Please allow me to help you. You were injured trying to help me.” Tamblith panted up at her. “I…will…heal, my Lady. I am immortal.” “Yes,” Kira agreed, “but it will take some time. I can speed up the healing.” Without allowing him to answer, she moved her hands over his chest. A rib had broken, puncturing a lung. She spoke the incantation over him, kissing her fingers and then touching the injury. Tamblith gasped as the unfamiliar magick shot through him. The rib knit instantly. “That is the magick you championed,” Kira whispered, as he stared up at her in awe. “That is the lesser magick your Emperor refuses.” “Do you know these creatures?” The Emperor’s harsh voice interrupted them. Kira turned and saw that the Elf Emperor had magicked up a large viewing screen on one of the walls. On it were her five Chosen, trying to get into the mound. She saw Danolas point his staff at the mound, and noticed little tremors shaking the floor. “Are these the allies you would have me join with?” The Emperor was livid. “They seek to destroy this place.” “Only because you refused them entrance.” Kira sensed Danolas had started out by asking nicely. She helped Tamblith to his feet and smiled when he stood straight and tall. 257

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “What have you done? Do you seek to destroy me from within?” Kira turned back to the Emperor and saw him staring at Tamblith. His eyes carried a trace of fear. Her eyes snapped at him. “I have come here in peace to speak with you. I have offered myself to you for the good of your people. In return, you have insulted me, hurt one of your own who tried to help me, and now you deny my men entrance.” Kira let gold flame into her eyes. “I grow tired of your games, Emperor. Let my people in, and then perhaps I will find it in my heart to forgive you and start over.” Tamblith held his breath. So did Kira. It wasn’t really a bluff. She could fight him if she needed to, but it would be so much better if they could come to an agreement freely. She waited. The Emperor stared at her, both fear and arrogance in his gaze. He waited so long Kira thought he had called her bluff, and she tensed, preparing for the worst. But then his eyes turned cunning, and he leaned back against the couch. He smiled, and that smile sent chills down Kira’s back. He looked down at the goblin still huddled at his feet. “Allow them entrance. Bring them to their Lady.” Kira relaxed, and felt Tamblith beside her do the same. The goblin skittered away. The Emperor motioned to Kira. She and Tamblith walked to stand in front of him. “What did you do to this one?” He pointed to Tamblith. “She healed me, my Emperor.” “You know our healing magick?” “No, Emperor. I used another type of magick on him. One I learned from a witch.” Kira’s voice was filled with pride. 258

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining But the Emperor sneered at her again. “That magick is useless to us.” Kira cocked her head at him. “I am confused then, Faerie Emperor. He is healed…is he not? How can magick such as that be useless?” His eyes filled with rage. “It is useless because we don’t need it. We have our own healing spells that work better than yours.” He looked at Tamblith. “Isn’t that right, Lord Tamblith?” Tamblith was silent and he looked down at the floor. “I said…” The Emperor’s voice was angry. “Isn’t that right, Tamblith?” “Our magick works well for us, my Emperor.” Tamblith was noncommittal. An elf cannot tell an outright lie. Kira jumped in, hoping to change the subject. “Where are my men? Are they being led a merry chase around the mound as I was?” Both Tamblith and the Emperor looked at her in surprise. Kira shrugged her shoulders. “The mound accommodates itself to the faerie who live here. I sensed if Tamblith had wanted to take me straight to your chamber, the mound would have been arranged so it was a short walk. I didn’t mind then, I enjoyed the tour, but now…” Kira’s eyes hardened to a cold gold. “I want my Chosen ones with me.” A heartbeat later, Lucas walked in the door followed by Benjamin, Danolas, and Patrick…Gallegar trailing them further back. When she saw them, Kira gave a little cry and went to Lucas. She sniffled a little as he took her in his arms. “I missed you,” she whispered “Damn it, honey, I’m gonna spank your butt for pulling a stunt like that.” Lucas’ arms were tight around her. Kira looked up at him. “I am sorry. I followed the Power. I let it entrance me.” 259

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Danolas thought it was something like that.” Benjamin’s deep voice was a little rough. She traded Lucas’ arms for his, and he gave her a quick peck on the cheek. “Just don’t do it again, all right? I’ve almost died twice tonight. I don’t want to try for a third time.” “Twice?” “Well,” Benjamin smiled, looking at Lucas, who frowned at him. “Getting in a car with four angry guys is a death wish where I come from.” “I am sorry.” “Hey, what about me?” Danolas used his staff to capture her. He tugged her under one arm and tweaked her on the nose. “Did you miss me too?” “Yes, I missed you, but I think I missed something else as well.” Kira’s eyebrows raised. Danolas grinned. “Male bonding, my Lady. Simple male bonding. Nothing more.” His voice was deliberately innocent. Kira turned to Patrick, who snatched her against his chest in a strong hug. “You scared us.” She bowed her head. “I know, I just was not thinking.” Patrick took a finger and raised her chin. “I know you weren’t.” He sighed and whispered in her ear. “He’s hurting as bad as you are, sugar.” Kira looked behind Patrick and saw Gallegar standing just inside the door. His head was held proudly, but Kira could see the uncertainty in him as she met his eyes. Suddenly, nothing else mattered but touching him. With a little sob, she ran toward him and threw herself in his arms. They wound around her tightly as his head bent, touching his lips to hers. “I am so sorry. I was wrong. Please forgive me.” The words tumbled from her mouth into his. 260

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar crushed her against him. His lips moved over hers in a lover’s kiss. He couldn’t help himself. There would be time later for being circumspect, now he just wanted to touch her. “A Ghra… It was my fault. Please forgive me. I love you. I cannot forgive myself for causing you to run away.” He released her so he could take her face between his strong hands. Tenderly, he wiped away the tears that streamed down her face. “I wish I could show you right now how sorry I am for the way I treated you. We have much to say to each other.” Kira looked into his glowing green eyes. They were filled with tears of regret. She watched as one escaped and trailed down his cheek. Standing on tiptoes, she kissed the tear away. “You did not drive me away, Mo Chridhe… I allowed myself to be entranced. It is not your fault I left.” Gallegar swallowed the knot that had formed in his throat at her Gaelic love words. “I don’t think you would have been so easily entranced if we hadn’t…hurt each other.” “We hurt much…because we love much. Our words have more power than—” She was interrupted by the sound of hands clapping slowly together. They both turned to look at the Emperor, who was sitting negligently on the couch, clapping his hands. “It’s not that I am unimpressed by this little reunion, but we do have business to discuss.” He looked down his nose at the men standing near Kira. “Perhaps we should start by you introducing these…important allies.” The Emperor’s tone was close to a jeer. Kira pulled Gallegar forward, her voice haughty as she introduced him and the others. She used their full titles and their places in the joining. Pride filled her voice as she brought each one before him. 261

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Afterwards, the Emperor looked at each one. “A vampire who calls himself king, a witch who uses lesser magick to lead his society, a human who claims to be some type of mutant, a spirit with no retinue, and a shapeshifter who has been neutered by his leader.” He watched, amused, as Lucas struggled to control himself. “Be careful, Faerie.” Gallegar didn’t use his title as a deliberate slur. “You insult one of us, you insult us all.” The Emperor’s eyes were cold. “I do not see anything here that tempts me to ally with you. I sense you do have some power, but none to make it worth my while. You on the other hand…” He looked down at Kira, lasciviously. “You I could use.” Kira’s men, as one, moved around her protectively. “You insult our Lady.” Danolas’ tone would have terrified a lesser being. “Do you not have any manners?” “I am Emperor. What do I need with manners?” “This is who you are to join with?” Danolas’ mind-voice was incredulous. “You want us to link with him?” Gallegar leaned over and shared the mind-speech with Patrick and Benjamin. “The Power hasn’t told me who I am to join with. All I know is that this is where I was sent.” Lucas was hopeful. “Maybe there will be no joining.” “There has always been a joining in the past. I find it difficult to believe we would come all this way and go through this nonsense and not join with these people.” Gallegar mind-spoke firmly. The Emperor was watching closely. “You use mind-speech with each other.” It wasn’t a question. Kira nodded. “It is rude to do in the presence of someone who cannot share your minds.” His criticism was mild. “Tough!” Lucas crossed his arms and glared at the monarch. 262

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “And if I were to order you not to…” His question trailed off. “Emperor of the Faeries, you cannot order other leaders to do anything. You do not understand. We do not acknowledge you as having power over us.” Kira finished and waited for the explosion, but none came. It was though the Emperor was reading a prepared script, and her comments hadn’t been on it, so he was ignoring them. She had angered him. That much she could see. He just hadn’t chosen to respond. “I thought you wished an alliance between us.” The Emperor disregarded the men and looked just at Kira. “I wish to join with your kind,” Kira corrected. “Once the joining is complete, the alliance between your people and mine can be formed.” “I am not interested in an alliance,” he stated. “I have something else in mind.” “Careful, A Ghra…” Kira didn’t need the warning. She saw the calculation in the Emperor’s eyes. Her eyes went to Tamblith, who had been silent since her joined ones had entered. He raised his eyebrows in confusion. He didn’t know what the game was either. “Tell me what you have in mind,” she said slowly. The Emperor smiled another cold smile. It made the hairs rise on Kira’s neck. Gallegar came forward and stroked her back soothingly. Lucas took her hand in his. “It is simple really.” He purred the words at her. “Tamblith told you we need new blood.” Kira felt all the men tense. She nodded, remembering. “It is true. My kind do need new blood to continue. We are a long-lived people, but as we get older, our blood begins to thin. Procreation is difficult.” 263

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Shit…I knew I wasn’t gonna like this!” Lucas mind-spoke for them all. “You wish my…blood?” “In a manner of speaking.” The Emperor’s smile changed. It wasn’t just calculating, but gloating as well. “I want your new blood in my bloodline. To seal our alliance, I want you to mate with my son.”

264

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 15 After a moment of shock, all hell broke loose around her. Gallegar and Danolas pulled Lucas away from the couch where the Emperor was sitting. Benjamin had switched his enhancements and grown huge and muscular, ready for the order to knock some sense into the guy. Patrick moved in front of Kira to protect her. Finally Lucas was brought under control, but his silver eyes glistened with rage. He glared at the Faerie. “He…will…not…touch…her!” The Emperor smirked at them. “Why do you find it so distasteful? What is one more male in your bed?” He leered at Kira. Benjamin took a step forward. “I saw you greet them,” the faerie sneered. “Especially the vampire and the shapeshifter. You can’t be picky if you like fucking dogs and dead men.” This time it was Kira who reacted. A slur on herself she could tolerate, but not on the men she loved. Her power swelled out of her, forcing her men back away from the Emperor. She used it to press down on the Emperor’s chest like a flattened hand. He gasped, his eyes going blank. Kira kept pushing, until the Emperor was writhing on the couch, his mouth wide open as he fought for breath. Tamblith stood to the side helpless, his face worried. 265

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “You were told earlier, to insult one of us is to insult us all. You have crossed the line, faerie. No one speaks such things about those I call mine. I could kill you right now. Where is the magick that could prevent me?” She got her answer when she felt new magick enter the room. It didn’t come from the Emperor. But its flavor was very like his. The power surrounded hers and worked to pry her psychic hand off the Emperor’s chest. This new magick was very strong. “Do you feel it?” she mind-whispered to her men. “Yes,” answered Danolas for them all. “It is a powerful magick, my Lady. Have care.” She continued to hold the Emperor to the couch, but opened herself up so she could taste the new magick. It was interesting. It didn’t have the cruelty the Emperor’s did, but the arrogance was there, coupled with humor and intelligence. It wasn’t fighting her to release the Emperor, but the magick used its strength to prevent her from doing him any more harm. It seemed…familiar. Kira smiled. She knew now who owned the power. It was to him she had been sent. “Everything will be all right now,” she mind-spoke to her men. “I know what we must do here. Follow my lead.” She released the Emperor so quickly, he fell from the couch. Tamblith moved hurriedly to help him back up. The Emperor looked at her with triumph in his eyes. “I told you our powers are stronger.” His voice was hoarse and his chest was sore, but he sat back up on the couch arrogantly. “You will ally with us. You will mate with my son. Now that you have felt his magick, I suppose you want to meet him.”

266

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira spoke demurely, since much was riding on her deceiving this man. “Please, Emperor, I would very much like to know the one who you believed turned back my powers.” “Oh, for God’s sake…” mind-groaned Lucas. “Now you’re gonna make me sick.” “Koran,” called the Emperor. “Come meet your bride.” A door on the side of the room opened and the Emperor’s son entered the room. All knew who he was, because he was as golden as his father. An elven male in his prime, Koran looked in his early thirties in human years. The Faerie matured quickly to a specific age, and then stayed there for centuries. Most aged so slowly, it was unnoticeable. “Come to me, my son.” The Emperor’s son walked over and stood next to his father. For the Emperor, it was a tactical error, because seeing them side by side only heightened Koran’s good looks. His hair, face, and body were also golden…but it was the gold of a glistening new coin. Standing next to him, his father looked tarnished and old. The only thing different about Koran were his eyes. Instead of the golden color of his father’s, his were soft amber, strewn with bits of gold. He bent his head to acknowledge his father then turned to face Kira. Kira looked at him, her power humming in her head. “He is the one I am to join with.” The mind-speech was joyful. Hearing her, Lucas sighed and cursed under his breath. Koran stepped forward and held his hand out to Kira. “I am Koran, son of Caliph the Emperor of the Faerie. I bid you welcome.” When Kira took his hand, he raised hers to his lips. When he touched her, her power tickled his mouth.

267

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I have been sent to join with you, Koran, heir to the throne of Faerie. I am for you. You are for me.” Koran stood, removing his lips from Kira’s hand. He looked at the woman standing before him. She was the most beautiful woman he had ever seen. Her golden eyes told him she had faerie blood in her. When he had kissed her, the shock of her power had startled him. Koran knew he hadn’t forced her to stop holding his father. Her power was too strong for that. He had felt her withdrawal. He knew somehow she had recognized him through his magick. He could have sworn at the time she had been pleased. Now hearing her say he was the one she wanted to join with, he knew that was why she had backed off. He was important to her in some way, one he didn’t understand yet. “Well, my son… Have I not found some lovely new blood for you?” Caliph, the Emperor, rubbed his hands together in glee. “Indeed, Father,” Koran agreed politely. “She is very beautiful. My heart beats strong at her presence.” Gallegar came forward, putting his hand possessively on Kira’s arm. “Our Lady is not a mare to be looked over by a breeder wanting to service his favorite stallion. She is Peacekeeper. Her powers are more astonishing than you know.” Caliph laughed. “We have seen her powers. We are stronger.” Kira ignored the Emperor. She looked right at Koran. “Do you wish to join with me, son of Caliph?” Koran coughed discretely. “Perhaps this should be discussed in a more private place. My chambers are right next door.” Lucas growled. Benjamin, who was still giant sized, snarled at Koran. “You go too far, princeling.” 268

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira turned and gave her men a speaking glance. “Trust me…” She faced Koran. “Prince Koran, we can go into your chamber if you wish to join with me, but joining is not mating. Joining is something that happens on the psychic plain.” Kira’s face shone with remembrance. “A merging of minds and powers. It is a wondrous experience. But I warn you now, there is no sex involved.” Caliph narrowed his eyes. “If there is no mating involved, there will be no joining. If you want an alliance, you will give me…” He glanced at his son before going on. “You will give my son a child.” Kira didn’t even bother to look at the Emperor, her whole focus was on Koran. Koran looked at Kira. He could sense her power silently calling to him. Her concern wasn’t the mating, but the joining. Without thinking, he reached for her again. His hand stroked her cheek and brushed down her hair, trying to see deeper inside her. His father was very important to him, and if he wanted Koran to have a child with this woman, Koran would have to consider it. It would be no great difficulty. The Lady Kira was as lovely as any faerie he had ever seen. And the feel of her power when it touched his soul—now that was something he could spend his life enjoying. But there was something…something that made him hesitate to mate with her. Is it her faerie blood? Suddenly, he knew he wanted to join with Kira. Her magical touch called to him. “My father…” He had to approach this carefully. “I would know more about this ceremony. Perhaps the Lady Kira can show me what this joining is. If it pleases me to do so, I can join with her.” He spoke confidently. “The mating can come later.” 269

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He looked at the others Kira had joined with, not giving his father a chance to speak. “You have all joined with the Peacekeeper?” Gallegar let his hand fall from Kira’s arm. “We were all chosen by the Lady Kira. I am the First.” “And this joining pleasures you?” Lucas snorted but didn’t answer. Danolas came forward and dipped his head in greeting. “It pleases us to be joined with our Lady. We share her powers and her mind. She shares ours as well.” Patrick stepped up. “All the joinings are different. When you have joined with Kira, the Chosen then link together. We then can share each other’s minds as well as hers.” Benjamin’s voice was low as he spoke. “She saved my life by joining with me. Now our lives are one.” “Does this answer your question, Prince?” Gallegar’s green eyes pierced Koran. “Yes,” Koran continued with the arrogant tone. “I would see more of this. With your permission, Father?” Caliph was stuck. He wanted to refuse, but that would divide him and his son, and he knew the importance of presenting a united front. “All right, my son,” he finally decided. “But join only if you see it as an advantage. I know I have taught you well.” “Thank you, Father. Lady Kira…” Koran bowed and then held out his hand to her. Kira turned and sent all her joined ones soothing thoughts. She would be all right. They were to keep guard at the door, but be very careful. The Emperor was a cruel man. Koran had been chosen for her. He could not hurt her. Once they were joined, all would be well. Kira spun back around and followed Prince Koran into his private chamber. 270

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining **** Koran’s chamber didn’t have the ostentatious look of his father’s. It was just as regal but more subtly so, like he didn’t need to parade who he was in front of others. It was comfortable looking. “I welcome you to my chamber, Lady Kira.” Koran’s smile matched his words. Kira glanced around at the room. “It looks like you. Cool and comfortable.” Koran laughed. “I will take that as a compliment.” He moved closer to Kira, taking her hands in his. He smiled enticingly. “You are most beautiful. Any child we made together would be very handsome…powerful.” Kira looked up at him and frowned. “Why do you do that?” Koran met her puzzled look with one of his own. “Do what?” “Pretend to act like your father. It is not you, Koran.” She stepped back from him. “We are not here to mate. I wish to join with you. I thought that is why we came in here. Have you changed your mind?” “I had not made up my mind, but I wanted you away from my father so we could speak more freely. Tell me more about joining with you. Why is it so important?” He looked irritated she hadn’t fallen for his seductive words. Kira sighed. “Joining with me will help protect your people. The Faerie are not as strong as they once were. After meeting with your father, I now know why. Your people must adapt to the new world around them. They have not done so.” Koran scowled fiercely. “My father is the emperor. He does well for his people. You should not speak of him this way.” “I speak the truth, Koran, and you know it. You have seen what is happening. You know the power your people once held has diminished. When I came here, I thought I would join with 271

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining the leader of the Faerie, but once I saw Caliph, I knew he was not the one. I felt your power and sensed you were the one I had come for. You are for me, Koran. I am for you.” “How will joining with you help my kind?” Koran was desperate to understand. He didn’t like the fact Kira shared his concerns about his father’s rule. “When you and I join,” Kira put a slender hand on his chest. “Our minds will become as one. You will have access to power you have never dreamed of. When you link with the other Chosen, you will gain some of their magicks too. We will become allies against something that is coming to harm all our people. Your people will be safe.” “Your power is strong, Lady Kira, but I do not see it being strong enough to help my people in the way you suggest.” Kira stood still for a long moment before she ran her hand across Koran’s chest soothingly. Goose bumps appeared on his skin. “If I so chose,” Kira murmured softly. “The Chosen and I could bring The Faerie Mound down around your ears. If I wanted to, I could destroy every Faerie I touched.” “How?” scoffed Koran. But he was nervous. Something in her voice told him she was serious, raising the hair on the back of his neck. Kira eyes glowed. She stared deep into his amber ones. “I know the Words of Death over the Faerie people.” Koran staggered back from her. His hand wiped away the touch of her hand on his chest unthinkingly. “Impossible,” he shot back gruffly. “No mortal knows those words. It is so written.” “I never said I was mortal, Koran. I do not know what I am or where I came from. But I do know I was sent to you. Look within me and see I tell the truth.” 272

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Koran hesitated, and then with a shrug used his magick to delve into Kira’s mind. The Words of Death appeared, glowing hotly against the coolness of Kira’s emotions. “Slanboh exch lioth tandar mequah opher.” “You tell the truth!” Koran’s eyes popped open and he blinked at Kira in amazement. “When I join with you, you will have control over the Words of Death. I will use them to help you rule your people.” He stared at her, thoughts and ideas tumbling through his mind. She was right. The Faerie power had been faltering in the last century. It was decided that it must be due to the thinning blood the older faerie carried. Wheels had been put into motion for more faerie children to be born. But it took time for the stronger magicks to succeed and then to mature. Koran had long been of the opinion something else might be destroying the power, but he couldn’t get his father to listen to him. The old ways were the best ways, his father would intone. He clenched his hands. He swore if he heard that phrase one more time… So while his father worked at the old ways, the Faerie were fading around them. And now here standing before him was the solution to his problem. Once he controlled the Words of Death, all Faerie would rally around him. “You want me to overthrow my father. Become Emperor in his place?” Kira looked startled, as if she hadn’t thought of that. “I do not think so,” she blurted out. “I mean…I do not know. I am not the one to make that choice, Koran. I am just to give you this tool to help your people. You must decide how to use it.” Koran narrowed his eyes. “I could just mate with you. I would still control the Words through the mating.”

273

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira looked at him, amused. “You think any of my men out there would allow you to force me? Do you think I would allow it?” She came to him and gently stroked his golden cheek. “Koran, you are not your father. Do not act like it. I will give this gift to you freely once we are joined.” “Whoever I wanted…” “I will always have free will, Koran. Danolas says you must think of us as a team.” “My father will never agree to this.” Kira put her arms around the elven man. “You say he is a good emperor. Your father loves you. You can make him listen. If more must happen later to save your people, you will have allies to help you.” “Why would you all do this for me? You don’t know me. You don’t know the type of man I am.” “That is where you are wrong. I knew you the moment my power touched yours. I feel I have always known you.” Kira gave him a hard hug. “We were chosen to be together. Not as your father deems, but as part of the joined. The Chosen will follow, because we are as one, all of us.” Koran looked down at the woman in his arms. The power she offered him was an incredible temptation to one who had spent several centuries waiting to gain the throne. He knew his father would destroy their people if he continued down the course he was on. It needed to change immediately. But just as he was sure of that, Koran knew Kira would be disappointed in him if he behaved in any manner that would be unjust. He shook his head in amazement. Why does what she thinks of me suddenly matter so much? I am heir to the throne of Faerie. I will do what is best for my people. Then his gaze met hers and she smiled. He felt his surrender down to his toes. 274

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I will join with you, Kira. For my own sake and for my kind.” Kira’s smile grew and tears filled her eyes. She stretched up to kiss him on the cheek, but Koran instinctively turned his head, so their lips met. As their lips came together, the powers that lived within them both joined and exploded out of them in a golden burst of light. Kira closed her eyes against the brightness, but she didn’t pull away. She knew the joining of their lips was necessary. She also realized as soon as he touched her, that their feelings were not romantic ones. And she knew why. A laugh bubbled out of her. One soon shared by Koran. He held her tighter, and tighter. Their lips continued to press together. The light bathed them both. It created a sphere of golden space that lifted them off the ground. As one, they pulled back from each other, holding only to each other’s hands. They stared at each other, utter joy filling their faces. “Sister!” Koran shouted huskily. “Brother!” Kira returned, more tears coursing down her soft cheeks. “How is this possible?” Koran shook his head. “I knew you were Faerie the second I saw you, but my sister…that is a surprise.” “But I am not Faerie,” Kira stated. “I am more now.” “Well, this will give me a reason to opt out of mating with you. Hopefully, my father must agree.” “You think he would not?” “Inbreeding in the Faerie realm is not uncommon.” Kira wrinkled her nose and Koran grinned. “I’m not thinking romantically about you any more either.” “I do not understand how this came to be.” Koran squeezed her hands. “Perhaps we will learn more as we join. If it is still allowed?” 275

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira nodded. “Yes, we are to join. You have been chosen.” She smiled happily. “And now we know why.” The two brought their lips back together in a passionless, familial kiss. The golden light burned brighter. **** Outside the door, Kira’s joined had taken their places. The Emperor had tried to get them to leave, but one snarl from Lucas had sent him back to his couch. He brooded there, but kept glaring smugly at the men every so often. “If all weren’t well, we would know it.” Danolas wasn’t sure whether he was trying to comfort himself or the others. “She will be fine.” Gallegar ran a hand through his hair. “Her shields are down enough for us to know if something were to happen.” “Was it this bad for you when I joined with her?” Benjamin questioned worriedly. Patrick snorted. “We were a little busy when you joined, but the answer is yes. Joining makes us all nervous.” Benjamin looked at Gallegar. “And you’ve gone through this five other times?” Gallegar nodded. “You got some strength.” Lucas cursed under his breath. “It ain’t easy on any of us. It’s the not knowing.” “It will soon be—” Danolas’ thought was never finished. They all flinched as a powerful golden light erupted out from under the door. It was so bright they had to hide their eyes from the glow. A scream brought them around and they watched Caliph throw up his hands and begin dancing in glee. “It’s happened! My son has done it!” he shouted, pointing toward the door. “Do you know what that light is? It is the light of procreation. When Faerie mate, they glow gold!” 276

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar staggered against the door. “No!” he cried, hoarsely. “My brother,” Danolas urgently spoke to him. “This is our Lady. Remember your own joining. Kira’s power color is gold. That is what we see. Koran and she are joining.” Gallegar looked at him and his gaze was fierce. “Would you know differently, Danolas? Would you know if…” He couldn’t finish his thought. “We would know, Gallegar.” Lucas came to him; his own eyes as hard as nails. He spoke quietly. “If anything different were happening, you and I would know.” Gallegar stared at the man whom he thought of as his friend and his rival. He was offering comfort now. Benjamin broke in with. “Her shields are just the same. If something were happening wouldn’t it be like…I mean wouldn’t we feel it?” He stopped and turned red as he realized what he had almost said. “Y’all are right.” Patrick glided across the floor and, narrowing his eyes, looked at the now muted light. “This is Kira we’re talkin’ about.” “What do we do?” Benjamin asked. Gallegar looked at Lucas and Danolas. He straightened his shoulders and took a deep breath. “We wait.” **** Kira and Koran were locked in the embrace that would join them one with another. Kira felt the love Koran had for her as it glided around her, stroking her, teaching her the way of Faerie. She could sense his absolute delight in having a sibling. The ending of his loneliness. As his power moved over hers, she suddenly understood why parts of it seemed familiar. They were the same as her own. It gave her a clue as to her own beginnings. She had magick of 277

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining her own before the Power changed her and made her Peacekeeper. Kira could recognize the differences in their powers as well. Koran’s magick was deeply masculine and as she had noted before, arrogant. But his arrogance came from a deep confidence in himself and his abilities. As it blended with her own, Kira felt a sense of belonging and knew for the first time she was no longer the only one of her kind. She had a brother, who shared a bloodline with her. The tears that streamed down her face were those of joy. Koran was overwhelmed by the love that flooded his heart as he joined with Kira. A sister. He had a sister. His own tears mingled with those of Kira’s. He had been alone for so long—his father absent from his life most of the time. Now he had someone who belonged to him, who needed him. Kira’s power melded with his and he gasped at the new knowledge he was given. She was more than sister to him…much more. The Power that had given Kira breath, took him through the sequence of events that brought her to life. Koran stood amazed at his part of it. Sister…flesh of my flesh. Their lips separated and they saw in each other a new awareness. Kira’s face glowed with the knowledge that had been given her. Koran pulled her to his chest in a bear hug. “I love you, Koran, brother of my spirit. Join with me now and forevermore be a part of my new family.” “I love you, Kira, sister of my flesh. All I am, I share with you.” Their hands moved at the same time. He gently slipped his hand around and placed it upon the small of her back. Hers moved up his chest till it rested in the hollow at the base of his throat. Her heart pounded as she spoke the words of joining to him. 278

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I give you companionship. You give me wisdom. Together we can break down all barriers.” Koran smiled and bending, kissed his sister on the forehead. “You give me companionship. I give you wisdom. Together we can break down all barriers.” The magick exploded between them. It pierced their flesh with a golden heat. Kira’s first thought was it wasn’t as painful as the rest of the brandings were. She wondered absently if it was because the power was much the same. Koran gritted his teeth as the flesh at the base of his neck burned. For him it was a surprise, since he had nothing to compare it to. Instinctively, he voiced a healing incantation over both himself and Kira. The pain faded away. He fingered the “K” now burned permanently in his neck. He carefully turned her around and examined the brand on her back. He smiled as he saw it was a golden crown, the same design as on his signet ring. She roused herself in his arms to look for herself. She smiled as she brushed her fingers over his throat. Blowing out her breath, she slumped back in his arms. “Tired,” she muttered to herself. “So tired. But we still have much to do.” She raised her face to his. “I would call the Chosen in. You must link with them all.” Koran smiled. “This, I look forward to. What will they say when they find out who I really am to you?” Kira giggled. “They will be pleased and surprised. No one knew I had a family.” She changed to mind-speech. “Come to me, my Chosen. Come in and meet your new brother.” Outside the door, they all heard Kira’s mind-speech. As one, they turned and entered, ignoring Caliph when he stood up screeching at them, “You can’t go in during a mating! Stop! Stop at once!” They filed in the room and Danolas spelled the door locked behind them. Immediately, they heard pounding on the outside 279

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining door, but they ignored it when they saw Kira and Koran hanging just below the ceiling wrapped in a ball of golden light. They stood speechless as they watched it drop slowly to the floor and fade from view. Kira stumbled when the power faded, but Koran put his arm around her waist. Her face was as golden as Koran’s as she looked at the men. “Give welcome to your new brother. As I have given welcome to mine.” Koran grinned as he raised her hand to his lips. Gallegar stepped forward, his arm extended. “Welcome to the joined, brother. We are pleased to make you a part of us.” Lucas shook his hand next. He looked at Kira. “What do you mean…you have given welcome to yours?” Koran continued taking each man’s greeting around the circle before he answered for her. “During the joining, Kira and I discovered wondrous things about each other.” “As we all did,” Danolas agreed carefully. “Ahhh, but you didn’t discover this, because it could never happen with any of you.” “Now just a damn minute!” Lucas’ temper flared. “Peace, brother. But I will always have something with Kira none of you can!” This time it was Gallegar’s eyes that shot green sparks at Koran. “What are you talking about, Faerie Prince?” “That is enough!” Kira stepped in between them, shaking her head. “No more teasing, Koran.” She looked at the others and smiled sweetly. “He is my brother.” There was absolute silence for a full minute. Koran swept a look around the room at the men and wondered what they were thinking. All of the faces that looked at him were utterly blank. Suddenly, he wasn’t feeling welcome any more. Danolas broke the silence. “Your brother, my Lady? How can this be?” 280

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Yeah, what are you up to, Faerie?” Lucas agreed with him. Koran raised an eyebrow. “You are a suspicious lot.” “We keep Kira and each other safe by being suspicious. Answer the question please.” Gallegar was polite, but his voice held the tone of command in it. Koran shrugged his shoulders and then acquiesced. “During the joining, I saw the powers that Kira and I were sharing were very similar. I had already felt a great familiarity with Kira, not knowing why. Once joined, I was given the reason.” “You’re her brother?” Benjamin’s voice was unbelieving. “Yes,” Koran agreed. “I am her brother. But not only her brother.” He turned to Kira and took her hands in his. “I am also the one from whom she was created.” Lucas stared at him. “Huh?” Kira broke in. “I was created by the Power from the flesh of Koran’s body.” “Flesh of my Flesh,” Koran whispered, kissing her hands. Kira smiled at him. “She doesn’t remember being Faerie.” Gallegar tried to understand. “She never was. The Power took my flesh while I was sleeping and used it to create the being that first came to you, Gallegar. That being was never true Faerie, but a mixture of Faerie and the Power that created her. As she has joined with each of you, you have changed her even more. We have a common base, but we are not alike. She is Faerie, yet she is not.” “As she is part of each of us now. A mixture of all she has joined with,” Danolas spoke slowly. “Yes.” Kira smiled at each of them. “I am now who I am supposed to be. I started out Faerie because the Faerie people easily mingle their blood with other races. It is how they continue their bloodline. 281

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining I was changed by the Power. Then, I was changed even more each time I joined with one of you. I am now a hybrid of all beings I have shared my power with. Koran was the last. I will not join with another.” “Well, thank God for that!” Lucas muttered. “And when you joined, you discovered all this?” Patrick asked. “Yes, we not only share each other’s powers, but a common bloodline. She is my sister in all ways that matter.” Gallegar watched the young Faerie as he smiled down at Kira. A load fell from his shoulders. He hadn’t realized just how afraid he was that light had meant something else. “Then we must re-welcome you, Koran. Welcome, brother. Welcome, brother of Kira.” He held out his arm again with a grin. Koran looked at the proud vampire, whom he could tell was much relieved by the conversation. “Thank you, Gallegar, First of the Chosen. I am pleased to be part of the family.” “All must link now.” Kira’s brow furrowed. “The night grows late.” She looked at Gallegar. “Where are Noah and Gabriel and the others? Is there time before dawn?” Gallegar pulled her to his side and gave her a squeeze. “There is time still. If we do not delay. The others wait outside the mound. It would not receive them.” Kira nodded. “There is much to do tonight still. Please…all must link. Lucas?” She looked beseechingly at him. “We can start with you and get it over with.” “And this will be the last time?” Lucas growled at her as he undid his pants. Kira dimpled at him. “As far as I know, our circle is now complete.” “Great!” Lucas didn’t know whether to cheer or cry, knowing what was coming next. 282

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining The men who had not linked with Lucas came forward and followed Kira’s directions by laying a hand on the inside of Lucas’ thigh. All understood his embarrassment and so tried to keep the wisecracks to a minimum. As each spoke their words, Kira showed the Chosen the brand she was given. Patrick began when Lucas laid his hand on the back of his neck. “She has given me hope. I have given her my faith. Together these virtues will triumph.” Benjamin went next, after Lucas moved his hand to the back of his. “She has given me control. I have given her my strength. Together we will conquer our enemies.” After Lucas had put his other hand on Koran’s throat, Koran spoke his words in a deep thoughtful voice. “She has given me companionship. I have given her my wisdom. Together we will break down all barriers.” Lucas looked at the other three men. His gaze lifted to meet Danolas’ and Gallegar’. He felt a swell of emotion fill his chest. They were a team. He looked at Kira, who came to him and laid her cheek against his as he spoke his linking words. “She has given me purpose. I have given her my passion. Together we give meaning to our existence.” The four men felt Kira’s power as it linked them together. The rush was explosive. It shook their bodies as it moved from one to another and then back to Kira. They all gave deep sighs as they looked at each other. “One down…” Lucas said shakily as he rose and hiked up his pants. Kira slipped her arms around him and gave him a hug. “All must link. We must finish this.”

283

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 16 One by one the Chosen laid hands on each other and spoke the linking words to make them one. Their minds and thoughts intertwined and they saw into each other’s soul for the first time. Kira’s power floated in and out of each linking, pulling them all together into a cohesive whole. Each man shared his power with the others. Each man pledged his life to the linking. When it was over, they were all exhausted. “Whew!” Patrick wiped his hand over his sweaty brow. “I’m not sure about y’all, but I’m glad that’s over.” “I have something for you, Kira.” Benjamin looked slightly embarrassed. He knelt at her feet and then pulled a silver object from his pocket. When we joined, I realized the others had given you something to celebrate the joinings, but you left before I could give my gift to you.” Kira smiled weakly at him, tears welling up in her eyes. “I am sorry, Benjamin. What is it you have for me?” Benjamin reached down and gently pushed up Kira’s pant leg. “This is what we give to the women who join our institute. It is a symbol of belonging—a symbol of our kind.” He attached a thin chain around Kira’s slim ankle. On it was a medallion with the picture of a capital “S” and “H” twisted together. Kira moved her leg and the anklet jingled merrily. “It is so light.” She marveled. She leaned down and kissed Benjamin. “Thank you. It is beautiful.” 284

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I believe it is now my turn.” Koran smiled at his sister. He snapped his fingers and a beautiful golden chain appeared around Kira’s wrist. “Wear it well, my sister. It belonged to my mother.” It was so lightweight, Kira could barely feel it. When she looked close at it, she saw the jewelry had a single piece of amber attached to the center. Around it were many sparkling precious stones. “Koran…” Tears filled her eyes again. “But if it was your mother’s…” “She would want my sister to have it.” “For now then…” Kira said firmly. “Until you have a mate of your own.” Gallegar broke in to change the subject. “Are we done here, A Ghra… The night wanes.” Kira looked guiltily at Gallegar. “I am sorry, Mo Chridhe… No, we are not. We must finalize the joinings and the linkings. It should not take long.” “What must we do, my Lady?” Danolas questioned. Kira stood, swaying in exhaustion. Concerned, Lucas and Gallegar both came to her, but she waved them away. “No, I will be all right. We must finish here. Gather around me.” The men gathered in a large circle with Kira in the center. She closed her eyes and flung her arms out to her sides. “Think of our cosmic wagon wheel.” Kira’s smiling mind-speech flowed over each of them. “Find your place in it. Each of you was chosen for a specific reason. Form the wheel. State the reason for your presence here.” Gallegar saw the wheel on the psychic plain. He watched himself stretch his arms to shelter Kira from all harm. He saw the empty places the others would fill. Each had a purpose in the wheel. Each was a part of the necessary whole. 285

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I am Gallegar. I am the First. My purpose in the wheel is to give you abundant life.” Danolas appeared next in his mind, and Gallegar realized they were each seeing this picture in their heads. Danolas put out his arms. “I am Danolas. I am second. My purpose in the wheel is to give your visions understanding.” There was a pause as Lucas struggled to make himself known. He wasn’t as good with the psychic stuff as the others were. “I am Lucas. I am third. My purpose in the wheel is to give you passion for living.” Patrick popped into view and stretched out his arms to meet Lucas’. “I am Patrick. I am fourth. My purpose in the wheel is to give you faith in yourself and in us.” Benjamin’s voice was hesitant as he spoke. This was all very new to him. Talk about going on faith… “I am Benjamin. I am fifth. My purpose in the wheel is to be your strength in every way.” Koran smiled as he appeared on the psychic plain and stepped into the remaining slot. He put out his arms so the circle around Kira would be complete. “I am Koran. I am sixth. I am the last. My purpose in the wheel is to bring the wisdom of the ages to us all.” Kira stood wrapped in the protection of the circle of men. She felt their love and the affection they had for each other beginning to flow through them all. Her ready tears trailed down her face as she gazed at each of them. “I am Kira. I am Peacekeeper. I am for you. You are for me. I have come to bring you all together to help rule your people and prepare you to fight our enemies. I am your center. You are my world. I love you. I need you. Together we will succeed.” 286

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining They all watched as a trail of Kira’s golden power split off and stretched out to each of them. The golden trail moved around the outside of the circle. As it passed each man, it picked up the essence of power that went with them. Green for Gallegar, sapphire blue for Danolas, silver for Lucas, brown for Patrick, red for Benjamin and finally, amber gold for Koran. Soon the rainbow of colors completely covered the waiting men then flowed back to Kira in the center. “As these colors show us, our powers are now as one. We are as one. Our circle is now complete. Hear my words. A war is coming that will be wrought against all the supernaturals in this city. It will be the start of a war against supernaturals everywhere. A supernatural will betray us and begin this war. Only our powers combined will stop it. Only by working together can we defeat our enemies. Only through our love for each other will we save ourselves.” Kira’s arms fell to her sides. Her mind’s voice sent out one last thought. “I am sorry. I am so tired. I must still…” Her voice trailed off, as she collapsed. Gallegar got there just in time to prevent her from hitting the floor. He looked up at the other men. “She must rest.” Lucas grinned and snorted out a laugh. “I think we’ve had this conversation once already today.” Gallegar and Danolas returned the smile. “I am not sure what you mean by that…” Koran’s eyebrows raised. “But Kira is welcome to stay here and rest. She is my sister.” “What about your father?” Patrick looked at the door. The pounding of the guards who were still trying to enter could be heard. “Can he be trusted?” Koran grimaced. “My father might come around sometime, but he will be angry I have not mated with Kira. Perhaps somewhere else might be safer this night.” 287

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar gently brushed back the hair from Kira’s face. He looked up at Lucas, his heart in his eyes. “She would be safe in my Sanctuary, but with all that has happened…” Lucas stood above them, his jaw tensing with emotion. “Yeah, same goes for me. She needs some space from both of us.” “I’d take her home with me, but I don’t have any beds.” Patrick put his hands up in regret. Benjamin looked serious. “She could come back to the Institute with me. I have room there, but I would worry someone might get to her. She killed one of my people tonight. Even though I asked it of her, people might let their fear rule them. My security isn’t what it could be, not on the inside.” Gallegar looked over at Danolas, who stood quietly listening. “It seems your Keep is the best place for her after all. She will be safe there.” Danolas nodded. “There are wards around the Keep. No one may be harmed there. Our Lady will rest in safety. We can all meet there tonight at four p.m. Then we can go see to the problem with the Gates of Life.” He looked at Gallegar. “You can meet us there after darkness has fallen.” Gallegar climbed to his feet, Kira in his arms. “Agreed. Now we just have to get out of here in one piece.” He looked to Koran. “Your father may be difficult.” Koran walked to the door. “Release the spell, Danolas. Let us see if I can make my father understand what has happened here.” “We will protect Kira if we need to,” Lucas warned. “I understand, my friend. I too will protect her. My loyalty is with her. Hopefully, it will not come to that.” **** And it didn’t. Koran was able to calm his father down enough so the others were able to leave in peace. While Caliph 288

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining didn’t like the thought of Kira leaving the mound, he accepted Koran’s assurance he would explain all that happened later. The others made their way quickly to the surface. Gallegar handed the sleeping Kira to Danolas when he got into the car, and hurriedly drove them back to A Crown of Thorns. Once there, Gallegar took the time to pull Kira into his arms. “Until tonight, A Ghra… I will miss you.” “Gall…egar?” “Shhh, rest well.” “Mo Chridhe… I…love you.” Her mental voice trailed off as he kissed her. Gallegar then passed her to Benjamin. He didn’t stop to see the other good byes, but fled with his fellow vampires into the safety of the club just as the sun peeked over the horizon. “Too close, Gallegar. This time it was too close.” Danolas sent the thought to his friend. Gallegar’s mind-chuckle sounded in his head. “Perhaps some better planning from now on?” Danolas joined in the laughter. “Yes…rest well, my friend.” Kira was passed to each of her Chosen to say good bye. Only Lucas was left. When he took her into his embrace, Kira opened her eyes sleepily. “My…wolf…” she whispered. “Hush, honey. Danolas is going to take you back to the Keep so you can rest. I’ll see you tonight.” “Lucas…” Kira took his shirt in her hands. Her eyes glistened with tears. “I feel your pain. I know I hurt you today. I did not want to. I do not mean to hurt either of you…but I do. I am sorry.” A single tear spilled down her cheek. His chest tightened. He didn’t want to talk about what had happened with Gallegar. It seemed easier to just put it behind them. He meant to show Kira he was the one she needed to be with, but now wasn’t the time to go into it. She needed her rest. 289

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It’s okay, honey. I know you love me and that’s all that matters. You get some sleep. We can talk about it later.” “For…give me?” Her voice was fading fast. “Of course, baby. I love you. I’ll see you tonight.” Lucas looked down at her. She was again fast asleep. He handed her back to Danolas, who was waiting in the back seat of his Volvo. “Take care of her. Holler if you need anything.” Danolas nodded. “Let us know if you have any problems with Elijah over what happened earlier tonight. We will be there for you.” Lucas grinned. “Thanks, I’d forgotten all about that. I’ll be in touch. See ya later today.” He got back into his jeep and with a wave, drove away. All the men went their separate ways. Jorad drove Danolas and Kira back to the Keep, where Danolas carried Kira up to his own bed. He wasn’t about to let her out of his sight. **** Kira awoke with a sense of disorientation. She stared up at the ceiling above her, not knowing where she was. Carefully, she looked to the right of her and felt immediately calmer as she recognized the doorway of Danolas’ outer room. She turned her head to the left and saw Danolas was lying asleep next to her. His face was slanted toward her, and she could tell he was still deeply asleep, his handsome face relaxed. No wonder, it had been a full night. Kira stretched and slowly sat up. She still wore the sweat outfit she had borrowed from Benjamin, but her shoes had been removed. She gazed down at Danolas. He had changed his clothes. He wore his own pair of sweatpants, but no shirt. He was stretched out on top of the comforter, under another blanket, with his staff lying snugly in the crook of his arm. She grinned, wondering if he always slept with the thing. She glanced at the clock next to the bed. It read one-thirty. They 290

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining had slept a good long time. Kira rose, careful not to wake him. He needed his sleep too. She felt grubby in her wrinkled clothes, so she tiptoed into the bathroom to take a shower. Fifteen minutes later, she was clean and feeling much better about things in general. She was drying her hair when she heard a knock on the door. Donning a large robe that hung on the back of the door, she opened it. Danolas stood, leaning sleepily against the doorjamb. His sweats hung low on his hips and he was scratching his chest absently. His long blond hair was mussed and he had sleep lines etched into his cheek. Kira thought he looked adorable. “Let me know next time you get out of bed,” he yawned, and stretched his lithe frame. “I need to keep tabs on where you are.” “Sorry.” Kira bit her lip, repentant. “I just wanted a shower, and I did not want to wake you.” He pushed himself off the doorjamb and walked into the bathroom. “That’s okay…just wake me up next time.” He turned and looked at the robe she was wearing and a grin split his face. “Nice robe…” Kira blushed. “I do not have any clothes. I seem to be losing them rather rapidly. First there is the set I left at Lucas’, then the bloody ones at Benjamin’s. Now, these dirty sweats. What am I to do?” He walked back into the bedroom and grabbed something out of the closet. “My backpack!” She snatched it out of his hand. “I spelled it out of Gallegar’s club last night, while you were saying good bye to everyone. Figured you might need it.” Kira pressed a kiss to his whiskered cheek. “Thank you so much. It feels good to have my own things back.” “Get dressed. While I take a shower, you can look at some of the places my friend found for you to live in. One of them 291

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining might just suit your fancy. Maybe before everyone gets here, we can run out and get you a few things to wear. I’ll even feed you dinner.” She grinned at him. “I will be quick.” “No woman can be quick,” Danolas retorted with a laugh. She was fast enough. He had just gotten together his clothes for the day when she popped out of the bathroom. She was still drying her long white blond hair, but was dressed other than her shoes. Today she wore a pair of softly faded jeans and a dark blue T-shirt with a scoop neck. She looked fresh and very young. “Very nice.” Danolas wagged his eyebrows teasingly at her. He watched as Kira efficiently pulled her hair back into a long ponytail. “It will keep it out of my way when we explore The Haunted House,” she explained. Danolas pulled her over to the laptop computer he had booted up and left sitting on his bed. “Here are the six houses Sarah came up with. They are all located in the upper city, but close to the border.” He showed her how to access the information about each of them. “There is also one other place you may want to consider. It is a building Gallegar owns here in the Lower City, about three blocks from here. It has three stories to it. The lower has a restaurant and a couple of shops, but the rest is empty office space, with a big loft at the top. We might be able to convert it for you. It’s under the file name, Gallegar.” Danolas picked up his clothes. “Take a look at them. If you see anything you like, we can check it out later.” He disappeared into the bathroom, and Kira soon heard the shower running. She sat down on the bed and chewing her lip in concentration, managed to pull up the pictures and info on each of the houses for sale. She had just begun to go through the 292

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining pictures of Gallegar’s building, when Danolas finished in the bathroom and joined her on the bed. He too was dressed casually, in jeans and a white T-shirt. “See anything?” Kira nodded enthusiastically. “There are three houses that caught my eye, and I think I do like the look of this loft Gallegar owns. Could we look at them all?” “I’ll give Sarah a call and set up things for tonight. If we aren’t going anywhere else?” He raised his eyebrow at Kira questioningly. Kira blushed. “I don’t think so. At least, as far as I know, the joining is complete. I do want to help Patrick though. I promised him we would be over tonight.” Danolas picked up the phone. “I’ll set things up with Sarah for four-thirty. That way, we can take a look at the houses and then go over to Patrick’s and meet Gallegar.” He spoke on the phone for a few minutes to the unseen Sarah. “All set,” he said, putting the phone down. “What about the loft?” “We’ll have to wait for Gallegar to see it. Maybe later tonight. Now, how ’bout we go do a little shopping?” Kira’s face lit up like a Christmas tree. “Can I get some of that choc...o…late ice cream?” Danolas burst into laughter. “All you want, my Lady!” **** An hour and a half later in mock exhaustion, Danolas fell into a chair at a nearby restaurant. “Women and shopping.” He pretended to shudder. “Even a newly created woman. I thought you would be different.” He dropped two bags at his feet. Jorad and Tobias, the bodyguards took a table nearby. Kira giggled girlishly, putting down the two shopping bags she carried. “Shopping is fun. Can we go again tomorrow?” She laughed at the horrified look on Danolas’ face. 293

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “My Lady, tomorrow I will allow Lucas that honor.” He grinned as he said it, showing her he was teasing. “Are you hungry?” “Yes,” she looked up as a waitress came to take their order. “I’ll start with a chocolate shake.” Danolas ordered coffee. They opened the menus the waitress had brought them. After making their choices and the waitress had left, Kira looked seriously at Danolas. “Tell me more about the Gates of Life.” Danolas looked around at the other diners. He spoke softly. “The Gates of Life are very important for most humans. Their belief system is founded on some type of life after death. To have it bound up for such a long time…” He shook his head. “It is no wonder Patrick feels such a burden.” “Who would have the power to shut them down?” “That’s something I’ve been trying to figure out. It would take someone of enormous power and knowledge. And what advantage would shutting down the gates have for anybody? Other than throwing the spirit world into confusion…I can’t think of anything.” The waitress brought their drinks, and Kira thanked her with a smile. “Ummm, this is good.” She sipped at her shake. Her brow furrowed in concentration. “If we go on the premise whoever did this wanted the spirit world in confusion, what good would that do?” Danolas looked frustrated. “I don’t know that either.” He blew on his coffee to cool it. “Patrick said that his spirits are hard to control. I sensed great anger and despair when we were there last night. Perhaps whoever has closed the Gates wants the discord.” 294

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Kira tapped her straw on the bottom of her glass as she thought. “Could the discord be what he is after?” “It could be. A group of angry shades would be formidable.” “And Patrick as a new leader might not have the knowledge to control them.” Danolas narrowed his eyes at her. “You think the old leader, Sebastian, was gotten rid of?” Kira shrugged. “It is possible. Patrick did say he went to a witch for help and then disappeared.” “No, my Lady,” Danolas corrected sharply. “He didn’t go to a witch, but to a wizard. That is a very different thing.” “I do not understand.” Danolas sighed. “It is one of the biggest misconceptions about my kind. Wizards are not witches. They have nothing to do with each other.” He paused for a minute as the waitress brought their plates. After she had left, he continued. “A wizard is not a true supernatural being. They are not immortal. They are mortals who dabble with magicks inherently evil. The cost of using these magicks is to lose their souls.” Kira stared at him in horror, her fork in her mouth. She chewed quickly and swallowed. “Lose their souls? Where do they go?” Danolas’ tone was grim. “The souls are given to the evil one. When a mortal loses his soul, he is bound for hell. A wizard is given the ability to lengthen his life, but eventually, they all die.” “And go to hell.” Kira’s voice was no more than a whisper. “Yes, so if Sebastian went to a wizard, he went to someone who worked with evil magicks. Someone who might have been working for the evil that closed the Gates in the first place.” Kira chewed on her fork. “So getting rid of Sebastian and putting a less experienced Ethereal in his place could all be a part of the plan.” 295

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “It is a theory.” Danolas took a bite of his own meal. His stomach turned at the taste. That was odd. The food here was usually delicious. He shook it off, and looked at Kira. “We will need to ask Patrick…My Lady…what is wrong?” Danolas surged to his feet as Kira slumped back in her chair. Her face had gone pale and her lips were turning blue. The fork fell from her hand. “Cannot breathe…feel sick…” Kira collapsed into his arms. Danolas touched her face, searching with his magick. What he saw chilled him. He turned hurriedly to his two men, not worrying about the other diners. “Tobias, get the car. Jorad, gather our things, as well as the food and drink at this table.” He lifted Kira in his arms, staggering as he felt weakness hit him as well. Jorad spelled the contents of their table into nothingness then turned to his master. Danolas’ face was grim. “She’s been poisoned.” **** “Faster, Tobias, faster!” Danolas’ voice was urgent. The car squealed around the corners as it made its way back to the Keep. “We must get her behind the wards before the poison can go further into her bloodstream.” “Master…a healing spell.” “I have already tried that!” he snapped at Jorad. “It was the first thing I tried. It didn’t work.” Jorad looked at his High Priest with dismay. “If it cannot be healed, then it is a poison that has its base in magick.” “I know.” Danolas ran his hand over Kira’s cool cheek. She moved restlessly beneath his hand. “I know.” The car pulled up in front of The Magick Box and Danolas quickly carried Kira inside. He felt the wards come up behind them and breathed a little easier. Now the poison couldn’t do 296

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining more damage. Swiftly, he carried her into his office and laid her on the couch. He laid his hands on Kira and let his magick flow through her. He traveled through her body, searching for the poison he knew was there. Fear built steadily in him as he saw the injury being done. When he reached her chest, he cursed as he saw the sickly green poison wrapped around her heart. He spoke a stronger, more specific healing incantation to it, but was alarmed when the poison didn’t even flinch. A second later, it sent a burst of green ooze at him, throwing him out of Kira’s still body, sending him sprawling on the floor beside her. “High Priest!” came Jorad’s worried voice. He helped Danolas to his feet. Danolas dropped back down beside Kira and took her cold hand in his. She was barely conscious. He looked up at Jorad, who blanched at the alarm he saw in his master’s face. “Call for Morag. Perhaps the Healer can tell us more about this.” Danolas turned back to Kira, hearing Jorad’s footsteps recede quickly down the hall. **** It seemed like forever before Danolas heard footsteps pounding down the hall. He had a moment to wonder why Morag was making so much noise, before the door flew open and Lucas ran in. His pale face was covered in sweat and his silver eyes looked glassy. “What’s happened?” he demanded as he went to his knees and took Kira in his arms. Danolas didn’t stop him. Maybe Lucas’ passionate presence would be a benefit. “She has been poisoned,” he answered baldly. “Down the street at a restaurant.” “God damn it…” Lucas cursed vividly as he held Kira, his large hand smoothing back the hair at her forehead. “What have you done?” 297

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas shook his head. “I tried to work several healing spells myself, but nothing worked. I went inside psychically, but the poison is so strong, it threw me out. I brought her back to the Keep since nothing can be harmed here. Being here slows the poison.” “But doesn’t stop it?” Lucas asked harshly. Danolas drew a shaking hand through his hair. “No, it doesn’t stop it. I have called for our most powerful healer. I am hopeful she can help Kira.” More footsteps were heard and Lucas looked up to see Benjamin enter. His face was wild, but he looked human, his red Suprahuman eyes covered by black contact lenses. “Kira!” Benjamin sat down next to Lucas and took her free hand. He stared hotly at the other men. “I was on my way to my office when I felt something was wrong. What happened to her?” Danolas quickly explained. Benjamin shook his head. “It was like I felt it when she got sick. My chest began to hurt and I couldn’t breathe. I knew something had happened to Kira.” Lucas nodded in agreement. “I was on my way here. I knew I was a little early, but I thought we could go look at houses.” His voice broke, and he touched Kira’s face lovingly. “I felt like I got hit in the stomach.” Lucas looked at both men. “I knew something was wrong too.” Danolas bowed his head, his eyes burning. “I don’t know how this happened. I didn’t even know we were going to eat there until we walked by. How could anyone set this up? But it is my fault. I didn’t protect her. I didn’t keep her safe!” “Hey!” Lucas put his hand on Danolas’ shoulder, and gave it a hard shake.” You couldn’t have known this would happen. Someone must have been following you and just took a chance.” “A crime of opportunity,” Benjamin determined. 298

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Patrick popped in next to Benjamin, his eyes intense. He bent over Kira’s still form. “Sugar!” His voice was rough. He tried to kiss her on the cheek, but his body kept fading in and out. “I’m having some trouble keeping my form. I can’t stay corporeal.” A tall man raced into the room almost on Patrick’s heels. His blond hair flew around his face. Lucas hunched over Kira, growling protectively as Danolas instinctively raised his staff in defense. “Who are you? What are you…Koran?” Danolas finally recognized the anxious faerie. Koran had taken on the appearance of a human man with regular blond hair and tanned skin. His eyes were more amber than gold. “Sorry,” Lucas grimaced, as Kira’s brother knelt beside him. “Didn’t recognize you.” Koran didn’t answer, his thoughts were only on Kira. “Tell me what has happened!” he demanded. Danolas brokenly retold the story. He looked at Koran with hope on his face. “Can you do anything? Maybe Faerie magick.” Koran placed his hands on Kira and made the same journey Danolas had done earlier. He acknowledged Danolas’ warning about not touching the poison, but felt sick when he saw what it was. “It is magick,” he said and as he lost his composure, his skin slowly turned to gold. He frowned at it when he noticed and forced it back to tan. “It is not Faerie magick. It looks more like wizardry to me.” Danolas went white. “We were talking about wizards when it happened. We were discussing Sebastian going to a wizard for help.” He paused as he heard another come into the room. They all looked around and saw an older witch with long white hair and a sweet expression. She walked straight to 299

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas, not even looking at the group of men huddled around Kira. “High Priest, you have need of me?” “Thank the Goddesses. Morag, the Lady Kira has been poisoned. I can see it, but I can’t heal her. Can you help her?” Danolas pulled her over to Kira as he spoke. The men parted like the Red Sea so she could get next to Kira. Morag looked at Kira, then at the surrounding men. She nodded. “I will look, High Priest.” The old woman knelt next to Kira and placed a gnarled hand on her cheek. “She barely breathes, my Lord.” She closed her eyes and spelled herself deep into Kira’s body. Danolas and Koran knew the moment she saw the hideous miasma, because she jerked and stumbled away from Kira’s body. She looked shaken. “Do you know what it is?” Lucas asked, his voice hoarse. Morag licked her lips, frightened. “Morag, we must know. Can you help her?” Danolas took the old healer by the elbow. “I am sorry High Priest. I cannot help your Lady. This is a wizard’s poison, brewed especially for her. It attacks the life force. It drains her very life away.” “There must be something we can do.” Benjamin rose unsteadily to his feet. He staggered a little and Jorad put out his hand to steady him. Morag looked at each of the men. “Are these the one the Peacekeeper has joined with?” she asked sharply. “All of us here were Chosen,” Danolas answered somewhat evasively, for Lucas’ sake. “Why?” “You all suffer with her. I can see it.” Suddenly, Danolas understood. “We shared Kira’s life force.” He shared his thoughts with them all. “We are sickening along with our Lady.” 300

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Morag stared curiously as Koran lost his tan and turned golden. Patrick continued to fade in and out. “Morag.” Danolas pulled her attention back to himself. Is there any herb, any remedy you can give to cure us?” “No, my Lord. The only thing that can heal the Peacekeeper…is the wizard who wrought the spell. It is no different than our magick in that way.” “Damn it, I don’t buy that. We have to be able to do something.” Lucas leaned back against the couch. He too, could feel his strength slipping. “I’m sorry, but there is no known magick that can undo a wizard’s spell. We can prevent it. Sometimes we can change it. And we can fight it as it is happening, but this is too far along. No one can do anything.” “Leave us, Morag.” Danolas waved at her as he sat back down. “We thank you for your wisdom. Go and think on this. If you come up with something, let me know immediately.” “As you wish, High Priest.” Morag bowed herself out of the room. Koran shook his head, his body tight in anger. “There must be a way. I have not just found my sister to lose her.”

301

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 17 Benjamin sank back down on the floor. Even his strength was going. “We can’t just let her die.” “Let’s start at the beginning,” Koran said tiredly. “How did she get poisoned?” “We were eating at a restaurant. Suddenly we both started feeling sick, but she collapsed.” Lucas frowned. “You said you were talking about wizards just before you got sick?” Danolas rubbed his hand wearily over his face. “We were talking about the possibility Sebastian had been removed by the wizard he went to see.” He went over his and Kira’s entire conversation then looked at Patrick. “An inexperienced leader is always easier to control. We were just saying we needed to talk to you when, bam…it hit us.” Patrick looked at Koran intently. “Can a spell be timed to go off with a word or a phrase?” Koran’s eyes brightened, as he caught Patrick’s chain of thought. “Yes, if a magician didn’t want something to be talked about, he could weave a spell into the very air so it would go off when certain key words were spoken.” “How can you ward against that?” Benjamin wondered. “It wouldn’t be easy, but it can be done. We would have to put traveling wards around us all.” Danolas was thoughtful, but then he raised his eyes to the rest of the men. “But we have to get her through this one first. What can we do?” 302

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas thought of something. “The witch Morag said it was attacking her life force…right? Draining it away?” Koran nodded. “What are you thinking, Lucas?” Lucas was silent for a while. When he looked at them, his eyes glistened. “What if Gallegar is the key?” Benjamin and Patrick looked at Danolas as he staggered to his feet excitedly. “I don’t understand,” Benjamin asked. “You may be right, Lucas. Tell them.” Danolas could barely speak. “Gallegar gave his life for Kira, remember? It is part of his joining with her. We all heard the words. If this curse was tailor made for Kira, then the person who made it would know the only one who might be able to help her, rests during the day. Set the magick so it goes off during the day and poof, Kira dies.” Patrick frowned. “Then why isn’t she dead?” “Because I got her to my Keep before the poison could take hold. The Keep will not allow harm to come to any unless I wish it. The Keep’s wardings keep her alive,” Danolas answered. “But the wardings can’t heal her. And we all can feel her slipping away. Hell, I feel it myself. I’m weaker than I was when I got here.” Benjamin spoke despondently. “True. She will die if we cannot figure this out. But it gives us something to work with.” Danolas looked at each of them, and his eyes burned with hope. “Morag said there was no known magick to break a witch or wizard’s spell, but look at us. Yesterday, we were unknown to each other. Our magicks have blended into a new power. Who says this new magick cannot break through this horrible curse?” Patrick smiled for the first time since entering the room. “Maybe we just gotta have faith,” he said, quietly. The others smiled with him. 303

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “And we need Gallegar. His is the life force that can heal her.” Koran looked at Danolas. “Do we dare take her to him?” “If we remove her from the wardings, I think she will die immediately. Gallegar must come here.” Lucas looked at his watch, his jaw tight. “We still have two hours till sunset. And if Gallegar is feeling like we do, he’ll be pretty weak.” “He won’t have fed either. He might not even be able to walk.” Koran rubbed his head nervously. Danolas turned to Jorad. “Go to A Crown of Thorns. There should be a caretaker there to whom you can tell what has happened. Bring Gallegar here as soon as he rises from his rest.” Danolas paused, and his eyes met Jorad’s. “He will need to be fed as soon as he gets up. There will be no time to wait. He will have to feed in the car.” Jorad stumbled away from Danolas. His voice was pleading. “Not I, High Lord!” Danolas shook his head impatiently. “No, no. There are always those nearby to allow the Master to feed. Bring one of them.” Jorad hesitated. It was clearly a job he didn’t relish doing. “You are the only one I can trust with this, Jorad. You know King Gallegar and he knows you. He will trust you are telling him the truth. He will know I have sent you.” Jorad bowed. “I will do as you ask, High Priest. I will bring him here as soon as I can.” They all watched as Jorad ran from the room. “What do we do now?” Benjamin whispered. Danolas just looked at him. “There is nothing we can do, but wait.” **** 304

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Time seemed to crawl after that. The men spoke of different things, trying to keep their minds off what was happening. Danolas told them about the houses and the loft Kira wanted to see. He had Tobias send word to the realtor, Sarah, there would be a delay. Everyone took hope from that small gesture. But as time slipped by, they could all feel themselves weakening. Lucas continued to hold Kira, but even his strong arms began shaking after a while. Kira woke just as the sun touched the top of the buildings in the west. She gazed around at the circle of men. It seemed she was too weak to speak, but she slowly and painfully touched each of the Chosen on the cheek. Then they heard her mind-speech. It sounded very far, far away. “I…love…you…all…” Her eyes closed and her body went limp. “No!” shouted Lucas. He rose, staggering, and laid her down on a fur in front of the fire. Taking her hand in his, he willed the remainder of his strength into her body. “We…just…need…to hold…on…till…Gallegar gets…here…” The others crowded around her, and touching her in some way added their strength to Lucas’. “Her…heart…still beats.” Danolas’ eyes teared with emotion. “Hold on, sugar.” Patrick gritted his teeth to keep his hand in corporeal form so he could add his touch to his brethrens’. “Just hold on.” **** Gallegar awoke in his Sanctuary with the knowledge something was very wrong. His heart was beating overly fast and he thought he’d heard Kira call his name. His body felt odd as well. 305

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Usually he was well rested when he rose, but tonight he felt drawn and weak. He barely had the strength to lift his body from his bed. Pushing himself to the floor, Gallegar staggered to the closet. It seemed to take hours just to get a pair of pants on, let alone his shirt and shoes. He shook his head to clear it. What is wrong with me? He checked himself. There were no wounds on his body. Nothing to account for his weakened state. He unlocked the door of his special chamber, and stumbled into the outer room. Once there he unleashed his power and opened the door that couldn’t be seen by any eyes other than his own. He recoiled back, when as soon as the door opened, Jorad rushed into the room. As soon as Gallegar saw him, he realized why he was so weak. Kira…Something had happened to Kira. “What…” he tried to say, but the witch was already manhandling him out the door. “We must go, my Lord. There is not much time. I will explain in the car.” Jorad was as good as his word. He quickly had Gallegar in the back seat of Danolas’ Volvo. A second later, he sped out of the parking lot and down the street. “What is going on?” Gallegar found the strength to say. “I will tell you, Lord Gallegar, but first you must eat. I…brought someone for you.” Gallegar turned and saw Alex, one of the humans whom he fed off of once a month. He frowned. “Alex, it is not your turn. To feed from you will weaken you greatly.” Alex shrugged. “There was no time to find anyone else. I happened to stop by to pick up my paycheck when I heard what was going on. I was the only human in the building. It was me or nobody.” 306

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Please, Lord Gallegar, we don’t have much time. I will explain while you…feed.” “I am too weak to enthrall you, Alex. It will be more painful than normal.” Alex just nodded and closed his eyes. Gallegar was ravenous, but he controlled himself enough to break the skin as gently as possible before allowing the blood to flow. While he ate, Jorad told him what was happening at the Keep. **** Gallegar’s heart pounded in fear when they reached The Magick Box. He had fed fully, thanks to Alex, but even with the fresh blood, he didn’t have his full strength. He was terrified that in his weakened state, Kira might have slipped away and he wouldn’t know it. When they pulled up to the door, Gallegar threw open the door and jumped out. He was still so weak he couldn’t hide his vampiric qualities. His green eyes glowed and fangs showed as he stumbled to the door. He shocked several couples in the parking lot. There were muttered exclamations and screams. Jorad hurried around to Gallegar’s side and braced the vampire king against him. He smiled radiantly at the crowd. “Just part of the show, folks. We’re thinking of bringing in actors to play vampires. What do you think?” A smattering of applause was his answer. He bowed to the patrons, and then turning, led Gallegar to the side door. “Quick thinking, witch. I can barely manage to walk, let alone pretend to be human.” Jorad opened the door and pushed Gallegar through. “This joining is fraught with more danger than anyone knew.” Gallegar smiled weakly. “Maybe that means it will be more successful than we believed as well.” “Optimism is good, my Lord.” 307

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar threw a look behind him. “Alex will need sustenance. I took much from him tonight.” “He’s not dead?” Gallegar scowled at him. “I do not kill those who are loyal to me. Alex has been with me for many years. He will need food and drink and a place to rest himself.” Jorad nodded. “I will take care of him as soon as I get you inside to the Lady.” Moments later, Gallegar stepped alone through Danolas’ bedroom door. He was greeted by a sight that chilled his heart. Kira was lying on the floor next to the fire, and all the Chosen were laying around her, completely limp. “By the Power,” he breathed as he staggered forward, closing the door firmly behind him. He dropped to his knees next to Danolas and put his hand sorrowfully on his friend’s shoulder. “My brother,” he choked out. He caught his breath as Danolas wearily opened his eyes. “Gallegar, you’re here…” Gallegar wiped his arm across suddenly damp eyes. “I thought I was too late.” “Almost are… She needs…your life force. It may be all that can cure her.” “And you?” Danolas smiled. “And us all…” He reached up, and took Gallegar by the hand. “Go inside. Let your power do what needs…what needs to be…done. We know you can do it.” His eyes closed, and his hand dropped to his side. Gallegar felt a moment’s panic as Danolas fell back unconscious. What did he know? His wasn’t the gift of understanding. He looked down at Kira’s pale face. His eyes burned with unshed tears, as he reached down and touched her face. It was like ice. Its coldness shocked him into action. 308

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Letting his magick guide him, he put his hand on the brand he had marked her with. Drawing a deep breath into his lungs, he allowed his power to carry him inside her. Through skin, and muscle and bone he traveled. Deep inside, he let his magick take him to the source of Kira’s deathlike stillness. He could sense she was still alive, barely. Her heart was beating, but so slowly it was frightening. He worked his way through the body to the source of life. Her heart. The green poison that Danolas and Koran had seen was there. Stronger now and more vile. It saw him coming and undulated wickedly, squeezing her heart with poison tendrils. Gallegar reached for the green menace, but when he touched it, the poison wrapped itself around him and he screamed in pain. It burned him, just like the Words of Death had done. He jerked away, putting distance between himself and the poison. What can I do here? How can I break the poison’s grasp on Kira? Danolas said she needed his life force. But how can I give it to her? Suddenly, he heard the Power whisper in his mind. Hearing the words, Gallegar came out of Kira’s body and looked around at the unconscious men. They had to wake up. He didn’t know why yet, but it was necessary to help Kira. But how? He did not have the knowledge. He moved back to Danolas’ side and shook his friend hard, trying to awaken him. Danolas moaned and his eyelids trembled. When his eyes finally opened, his gaze was out of focus and weak. “Danolas!” Gallegar called to him, his voice frenzied. “I need you and the others to come out of it. All of us must combine powers to fight this menace.” Danolas tried to sit up, but his arms wouldn’t support him. “Danolas! The Power says we all have to be awake to help Kira. How do I wake the others? I need your help!” 309

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Danolas shook his head, trying to concentrate on Gallegar’s words. “Strength…” he muttered. “We need more strength.” Gallegar went still. He knew how to give them the strength they needed, but in doing so, he would run the risk of alienating them all. He looked back at Kira, who was looking grayer with every minute that passed. As much as he feared the choice he must make, it was the only way he could think of to help them all. Glancing around, he caught sight of the ceremonial dagger Benjamin wore strapped to his thigh. He eased it out of the sheath and turned back to Danolas who was looking at him with bleary eyes. “It is the only way,” he said hoarsely, as with a quick motion he slit open his wrist. He held it against Danolas’ mouth and then squeezed his hand into a fist, causing the rich blood to flow into the witch’s mouth. Danolas’ eyes widened as he choked and swallowed. He fought against Gallegar’s grip. Gallegar felt his own eyes fill with tears. “Forgive me, my friend.” Danolas took in Gallegar’s blood for several minutes. Then with an oath, he pushed away from him and struggled to his knees. He stared at Gallegar with something like loathing in his sapphire eyes. “What have you done to me?” “I have given you my strength,” Gallegar returned, his face pale, his bloody arm dripping at his side. “I knew of no other way.” Danolas stared at him. He saw the vampire’s weakness and felt Gallegar’s anguish through their link. He knew why the vampire had done it. Supernatural creatures didn’t react to vampire blood the way humans did. Instead of turning them into vampires, it gave a supernatural…special powers. But knowing that didn’t stop the repugnance that filled Danolas now. He had drunk blood and it had strengthened him. 310

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining He hated himself for it as much as he did Gallegar for making him do it. He wanted to vomit it all out, but his gaze fell to Kira who looked so frail and insubstantial, so close to death. He wanted to rail at Gallegar for what he had done, but Danolas knew in his heart, Gallegar had done the only thing possible to help them all. He fought the inner battle for several minutes. “I’m sorry.” Gallegar’s face was filled with selfcondemnation. “I should have thought of another way. I panicked. I…” Danolas stopped him with a hard squeeze to his shoulder. “You did what was right. Forgive me for my reaction. I was thinking only of myself. Not of our Lady or of you.” Gallegar looked at him in astonishment. “You’re okay with…” He motioned to his bloody arm with the dagger. Danolas felt his insides cringe, but he held it together as he looked at his friend. “It is not an easy thing to accept. It is not a part of who I am, but if your blood is needed to help us cure Kira, then we must take it with gratitude.” “The others?” Danolas shrugged. “They will do it because they must. Do not allow yourself to be hurt by their reactions. You are doing the right thing.” Gallegar sat totally still as he reflected on Danolas’ words. He had made the decision out of concern for Kira, but he had known before he started how the Chosen would respond. What was natural for him was repulsive to them. But he would deal with their anger if it meant saving his beloved. Kira was everything to him. He moved next to Benjamin, who was lying unconscious next to Danolas. Danolas lifted the Suprahuman’s head and with a quick motion, Gallegar pressed his arm against his mouth. Benjamin groaned and tried to twist away, but then some inner 311

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining knowledge of self-preservation took over and, after a few moments, he was drinking down Gallegar’s blood as fast as he could. “Be careful,” Danolas warned, when after several long minutes, Gallegar finally removed his arm from Benjamin’s grasp. “It won’t do us any good for you to keel over due to blood loss.” “I will measure the amounts I give carefully, my friend. I must have enough for Kira if necessary.” They both watched as Benjamin gained consciousness. His first act was to wipe away the blood smeared on his mouth. He looked sick as he realized what had happened. He wouldn’t meet either of their eyes. Gallegar moved on to Patrick, whose essence was draped over the rug next to Kira. He was only partially corporeal, his upper body able to be touched. Gallegar breathed a prayer of gratitude as he was able to open Patrick’s mouth so he could take in the life-giving blood. “Gallegar…” Benjamin came up behind him. Gallegar stiffened, expecting the worst. He was shocked when the Suprahuman moved around him and carefully held Patrick’s head so the blood would go in easier. His eyes met the vampire’s. “I’m not angry with you. Not much anyway.” He gave him a crooked grin. “It was just a little unnerving to find myself enjoying something I thought I would find gross.” “Enjoying it?” Gallegar stared at the big man. “Well, not really enjoying it. But it was kinda an instinctive reaction. I knew I needed it, so getting it felt…good. It was embarrassing.” They both went silent as Patrick’s eyes flew open. He struggled weakly against their grasps, but they held him until he 312

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining had drunk as much of Gallegar’s blood as the vampire felt he needed. Only then did Gallegar move away. He watched as Patrick painfully got to his feet. He stood swaying, as he waited to get his equilibrium back. The Ethereal touched his mouth, and looked at the blood that stained his fingers, and his face turned red with the effort of keeping the repast in his stomach. “Why?” was all he asked. “To give you strength to fight.” Gallegar sighed. Patrick wasn’t going to accept what he had done as easily as the others. He had once been human and those standards still applied. To give Patrick the space he needed, Gallegar moved on to Koran, who was lying with Kira’s head in his lap. His face was almost as gray as hers. As he knelt next to Koran, Gallegar noticed the slit on his wrist was healing, so he reopened it with a swift slash of the knife. He heard Patrick gasp behind him, but the cutting made him stagger, so he couldn’t respond. He made a fist and watched as his blood flowed unceasingly into Koran’s open mouth. Benjamin was there again to help him as the faerie began to thrash against the coppery taste. Being immortal, Koran was stronger than Benjamin or Patrick, so he came back quicker. The knowledge of what was happening filled his eyes as he threw Gallegar’s arm off of him and surged to his feet. “You sharas…bastard…” Koran swore. “You have defiled me.” He wiped the blood from his face, glaring at Gallegar. “It was necessary.” Danolas soothed the distraught faerie. “All of us are needed to help your sister. We all have to be conscious. A vampire can share his strength by giving his blood. It is a gift, Koran, not defilement.” Koran didn’t say anything, but just continued staring at Gallegar. His anger was palatable. 313

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining With a sigh, Gallegar crawled over to Lucas, the last of the unconscious Chosen. He knew he had saved him till last because he knew how Lucas would respond. Badly. He pried open the shapeshifter’s mouth and with a grimace, pressed his forearm to it Lucas’ mouth clamped against his arm, his fangs growing so they bit down deeply. Gallegar closed his eyes in agony. He wondered if this was the pain humans felt when an unschooled vampire fed off of them. The unconscious werewolf sucked strongly at the blood flowing into his mouth. Lucas wasn’t trying to get away, but just the opposite. His kind also fed on blood when they were changed. Flesh and blood, if they had not the strength to do otherwise. Drinking Gallegar’s blood was almost normal. He knew the minute Lucas woke up. The shapeshifter went still, and then with an inhuman growl pushed Gallegar away. He stared in horror at the vampire. “What are you doing?” His voice was appalled. “What did you make me do?” Lucas felt the blood dripping down his chin, and wiping it away, began to swear at Gallegar. “I swore I would never… You son of a bitch.” With a mighty lunge, he threw himself on the Irishman. The two supernaturals rolled around on the ground. Gallegar made no effort to protect himself, so Lucas got a few punches in before Benjamin and Danolas dragged him off. The wolfman shouted curses at Gallegar, but the vampire just rose to his feet, and said nothing. He was very pale and his eyes were shadowed. Blood ran from his nose where Lucas had made contact. He looked at the angry man, and just shook his head. He had known when he started what he had done would antagonize his friends, and he would do it again to save Kira’s life. He knew they would never feel the same way about him. 314

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar was surprised at just how much that thought hurt him. He hadn’t realized just how much these men had come to mean to him. Danolas looked at the pale and weary Gallegar. His heart bled for him. Without thinking, he slapped Lucas across the face. “Stop it!” he shouted at the surprised shifter. Lucas just stared at him in shock. “Gallegar did what he had to do to save Kira. Do you think he enjoyed doing this?” He stared around at all the Chosen. “Giving his blood to us is a tremendous gift. A vampire can only do it a few times in his lifetime. His blood gives those supernaturals who take it strength and longevity. In this case, we hope it will give us time to figure out how to help our Lady. How dare you treat him this way?” The other Chosen looked at Gallegar guiltily, but he just shook his head with a weary laugh. “I knew going in how you would react. I knew I would lose whatever friendship was beginning between us. But I must be honest with you. I would do it again, if it means saving the woman I love. I am sorry for what I did, but I wouldn’t change it.” Lucas stared at the bleeding Gallegar. His outrage drained out of him as he saw for the first time how hard this truly was for Gallegar. He hadn’t done it out of spite or anger. He had done it to save Kira. How can I fault him for that? He felt like a royal idiot. He swore ripely and all eyes turned to him. Picking up a towel that they had used earlier to cushion Kira’s head, Lucas crossed over and gently wrapped it around Gallegar’s bleeding wrist. “You did… okay,” he said stiffly. “I understand. Gallegar looked at him with eyes wet with tears. The vampire reached over and clasped hands with the shapeshifter. “I thank you, my friend. You are very generous. But I know I have 315

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining wronged you all. I didn’t have your permission to bind you in this way.” “Can it be reversed?” That was from Patrick. Gallegar shook his head sorrowfully. “I am sorry. Once you have taken my blood, the bond is permanent.” “We will be part vampire?” Koran tried to keep the distress from his voice, but failed. “Don’t be stupid,” Benjamin butted in. “We are already part vampire, remember? From the joining. So we are just a little more now. Isn’t it worth it for Kira? Why are we standing around belly-aching? Shouldn’t we be trying to figure out a cure?” The Chosen all stood for a moment, frozen by Benjamin’s harsh words. Then, carefully, they all moved toward Kira’s unconscious body and knelt beside her. “You are right, Benjamin,” Koran said. He looked at Gallegar. “I was not thinking. I hope I speak for all when I say thank you.” Gallegar was startled. “Thank you?” “Yes, thank you.” The faerie smoothed Kira’s hair back from her face. “Your sacrifice has given us a chance to save her. And I am not talking about the blood. You were willing to sacrifice your chance to be our friend for her. I will not forget that.” Patrick leaned over and shook Gallegar’s hand. Gallegar’s shocked stare met his. “It is hard to grasp…what y’all did. Everything in me wants to hate you, but I find I can’t. You are a good man, Gallegar. It’s why you’re our leader. You were ready to give up everything to help Kira. Since she is the most important thing in all our lives, how can we hate you for what you have done? ” He let go of the vampire’s hand and turned his attention to Kira. He touched her arm gently. “So what do we do now?” 316

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Gallegar looked around at the men who circled Kira’s prone form. He swallowed hard, trying to bring himself under control. They hadn’t thrown him out or refused to allow him to be a part of them. It may take awhile, but eventually they all just might forgive what he had done. He cleared his throat and tried to speak, but nothing came out. Danolas reached over to the table and got a glass of wine they had been drinking earlier in the evening. He handed it to Gallegar. “The loss of blood has made your throat dry. Drink down some of this before you tell us what to do.” Gallegar took the proffered glass and drank several swallows. It did help his throat and when he tried, he found he could again speak. “The Power told me we all needed to be awake to find a cure for Kira.” Lucas waited a beat, and then asked incredulously, “Is that it? You got nothing else?” Gallegar shook his head. “Nothing specific. I tried to go in and attack the poison as Danolas had suggested, but I got nowhere. It burned me when I touched it.” “Then what do we do now?” Patrick repeated the question he had asked earlier. “The old witch, Morag, told us the only way to defeat this thing was to find the wizard who made it. Can we do that?” Benjamin looked between Gallegar and Danolas. Danolas pondered that. “We know nothing about him, but what Patrick knows.” He turned and looked at the Ethereal. “What is his name?” Patrick looked nervous. “Can we speak it, and not fall prey to the same sickness as Kira? We aren’t completely healthy.” “We are dying because Kira is.” Danolas was blunt in his speaking. “What Gallegar has given us is time. For Kira and ourselves. The wards in this place will protect us. Of that I am sure.” 317

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Patrick nodded. “His name was Adrian. I remember him well. He was so smug when I visited him after Sebastian disappeared. I could tell he was lying, but there was nothing I could do about it. I had no proof he was involved. Just a gut feeling.” Danolas went very still. “Adrian…he is a very powerful wizard. He could easily be the cause of all this.” Gallegar had taken Kira’s hand in his and stroked it, hoping she could somehow feel it, wherever she was. “He will not readily help us.” Danolas shook his head. “He will do all he can to hurt us. He is an evil creature. If he has anything to do with the problem with the Gates of Life, we will have a battle on our hands.” Koran frowned. “At the moment, I am more concerned about my sister. What can we do for her? Will he help us by disarming his spell?” Danolas gave a pained laugh. “He would rather have a front seat to watch her fade away. He was a terrible man and an even more horrid wizard.” Gallegar thought about what Danolas said. “How badly would he want to watch her die?” The men turned and stared at Gallegar in horror. “What the hell are you saying? Lucas asked, his frown fierce. “We need to get some answers if we are to save Kira. To do that we must speak to the wizard. Would watching her die be a big enough incentive to get him here?” Danolas rubbed his hand over his staff. “I don’t know. I think he is evil enough to enjoy watching us squirm, but I’m not sure it will do us any good. He will just have more of an opportunity to hurt us.” “Not if we changed the warding so he could exist in a specific space, but have no purchase in any other.” Koran’s voice 318

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining grew excited as he caught the gist of Gallegar’s idea. “He could watch…but he could not touch.” “But getting him here wouldn’t guarantee him telling us anything. It could all be a waste of time. Something we don’t have much of.” Lucas stared at Kira. “Yes, we are running out of time, but we must get information from him. And if he will not give it freely…” Gallegar smiled a smile that Lucas recognized. He began to laugh. “If he won’t tell us what we want to know, we will just con it out of him! Damn it, Gallegar!” Lucas reached over and pounded the vampire on his back. “You are a slick one!” Koran was looking at the two men with one eyebrow raised. “Care to let us all in on the joke?” Danolas grinned as well. “When Elijah wouldn’t let Lucas come with us, he pretended to be afraid of Kira and he conned his leader into sending him to us as a spy.” “It was Gallegar’s idea,” Lucas said modestly. “So you think we can do the same thing here? Trick this Adrian into telling us how to cure Kira?” Patrick looked at the three grinning men. “It is a chance,” Gallegar responded. “How do we get him here?” Benjamin had bent down to take Kira’s pulse. “She is getting weaker. We are running out of time.” “I will lower the warding. Make it look as though I have lost some of my strength and can’t keep the whole place warded. If he is as arrogant as I remember, he will come.” Danolas used his staff to mark an area apart from where Kira and the others were. “Don’t go past this line,” he warned. “I have it marked where we can see it, but not Adrian. If you leave the protected area, he can hurt you and maybe us all. Be very careful.” 319

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining They watched as he finished marking an area about ten feet by ten feet. Danolas then looked around at them all. “Play it well, my friends. This may be the only chance our Lady has left.” With a flick of his wrist, he dropped the warding. Gallegar immediately went into action. “I am thankful we were able to cure this sickness. The ridiculous wizard who created this didn’t do enough research.” Danolas nodded his head in agreement. “His plan is flawed, but then he doesn’t know the truth about us all.” “He probably thinks we haven’t figured out where the spell came from,” Patrick mocked. “He hasn’t figured out we know everything about him. Even his name.” “We wouldn’t have known who he was without your council.” Koran smiled at Patrick. “He thought you were too green to understand.” “That wizard was the green one,” Benjamin announced. “And as old as you’ve told us he is? He should have known better.” The Chosen chuckled, their laughter filling the room. Gallegar, kneeling beside Kira, was the first to notice the fog as it appeared in the unwarded area. He mind-spoke quickly to all the other Chosen, telling them of their success. “She will be well soon.” He spoke out loud, lifting her hand to his lips. He didn’t allow his expression to change, but shivered inside at the touch of her icy skin. “Yes,” grinned Danolas. “That wizard was a fool to think he could defeat us.” That was the straw that broke the wizard’s back. With a great belch of smoke and flare of light, Adrian the wizard came into view.

320

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Chapter 18 He was an old man, bent and crooked with age. His hair was dirty white, as was the beard that straggled down to his bony knees. He dressed in shiny black robes that had mystical symbols engraved on them and he carried a staff somewhat like Danolas’, except the wood was black and gnarled. Adrian swirled the smoke into a ball and threw it at the group standing before him. When it bounced harmlessly off the warded boundaries, he cackled aloud. “You dare to think you can defeat me?” He stared at Danolas as if he was the only one in the room. “I have been working magick longer than you have been alive.” “You are not older than I or my brother here,” Gallegar stated with assurance, as he pointed at Koran. “We are centuries old. You are nothing but an upstart.” The wizard’s eyes bulged in anger. “I am talking to this witch. None of you are worthy of my time.” Danolas yawned. “I would think again, wizard. I wasn’t the one who figured out how to bring our Lady back to the living.” Adrian looked at Kira’s still body. “She doesn’t look very alive to me. I think my spell has worked just fine. She is either dead or dying. I thank you for losing control of your wards. Now I can watch her painful death in person.” Gallegar stopped a growling Lucas from lunging at the old wizard. “She is not dying, Adrian. You didn’t do your homework. When I awoke from my rest, I was weak and tired, 321

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining but I made it here in time. I brought Kira and my brethren back to life. You made a mistake when you crafted your spell.” “Foolish old man.” Patrick sneered at him and Adrian’s temper flared. The wizard looked at each of the Chosen with narrowed, hate-filled eyes. While they all looked tired, they seemed fit enough. He looked at Kira, who lay still on the rug. He frowned to himself. She did look as if she was just sleeping. Could they have managed to break my spell? Impossible. Adrian took a deep breath and swallowed, suddenly realizing if he had made any mistakes, his life would be forfeit with his Master. He told himself all was well, but he had better make sure, just in case. “Tell me then,” he creaked out. “How did you cure her?” Gallegar laughed at him. “Why would we tell you anything? We have beaten you.” “That’s right, you ugly old bastard.” Lucas walked up as close to the old wizard as was safe and laughed in his face. “We beat you and your piss-poor spell.” “I hope your boss didn’t pay you too much for it,” Benjamin put in, his red eyes glowing. He’d taken his contacts out early in the evening. “He sure as hell didn’t get his money’s worth.” Adrian lost his temper and threw a spell point blank at Lucas, who stood the closest. It took everything Lucas had not to flinch, but he managed it. When the spell disintegrated at his feet, Lucas laughed at Adrian again. “Is that the best you got? No wonder you couldn’t kill us.” “How did you break my spell?” Adrian demanded, madness flickering in his eyes. Gallegar watched him closely. His temper was almost out of control. A little more and they would have him. “Easy,” the vampire responded, acting bored with the whole thing. “We just reversed your spell. It wasn’t difficult at all.” 322

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Piece of cake!” Benjamin crowed as he grinned at the now thoroughly angry wizard. He reached down and kissed Kira on the cheek, almost recoiling from the coldness of her flesh. He stopped himself just in time. “That is impossible!” the wizard huffed, pacing the enclosed area. “You would all have had to be there, and I know you were not!” He glared at Gallegar. “Maybe not at first,” Gallegar agreed, his heart pounding. The wizard had given away that they all needed to be together to work the spell. Now if he could just get him to say what it was. Taking a deep breath, he took a shot in the dark. “Once the life force was mingled…” He shrugged, thinking of his joining with Kira. He opened his mouth to continue, but was interrupted by the wizard’s angry scream. “How could you know that? Who told you?” The old wizard hopped up and down with rage. “How could you know to combine all your—” The wizard stopped in mid-leap and clawed at his throat as if in pain. He coughed and choked and fell to the ground as bloody spittle ran down the side of his mouth. His eyes bulged and he writhed on the ground. With a burst of foul smelling fog, he disappeared. They all stood motionless, frozen in surprise, before Danolas came out of it. “Move back, quickly. I must put the warding back up.” Using his staff he concentrated, incantations filling the room. The air was suddenly clean smelling and they all took a deep breath in relief. “All okay?” Lucas asked, as he stared at the place where the wizard had fallen. The other Chosen crowded around him, save Gallegar, who hadn’t left Kira’s side. “We are warded again. All is safe.” “What happened to Adrian?” Benjamin asked, when Danolas had finished speaking. “Why did he fall down like that?” 323

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Koran smiled, and it wasn’t a pleasant one. “I think Adrian said too much and his Master punished him.” “Couldn’t happen to a nicer guy,” Patrick muttered. “But what did he say?” Now it was Gallegar who smiled. “He told us what we needed to know.” He swallowed tightly and bending, gathered Kira into his powerful arms. “I think we have a chance now.” The other Chosen came over to where Gallegar sat, holding the limp Kira in his arms. He stared up at them, uncertainty filling his face. “We will follow your lead in this, Gallegar.” Danolas put his hand on the vampire’s arm. “We trust you.” “You were partially right when you said my life force was needed to heal Kira,” Gallegar assured Danolas. “But what we all missed was the simple fact no one of us can protect her.” “The wagon wheel,” Koran breathed, his eyes filling with understanding. “Yes, the wagon wheel. As our joining was necessary to Kira’s well-being, so are we all needed for her healing. Each must be a part. Each must share their life force.” Danolas shook his head. “That is so easy. Why didn’t I think of it?” Gallegar gave his Gaelic shrug. “It wouldn’t have mattered if you did. It was the timing that was crucial. If you had tried to heal her earlier, it would have failed because I wasn’t there. We all need to participate. That was why the spell was so clever. As you deduced, Adrian knew I would be resting during the day. Even if you were able to bring the rest of you together in time, I could not have been there, so you wouldn’t have succeeded.” “So what really messed him up was Danolas getting Kira back to the Keep before it was too late. The wardings kept her alive. He hadn’t put that into the mix when he thought the curse 324

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining up.” Lucas’ grin filled his face. “You saved Kira’s life, Danolas. Your quick thinking saved her.” “And your sacrifice made it possible to find a cure.” Koran laid a hand on Gallegar’s strong back. “You have both done my sister proud tonight.” “Congratulate me after we bring her back,” Gallegar said, embarrassed. “Then I will feel like I have done something worthy of your thanks.” “What do we do?” Patrick asked. “How do we bring her back?” “I don’t have all the answers,” Gallegar admitted, as he looked at his brethren. “If the curse was crafted to defeat each one of us, then logically, we each have a special power or strength it wants to destroy.” “We were all brought into the circle for different reasons. I’ll bet the curse has something to do with that.” Danolas nodded his head in understanding. “We each gave Kira something different when we joined with her. We should use those things to fight the curse.” Koran took his sisters hand. “I was the last to join with her. I’ll go first now.” “But what if we’re wrong?” Lucas’ jaw tensed in concern. “We have to try.” Gallegar held Kira against his body as if to warm her. “Her heart is slowing down. I can feel it. We’re out of time.” The Chosen all nodded their agreement. Koran took a deep breath and willed himself into Kira’s body. Once he found the horrible slime that infected her, he spoke to Kira, telling her everything was going to be all right. He thought back to the joining and gritting his teeth, he grabbed onto the poison as he said the words that made his and Kira’s power one. “You have given me companionship. I have given you my wisdom. Together we will break down all barriers.” 325

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Koran’s power burst out of him and sliced into the poison. It flinched away from him and Koran felt its pain as he fought it, but then it attacked him with horrific speed. Koran’s strength drained from him. Just before he lapsed into unconsciousness, he sent a mind burst to his brethren. “It works… Use the linking words and attack with the power. Quickly, now. Don’t give up!” The Chosen watched as Koran slid to the ground, hardly breathing. He was as limp as before Gallegar had given him his blood for strength. Danolas went to his knees to check him out, as Benjamin next used his power to go inside of Kira. Benjamin didn’t have the knowledge of magick Danolas or Koran did. All he could do was follow his power as it searched for Kira’s. He was amazed as he slid through Kira’s body. Even though he was terrified of what he might find at the end of his journey, he couldn’t help but admire the beauty of creation. Organ by organ he traveled, until he came to the base of the problem…Kira’s heart. Glaring at the ugly green poison, Benjamin switched into his extra strength enhancement. After seeing Koran’s battle, he knew he would need all the help he could get. He lunged forward and squeezed the undulating miasma between his strong fingers as he shouted his own power words. “She has given me control. I have given her my strength. Together we will conquer our enemies.” The miasma clung to him, smothering his voice with foul smelling fog, but Benjamin’s power stabbed into the evil thing. He held on as long as he could and felt the poison cringe away from his strength. Eventually, he too fell unconscious. Danolas caught Benjamin as he fell. He laid him next to Koran, who was turning the same gray as his sister. “Keep going!” Danolas said hoarsely, who was watching the battle on 326

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining the psychic plain. “It is working. The poison is losing its strength.” Patrick stepped up and brought Kira’s cold hand to his cheek. “Okay, sweetheart,” he murmured softly. “Let’s give it a dose of faith and hope…shall we?” He closed his eyes and following his own power, chased the horrible poison fog back to Kira’s heart. Without waiting a beat, he flung himself on it, clasping it to his own body. He wanted as much contact as possible with the fog when he said his words. “She has given me hope. I have given her my faith. Together these virtues will triumph.” The fog gave a sharp cry as it undulated in pain at Patrick’s words. Patrick held on as his power fought the fog, his breath becoming shallower and his arms weaker and weaker. After several minutes, the poison gave a giant heave and threw Patrick’s body off. But the poison was weakening. It was smaller than before. Just before Patrick lost his grasp on reality, he muttered, “Don’t stop. We are defeating it.” Lucas’ eyes glowed silver as he stepped up to take his turn. He looked down at his fallen brethren, then over at Danolas and Gallegar. He tried to speak, but the words caught in his throat. Instead, he clasped both their hands, his regard for them both clear in his face. Bending down, he kissed Kira’s cold lips. “I love you, honey,” he whispered. Then putting his hand on the breast he had branded with his claws, he slipped inside. Lucas didn’t even try to sneak up on the poison. He was so full of rage at the stuff, he stalked it, like a beast would stalk its prey. He could sense the poison’s nervousness. It was sentient and aware, which was why it was so hard to defeat. Lucas growled steadily as he tracked it back to Kira’s heart. The poison was still strong, but he could tell it was diminished by the fight. 327

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas stalked over next to the poison, unafraid and putting out his large hands, willed his claws out of his fingers. With a roar of rage, he leapt upon the green ooze, slashing it to ribbons with his lethal claws as he recited… “She has given me purpose. I have given her my passion. Together we give meaning to our existence.” His power struck at the poison. It writhed and screamed as it tried to get away, but Lucas just kept coming after it. It was only when Lucas slowed for a breather , the poison was able to regroup and fight back. Still, it was a long time before Lucas dropped to the ground, broken with exhaustion and pain. “It is your turn, my friend.” Gallegar looked at Danolas, whose face had hardened as he watched each of the other Chosen go down. “And then you will finish it.” Danolas reached over and put his hand on Gallegar’s shoulder. “The rest of us are here to weaken its power. But it will be your love for her that will defeat this thing.” Danolas cupped Kira’s cheek against his palm, and his eyes misted. “She told me when we joined she wasn’t for me. That someone else was coming. Even though I knew what she was saying was the truth, it infuriated me, because she is so beautiful. I wanted her to be mine.” Gallegar was silent. He listened in surprise as his friend told him of the flame-haired woman with purple eyes that would be his witch mate. Danolas looked up and his blue eyes were blazing with emotion. “You and Kira are meant for each other. You and she will someday be together. That is why it is your life force that will save her.” “Why are you telling me this?” Gallegar asked hoarsely. “Because, the poison will defeat me as it has done the other Chosen. It will be your turn to fight, but if you allow anything to 328

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining get in your way, doubt or jealousy, the poison may win instead. Be strong in the knowledge of your love for Kira and her love for you. Love is the only thing that can defeat the curse.” “I’ll remember. Be careful, my friend. I don’t want to lose you either.” Danolas nodded, then placing his hands on Kira’s cool forehead, he took himself inside. He found himself immediately at the source of the poison. It was much smaller now and Danolas took heart in that fact. He watched as the green sludge rose up to meet him. “You have no power over me,” he told it with a sneer. “We will defeat you. You are nothing but leftover hate and anger.” The sludge gave a high screeching sound as it jumped at him. Danolas met it with outstretched hands that lanced it with rainbow fire. Pieces of the poison fell around him as he shouted his power words. “She has given me sight. I have given her my understanding. Together we will see the future.” The poison sludge tried to pick itself back up, but Danolas wouldn’t allow it. He continued to speak the words over and over again, as his rainbow power struck at it. He was fighting so hard he didn’t notice the tendril of green as it made its way behind him. Danolas didn’t know what hit him when the thing wrapped itself around his throat and began to squeeze the life from his body. In the real world, Gallegar watched in shock as Danolas’ body danced in pain. The witch fell, clawing at his throat, in a way that was reminiscent of Adrian’s demise. Quickly he laid Kira down on the fur rug and crawled over to where Danolas lay, his body twitching in agony. Gallegar looked at the Chosen, all lying so still. It was up to him now. 329

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Just as it had been when he had walked into the room at sunset. But now at least he had a chance. Gallegar moved over to Kira and took her in his arms. “You are my life,” he whispered to her, kissing her gently. “Without you, my existence is meaningless. Come back to me, A Ghra…” Pressing his cheek to hers, he pictured himself on the psychic plain with Kira. She stood next to him, her eyes closed, her body totally motionless. He pictured Benjamin’s knife in his hand, and with that same practiced gesture, sliced open his wrist. Red, life-giving blood poured out of it. Gallegar pulled Kira to him and placed his bleeding wrist against her mouth. “Kira, my beloved … A Ghra… You have shared with me your heart, You have shared with me your blood. I give back to you the blood which I took. My life force to your own. And … Forever I will stand by your side taking care of you, protecting you, loving you.” Kira’s mouth moved against his wrist…fighting him. “A Ghra… Take it…please,” he begged. Slowly on the psychic plain, the image of Kira began to ingest his blood to strengthen her life force. In reality, at the same time, Gallegar stretched himself out on top of her. Grasping her face in his hands, he pressed his lips to hers. He willed all his remaining strength…all his love into her. He refused to have any doubt, or let any fear dissuade him. Gallegar searched for her essence as he lay there kissing her with all the devotion and passion he had stored inside him. He called to her, beseeching her to come to him, but he got no answer. In desperation, he spoke the power words they had shared the night of their joining. 330

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “She has given me her heart. I have given her my life. Together, in eternity forever.” Slowly, he felt the blood she was taking from him begin to arrest the poison’s flow. Strength began to return. Gallegar looked inside at Kira’s heart and saw the poison writhing and wriggling as if in pain. He reached for it cautiously and this time when it grabbed at him, it was the thing that screamed in agony. Enraged anew, he sent his power piercing through it. Green met green in a fight to the death. The poison keened and screeched, undulating in frantic motions to escape, but Gallegar held tight, his power cutting it to pieces. He felt his own strength returning as he watched the poison turn in on itself and vanish from Kira’s body. The Chosen began to stir slowly around him. Kira didn’t move. Lucas pulled himself to his knees, shaking his head to clear it. He watched Gallegar, as he lay kissing Kira. “What is he doing?” Danolas also struggled to his knees. He took a deep breath. “He shares his life force.” He looked at the psychic plain and paled. “On the psychic level he is giving her his blood. They shared it at their joining. They now share it again. The kiss symbolizes this.” As his own image of Kira faded, Gallegar continued to call to her without success. He knew the poison had been defeated, but Kira wasn’t coming back from the oblivion she had fallen into. He began to worry he had understood too late what the Power had wanted him to do. Suddenly he remembered how he had broken through the trance Kira had been caught in last night. Again, he called to her. “A Ghra… I need you. All of your Chosen need you. If you die, so do we. The poison has been 331

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining defeated, but if you continue in this limbo, we all will cease to exist.” He listened. For a moment, he thought nothing had changed, but then…so quietly he thought he may be imagining it, he heard the soft sound of weeping. “Kira…is that you? A Ghra… Help me to find you. I can’t see you.” Again he listened. The crying became louder. He looked around frantically. “Kira,” Gallegar spoke commandingly. “Speak to me…” “Gall…egar?” “A Ghra…” Gallegar’s voice called joyfully to her. “Come to me. Let me see you.” He searched the psychic plain and sensed something in the distance. Walking slowly, reeling from weakness, Kira finally came into view. Gallegar ran to her and she fell into his arms, sobbing with gratitude. “Mo Chridhe…” Kira wrapped her arms around his waist. “I love you so…” **** Back in the bedroom, the others felt a rush of gladness as they watched Kira’s arms shakily wrap around Gallegar’s waist. The kiss continued for several long minutes, before Gallegar raised himself up on his elbows. He stared down at Kira searchingly and then grinned as her eyes flew open and she drew in a deep, life-giving breath. “Gallegar...” Danolas and Lucas laughed uproariously and pounded each other’s backs. Koran grinned and sat back on his heels, while Patrick and Benjamin gave each other high fives in delight. Gallegar rolled off of Kira’s prone body and lifted her into his lap as he sat up. “A Ghra… We thought we had lost you.” 332

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining Lucas grinned happily and bending, gave her a hard kiss. “We thought we had lost ourselves too!” “This joining had some side effects we didn’t know about.” Patrick laughed softly. “Just one more reason to protect our Lady,” Danolas quipped. Koran reached for his sister. His hand cupped her cheek as he looked her over intently. “How do you feel?” Kira smiled. She leaned against Gallegar, her small body trembling. “I am very tired, but feeling much better.” Her eyes teared as she looked around at them all. “I knew you gave me your own strength so I could live. I wanted to stop you, but I was too weak.” “We wanted you to survive, but we had selfish motivations too, sweetheart. We wanted all of us to live.” Benjamin gave her a kiss on the nose. “If Gallegar had not come when he did…” her voice trailed off. “But I did.” Gallegar looked over at Danolas. “Adrian miscalculated on this one. And we won’t let this happen again.” “Adrian?” Kira’s face filled with confusion. Quickly, they all filled her in on the wizard’s curse and how she had inadvertently sprung it at the restaurant. “One other thing, Danolas,” Gallegar put in. “Your acolyte deserves much praise. He did well getting me here.” “I will reward him.” Danolas stretched and then sat easily on the couch. Koran joined him. “And I thought last night was a tough one.” Koran looked around the room. “We have learned something here tonight.” His gaze settled on Kira. “We now know if Kira is harmed, we too will feel a portion of the same pain.” 333

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “We may be able to counteract that in some way,” Danolas broke in. “We will have to look into that.” “But what about the opposite side of the same situation?” Gallegar raised his eyebrow at Koran. “Explain.” “If we can be harmed when Kira is hurt, will Kira feel the same effects if we are? Can I be hurt, if someone tries to kill, say Patrick?” The room went quiet. No one had considered that side of the problem. Were they each vulnerable when another was hurt? All thought ended when Kira struggled to her feet, almost falling on Benjamin in her hurry to get up. “A Ghra… What is wrong?” Gallegar stood up behind her. Kira ran across the room before she turned to face them. “This is not right!” Her eyes were wild as she looked at their faces. “I did not come to you to put you in danger. I came to be of help to you. To protect you and your kind. How can I do this if you are at risk when something happens to me?” Lucas walked toward her, his hand extended soothingly. “Honey, we knew it was a dangerous gig when we signed on.” Kira was not appeased. “Did you know about this?” She backed away from him. “Did you know your life would end if mine did?” She saw the answers in their faces. “I cannot allow this. You are too important to me and to your people to be put in this position.” Danolas shrugged. “What can you do, my Lady? The joinings are finished. Our circle is complete.” Kira’s eyes hardened. “I will break the circle. I will dissolve the joinings.” “Like hell you will.” Gallegar’s voice was hard as Kira’s eyes. “You belong to us. We’re now a part of each other. A team…a family. Especially after what we went through tonight, there is no way in this world we will let you walk away from us.” 334

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Damn right!” Lucas added his opinion to Gallegar’s. “You’re stuck with us, honey.” “No matter what might happen,” came Patrick’s drawling voice. “Do you not understand?” Her voice broke with frustration. “I did not know. I will not let you die!” “A Ghra… It’s you who doesn’t understand. We aren’t going anywhere.” Gallegar came and took her shaking hands in his. “When I came in and saw you were dying, it never crossed my mind I might die too. It wouldn’t have mattered, even if it did. I wouldn’t want to exist without you. You are my life now.” She began to weep. Deep, sobbing cries that ripped their way through her tired body. “But I love you.” She buried her face in his chest. “I cannot bear the thought of being the cause of your deaths.” “Kira, my sister…” Koran’s voice was gentle as he reached over and stroked her back. “Remember, we are in this together. We don’t know exactly what would happen if any of us were to die. But if we are tied together, you could be hurt as well. Would you desert us over that possibility?” Kira turned and frowned at her brother. “Of course not. I would not be so cowardly that fear of my death would chase me away.” “But you think we should be?” Benjamin joined in the argument, his tone angry. “No…no…it is just…” Frustrated, Kira glared at all of them. She stomped her foot. “My Lady.” Danolas’ voice was slightly mocking. “It would behoove you to stop this discussion now. We are joined with you and we plan on staying that way. Nothing you can say or do will convince us otherwise.” Kira blew out her breath, defeated. She looked into the eyes of her Chosen. “I do not like this. I want you to be safe.” 335

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Sugar, we are as safe as we’re gonna get. Remember, you didn’t choose us. The Power did. We would be up to our necks in this, even if you weren’t.” Patrick came and smoothed his hand down her hair to comfort her. Kira looked around at all of the Chosen. They were all nodding in agreement. She realized she had no choice. Somewhere along the way, she had stopped being in charge of this company. They were a team now, all with definite ideas and beliefs. Times would be interesting, if nothing else. Gallegar gave her a hug and she gladly buried her face back in his chest for comfort. Danolas gave her a pat on the shoulder. “One of the first things we do will be to put wards on all our domains. The Keep kept us all alive today, because of those wards. Our security must be impregnable now we know Evil is aware of us.” Koran nodded. “We will also create a traveling ward that can go with us. That way we can be safe wherever we are.” “Like my protection spell?” Lucas asked. “What spell?” Koran was confused. Danolas said a few words, and the shimmering blue web of power that covered Lucas came into view. “This is what keeps me safe from Elijah. It keeps me from saying something that might betray us all.” Lucas lifted his arms and the blue magick followed right with him. “Ya know, I thought I saw something…” Patrick muttered. “Because of the link.” “Will you just add the new wards to this spell?” Koran wanted to know. “If possible. A traveling ward will be tricky, but I think we can manage it.” Danolas made the spell invisible once more. Kira’s stomach growled and Gallegar’s body shook with laughter. She looked up at him with a pout. “I did not get to finish my dinner. I had to leave my chocolate shake behind.” 336

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “A tragedy…” he snickered, hiding a smile. It earned him a jab in the stomach with her elbow. Danolas laughed. “We brought it with us, my Lady.” He laughed harder when he saw her perk up happily. “You will not want it now. It was given to Morag, the healer, to see if she could find the poison. That was before we knew it was a word activation spell.” “I could use something to eat as well. I left the institute rather hurriedly.” Benjamin patted his stomach as he spoke. “Jorad, Tobias!” Danolas waited until the two witches entered the room. He saw the relief on their faces and cursed himself for not letting them know he was all right sooner. “We are well, my friends. But we are hungry too. Please have the kitchen prepare us some food…a great deal of food. We have our lives to celebrate. And…” He slid a glance at Kira. “Have a large chocolate shake added to the order.” He smiled when she squealed with delight. “Jorad…” Gallegar stepped away from Kira and stopped the witch before he could leave. “Yes, High King?” “Alex…is he well?” Jorad smiled and relaxed. “I gave him a good meal and a place to sleep. I also bandaged his wound. He said he would be ready to leave when you were.” “My thanks to you, Jorad. I have told Danolas how helpful you were.” “Thank you, King Gallegar.” Jorad’s voice was surprised. “I did only what was necessary.” Gallegar put his hand out to the young witch, who took it cautiously. “Your actions helped save our lives tonight. You got me here in time to save her. For that, I will forever be in your debt. If you ever have need of me…” 337

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “Th…ank you, High King.” Jorad stared at Gallegar. The thought the king of all the vampires owed him a favor was a little too much for him to grasp. “Alex’s wound…it wasn’t bad?” “Not really. He said it was a little deeper than usual and more painful. He said you usually numb it in some way.” Gallegar sighed. “I can enthrall the person I am biting so it doesn’t hurt as much. But unfortunately for Alex, I was too weak tonight.” “He seemed to understand. He was pleased to be able to be of service to you.” Jorad bowed. “As was I.” “He will be rewarded for what he has done this night.” Gallegar smiled. “As I think you will be as well. Now…off with you. My Lady wants her shake!” Jorad grinned and bowed to Gallegar. “I will bring it to her personally.”

338

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining

Epilogue The meal came and the company fell on it like starving wolves. Or so said Patrick, who had to duck a swing from Lucas when he heard him. There was plenty for all of them, even Gallegar who was treated to a concoction made up of different types of animal blood. It wasn’t as good as drinking human blood, but the odd blending gave it an exotic taste that he found most pleasing. Kira got her chocolate shake and settled back on the couch to enjoy it. She was tired, but not so much so she needed to go to sleep. She snorted to herself. She had been resting all afternoon. No wonder she didn’t need to sleep. But the others... She looked at them as they piled their plates with food. All were talking and joking with each other like nothing had happened, but she could see the strain that sat on each of their faces. “Why the frown, sugar?” Patrick appeared next to her. He wasn’t eating. Once his life force had been restored, he was the one who seemed closest to normal. “I am worried about all of you. It took a great deal of strength to keep me alive today. I do not think everyone is completely healthy yet.” Patrick cast a quick glance at the other men. “They’re strong. Git some food in ’em and they’ll be as good as new.” He grinned at her raised eyebrow. “Okay…and some rest too!” 339

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “I think we may want to postpone going to look at the Gates.” Danolas sat down next to Kira on the couch. “We’re going to want to be at full strength for that.” “Agreed.” Gallegar sat in an overstuffed chair by the fire. “I think we have fought enough evil for one night.” Lucas sat on the floor at Kira’s feet and reaching up, popped a piece of steak in her mouth. “You gotta eat too, honey.” He turned back to the other men. “So, we’ve had our first battle and we won. We should feel good about that.” “I think our first real battle was joining together,” Kira teased. “Or maybe it was when we did the linking.” They all laughed, as they remembered Lucas’ embarrassment. “Maybe it was fighting to free Benjamin from that stupid kid.” Lucas shook his head in amazement. “He really thought he could beat you in a fight.” Kira gave a shiver as she thought of Superjack’s execution. Danolas pulled her against him for a quick hug, knowing her thoughts…as always. “I guess we could add the fight with my father.” Koran gave a grin. “He was not happy to find out that Kira was my sister. He bellowed for hours about trickery and illusion. I finally had to promise him I would begin a search for my own mate, just to keep him off my back.” “There was no fight between the two of us, A Ghra…” Gallegar said, his voice dropping to a seductive murmur. His green eyes sparkled with teasing. “So that was not our first battle.” Kira huffed as she sat up and stared at him. “Not a battle? I seem to remember us almost killing each other.” She sniffed at Gallegar’s amused face. “Of course you would say that. I was winning.” The Chosen all laughed as Gallegar’s amusement bled into outrage. 340

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining “There was no battle with Elijah, but it came close,” Lucas said consideringly. “I know I wanted to do some damage.” “And you did, my friend.” Danolas stood and replenished his drink. “You have beaten him in the oldest game there is. The con.” “We did no battle when Danolas and I joined. His was the smoothest of all.” Gallegar snorted. “That was only because I decided to let him live after he kissed you in greeting. He came very close to death that night.” Danolas shook his head, his face filled with good-natured laughter. “Now, Gallegar, you know that was just a friendly little kiss. Like a brother gives a sister.” He grinned at the glare Gallegar was treating his wineglass to. “You know I didn’t mean anything by it.” Patrick looked around the room at his happy companions. “We may not agree on what our first battle was, but I think we can agree on our next.” “The Gates of Life.” Kira took his hand in hers. “When we have all recovered from this, it will be the first thing we do. Your people are counting on us.” “And we have some more clues as to what happened, now that we’ve fought that wizard.” Benjamin cleared his plate and got up for seconds. “We know wizardry was involved.” “And we know someone was pulling Adrian’s strings.” Lucas shuddered, remembering the wizard’s collapse. “I wonder if he is dead.” Gallegar shook his head and moving from his chair, took Danolas’ place beside Kira. “I wouldn’t count on it. He made a mistake, but he still may be a useful tool.” “And if he had anything to do with closing the Gates, he will be needed to open them again. He will continue in his usefulness 341

The Peacekeeper Journals: The Joining until then.” Koran sipped his amber drink, sighing at the mellow taste of the malt whiskey. “So we know where our next fight is.” Kira laid her head lovingly against Gallegar’s broad chest. “You have convinced me we are all a team. So together we can beat the wizard’s master and open the Gates of Life.” She cuddled against Gallegar. He put his arm around her, drawing her close. “We will start tomorrow. We can gather information about the Gates and about Adrian. This time we won’t go in unarmed.” Gallegar looked around the room at his companions. “Agreed?” “And so the story begins?” Kira mused questioningly as she looked up at the man who had rescued her from oblivion. Gallegar bent and kissed her soft lips. “No, A Ghra… And so the story continues.”

342

ABOUT THE AUTHOR CJ England credits her passion for writing to her second grade sweetheart, Steven—a blond-haired cutie with dimples, who dumped her for a girl who could swing on the monkey bars. She wrote her first story about love and loss after that tragic episode. In her life she has modeled, competed in rodeo as a barrel racer and trick rider, taught preschool, performed as an actress and singer, served cocktails at Disneyworld, specialized in production work, and got carried away by Spiderman when she worked with him at Universal Studios. She calls herself a gypsy, due to her curiosity and “itchy feet.” She has spent time in fourteen countries, and has visited forty-two states in our own. She is known on the internet as a bestselling author who can bring sensuality and romance together in ways that require you keep a fire extinguisher and a box of Kleenex handy. Described as having ‘innovative story lines,’ ‘a whiz at character development,’ and ‘quite simply a genius!’…CJ wants her books to spark the imaginations of her readers. So that they will begin to believe anything can happen if you…Follow Your Dreams.

For your reading pleasure, we invite you to visit our web bookstore

WHISKEY CREEK PRESS www.whiskeycreekpress.com